Alcatel - 1696 Technical v22 PDF

Technical Handbook
Alcatel
1696MSPAN
32 + 32 Channels DWDM System
& Compact shelf
1696MSPAN REL.2.2
3AL 95278 AAAA Ed.01

3AL 95278 AAAA Ed.01
1696MSPAN REL.2.2 TECHNICAL HDBK
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

1.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.3 Product-release handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.4 Handbook Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.5 Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01 Proposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3.1 First aid for electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.2 Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.2.1 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.2.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.2.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.2.4 Harmful Optical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.2.5 Risks of Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.2.6 Moving Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.2.7 Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.2.8 Specific safety rules in this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.1.1 General Norms – Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.1.2 General Norms – Turn–on, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.1.3 General Norms – Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.3 Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
01 041015 D. LESTERLIN C. GIANNI

F. BRUYERE A.MICHAUD
ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1696MS Rel.2.2
Technical Handbook
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 1 / 390
390
4.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

6 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

6.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
6.2 Handbook supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
6.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
6.4 Handbook Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
6.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
6.4.2 Changes due to a new product-release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
6.5 Customer documentation supply on CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.5.2 Use of the CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6.5.3 CD–ROM identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6.5.4 CD–ROM updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1 FUNCTIONAL DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.1 Equipment basic configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
1.1.1 Line terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
1.1.2 Booster + Pre–amplifier Line terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
1.1.3 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM) or back–to–back terminal (hub) . . . . . . . . . 61
1.1.4 OADM or back–to–back terminal (hub) repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
1.1.5 In line repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
1.1.6 Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
1.2 Network architectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
1.2.1 Point–to–point links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
1.2.2 Ring networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
1.2.3 Host systems (ADM..) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1.3 Protection scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.1 Rack design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.2 1696MS shelf physical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.2.1 1696MS Empty shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.2.2 1696MS Shelf configuration rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.2.3 1696MS Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2.2.4 1696MS shelf front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2.3 1696MS_C (compact shelf) physical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2.3.1 1696MS_C Empty shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
2.3.2 1696MS_C Shelf configuration rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2.3.3 1696MS_C Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2.4 Equipment connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
2.4.1 Optical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2.4.2 Management and maintenance connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
2.4.3 Power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
2.4.4 User interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
2.5 Units front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
2.5.1 Tributaries front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
2.5.2 Multiplexers front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

2.5.3 Optical amplifiers front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
2.5.4 Controller front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
2.5.5 Switching protection, power supply and fans front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 2 / 390
390
3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
3.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
3.1.1 Transponder sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
3.1.2 TDM client signal concentrator (4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P) sub–system . . . . . . . . . 151
3.1.3 Wavelength Division Multiplexing sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

3.1.4 Optical Fiber Amplification sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

3.1.5 Optical supervisory channel (OSC) sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
3.1.6 Automatic Power Equalization (APE) subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
3.1.7 Controller sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
3.1.8 Power supply sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3.1.9 Protection sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
3.1.10 Performance Monitoring sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
3.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
3.2.1 Configuration criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
3.2.2 1696MS (main shelf) configurations examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
3.2.3 1696 MS_C (Compact Shelf) configurations examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
3.2.4 1696MS configured to connect a CPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
3.2.5 Two 1696MS or 1696MS_C rings connected together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
4 UNITS DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

4.1 Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4.1.1 Multirate Channel Card I (MCC1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4.1.2 Multirate Channel Card II (MCC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
4.1.3 Multirate Channel Card III (MCC3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
4.1.4 MCC_RGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
4.1.5 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card (OCC10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
4.1.6 4xANY, 4xANY_S and 4xANY_P cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
4.1.7 Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) optical modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
4.1.8 Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4.2 Multiplexers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
4.2.1 OMDX unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
4.2.2 OADM units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
4.2.3 SPV_F_1310_1550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
4.2.4 SPV_F_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
4.3 Optical Amplifier (OAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
4.3.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
4.3.2 Way of working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
4.3.3 Optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
4.3.4 Optical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
4.4 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
4.4.1 ESC board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
4.4.2 Supervision units (SPVM2, SPVM_H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
4.4.3 Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card (OSMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
4.4.4 1696MS_C Master Intershelf Link (I–LINK_M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
4.4.5 1696MS_C Slave Intershelf Link (I–LINK_S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
4.5 General user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
4.5.1 LAN board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
4.5.2 HouseKeeping board (HK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
4.5.3 Rack Alarm Interface (RAI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
4.5.4 User Interfaces Card (UIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
4.6 Switching Protection (OPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
4.6.1 Single and Multi Mode Optical Protection Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

4.7 Power Supply Card (PSC/PSC3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
4.8 Power Supply Card (PSC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 3 / 390
390
4.9 Power Management Unit (PMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
4.9.1 Batteries for PMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
4.10 FANS unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
4.10.1 FANC unit for 1696MS shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

4.10.2 FAN_C unit for 1696MS_C shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
5.1 1696MSPAN System characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
5.1.1 Main system characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
5.2 Safety requirements and mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
5.2.1 Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
5.2.2 Optical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
5.3 Boards interfaces characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
5.3.1 Tributaries optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
5.3.2 Multiplexer units (OMDX) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
5.3.3 Multiplexer units (OADM) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
5.3.4 Mux/Demux 1310–1550 + supervision unit optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
5.3.5 SPV_F_C unit optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
5.3.6 Optical Amplifier Card (OAC) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
5.3.7 SPV–M + OW and SPVM_H optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
5.3.8 OSMC optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
5.3.9 Optical Protection Cards (OPC) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
5.4 Alarm characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
5.5 Power supply characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
5.5.1 Maximum power consumption of the boards and units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
5.6 Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
5.6.1 Maximum weight of the boards and units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
5.7 Environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
5.7.1 EMC/EMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
5.7.2 Environmental constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
6 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
6.1 Maintenance introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
6.1.1 General safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
6.1.2 General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
6.1.3 Maintenance aspects: definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
6.1.4 Instruments And Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
6.2 Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
6.2.1 Routine Maintenance every six months . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
6.2.2 Routine Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
6.2.3 Routine Maintenance every five years . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
6.3 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
6.3.1 Fault location: alarm & status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
6.4 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
6.4.1 Suggested Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
6.4.2 General rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
6.4.3 Particular rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
6.5 Repair Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
UNIT DOCUMENTATION LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 4 / 390
390
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
FIGURES
Figure 1. Subrack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35


Figure 4. Labels on units with standard cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Figure 5. Modules label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 6. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 7. Back panels internal label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 8. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 9. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 10. Item identification labels – item on catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Figure 11. Label identifying the equipment (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Figure 12. The 1696MSPAN in line terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 13. The 1696MSPAN in Booster + Pre–amplifier Line Terminal (1 x OAC) configuration . . 60
Figure 14. The 1696MSPAN in Booster + Pre–amplifier Line Terminal (2 x OACs) configuration . 60
Figure 15. The 1696MSPAN in OADM configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 16. The 1696MSPAN in back–to–back terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 17. The 1696MSPAN in OADM repeater (1 OAC west side + 1 OAC east side)
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 18. The 1696MSPAN in OADM repeater (2 OACs west side + 2 OACs east side)
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 19. The 1696MSPAN in repeater configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 20. Point–to–point link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 21. Ring configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 22. Interconnected rings with data on customer ports and supervision carried by Optical Super-
vision Channel (OSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 23. Interconnected rings with data on customer ports and LAN_Q management
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 24. CPE configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 25. Connection to host equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 26. Optical SNCP protection scheme: with back–to–back terminals or OADM . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 27. Optical SNCP way of working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 28. Rack organization, 32 channel bi–directional terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 29. Shelf dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Figure 30. Typical fully equipped shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Figure 31. Example of Master shelf front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Figure 32. Shelf front view with cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Figure 33. 1696MS_C Rack version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 34. 1696MS_C Table version with and without cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 35. 1696 MS_C – Mechanical structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 36. 1696 MS_C – Main shelf board arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 37. Typical 1696MS_C equipped shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 38. Fan_C board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Figure 39. Simple MU optical connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 40. Double MU optical connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 41. LC/SPC optical connector on SFP modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 42. MCC1 and MCC2 boards Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 43. MCC3 board Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 44. OCC10 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Figure 45. 4 ANY front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Figure 46. MVAC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 5 / 390
390
Figure 47. SFP optical module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Figure 48. OMDX8100_M_L1_XS board front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Figure 49. OMDX8100_M_L2/S2/S1 boards front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 50. OADM8100_M_L1_S (L2/S1/S2) boards front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Figure 51. OADM4100_M_chxx–yy_S boards front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Figure 52. OADM2100_M_xx_yy_S board front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 53. OADM1100_M_xx_S board front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 54. SPV_F_1310_1550 board front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Figure 55. SPV_F_C board front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Figure 56. OAC1, OAC2, OAC1_L and OAC2_L front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 57. ESC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 58. SPVM2 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 59. SPVM_H front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 60. OSMC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 61. I–Link_M board front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 62. I–Link_S board front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Figure 63. LAN boards front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Figure 64. Housekeeping board front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 65. RAI front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Figure 66. UIC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Figure 67. OPC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Figure 68. PSC/PSC2/PSC3 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 69. PMU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 70. FANs front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figure 71. Functional synopsis in Line Terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Figure 72. Functional synopsis in OADM configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Figure 73. Functional synopsis in Repeater configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Figure 74. Line terminal transponder function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 75. Back–to–back terminal or OADM transponder function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 76. Principle of the 4xANY TDM concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Figure 77. 4 and 8 channels optical MUXes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 78. LB and SB aggregate signals expansion MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 79. 4 and 8 channels optical DMUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 80. LB and SB aggregate signals expansion MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 81. MUX and DMUX functions of an 8 channels Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 82. MUX and DMUX functions of a 12 channels Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 83. MUX and DMUX functions of a 32 channels Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Figure 84. MUX and DMUX functions of an 8 channels OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Figure 85. MUX and DMUX functions of a 32 channels back–to–back terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Figure 86. 1696MSPAN in back–to–back terminal configuration and with a remote channel . . . . . 156
Figure 87. OFA sub–system in line terminal or OADM configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Figure 88. OFA sub–system in repeater configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Figure 89. Optical Supervisory Channel management in Line Terminal, OADM, OADM repeater and
In–Line–Repeater Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Figure 90. Automatic Power Equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Figure 91. Controller sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Figure 92. Example of control interfaces scheme in 1696MS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Figure 93. Example of control interfaces scheme in 1696MS_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Figure 94. 1696MSPAN – equipment power supply scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 95. Channel level protection in a ring network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 96. O–SNCP principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Figure 97. Optical SNCP with MCC units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Figure 98. Optical SNCP of the MCC associated with the 4xANY (MCC–4xANY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Figure 99. Optical SNCP with OCC10 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 6 / 390
390
Figure 100. Optical SNCP of the MCC associated with the 4xANY (4xANY client protection) . . . . 173
Figure 101. Correspondance between OPC slots allocation and 4xANY drawers in protection . . . 174
Figure 102. Two possible monitored sections by the MCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Figure 103. Example of starting configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Figure 104. 4 channels OADM board used as a terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Figure 105. 4 channels terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Figure 106. Example of 8 channels line terminal with expansion and supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Figure 107. Example of 8 channels line terminal with supervision (no expansion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Figure 108. Example of a 16 channels terminal with expansion and SPV upgradability . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 109. Example of a 32 channels terminal + SPV + two stages OAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Figure 110. 32 channels terminal + SPV + 2 stages OAC configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Figure 111. 4 channels back–to–back terminal / OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Figure 112. 8 OADM protected channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Figure 113. 8 channels OADM with EXP and SPV capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Figure 114. 8 channels OADM with supervision upgrade capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 115. 8 West / 4 East channels OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 116. 12 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 117. 16 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 118. 16 channels OADM with supervision and expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 119. 32 protected channels back–to–back with supervision and one OAC per side . . . . . . . 194
Figure 120. Repeater with supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 121. 4 x ANY node without drawers protection configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Figure 122. 4 x ANY node with drawers protection configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Figure 123. 8–channel terminal with SPV and OAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Figure 124. 12–channel terminal without SPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 125. OADM 4 channels protected back–to–back with supervision and OAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Figure 126. Remote 4xANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Figure 127. Remote MCC or MCC+4xANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Figure 128. Unprotected remote MCC or MCC+4xANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Figure 129. One protected transponderon the same fiber (2 channel wavelengths) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Figure 130. Back–to–back 4XANY intended to drop some of the carried services and by–pass the oth-
ers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Figure 131. Remote unprotected MCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Figure 132. OADM 1 channel protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Figure 133. Remote Spur 4xANY + protected MCC on 1310 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Figure 134. Remote Spur 4xANY + protected MCC on 1550 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Figure 135. 2 channels Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Figure 136. Remote CPE, 2–channel terminal: MCC + 4xANY with drawers protection . . . . . . . . . 211
Figure 137. SPV Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Figure 138. 1696MS connected to a CPE through a supervised black–and–white signal . . . . . . . . 213
Figure 139. 1696MS connected to a CPE through a supervised black–and–white and colored signal
and protected in the ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
and unprotected in the ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Figure 141. Optical channel optically passed through the NE without being regenerated. . . . . . . . 216
Figure 142. Optical channel optically passed through the NE without being regenerated and with OSC
insertion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Figure 143. Interconnection of two rings with a 1696MS and a 1696MS_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Figure 144. Two 1696MS rings connected together through user interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Figure 145. Two 1696MS rings connected together through user interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 146. Block diagram of the MCC1 boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Figure 147. MCC in default configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Figure 148. Drop / Insert without Optical–SNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Figure 149. Drop / Insert with Optical–SNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 7 / 390
390
Figure 150. Pass–Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Figure 151. Local Loop–Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Figure 152. Remote Loop–Back in ring application (back–to–back or OADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Figure 153. User Loop–Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Figure 154. User Loop–Back & pass–through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Figure 156. Block diagram of the MCC2 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Figure 157. MCC2 in default configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Figure 158. Drop / Insert without Optical–SNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Figure 160. Pass–through (regeneration configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Figure 161. Local Loop–Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 163. User Loop–Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Figure 164. User Loop–Back & pass–through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Figure 166. Block diagram of the MCC3 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Figure 167. OCC10 unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Figure 168. Drop / Insert without Optical–SNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Figure 169. Drop–insert (UNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Figure 171. Pass–through (NNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Figure 172. Regeneration (two pass–through linked by 10G backpanel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Figure 173. Drop–insert remote loop–back (UNI) in ring application (back–to–back or OADM) . . . 260
Figure 174. Local Loop–Back (UNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 175. User Loop–Back (UNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 176. 4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Figure 177. SFP modules general block diagram (with PIN photodetector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Figure 178. MVAC unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Figure 179. Example of MVAC location in the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Figure 180. OMDX8100_M_L1_XS: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Figure 181. OMDX8100_M_L1_X: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 182. OMDX8100_M_L2 , OMDX8100_M_S1 , OMDX8100_M_S2 : block diagram . . . . . . . 274
Figure 183. OADM8: block–diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Figure 184. OADM4: block–diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Figure 185. Block diagram of the OADM2100_M_xx_S unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Figure 186. OADM1100: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 187. Block diagram of the SPV_F_1310_1550 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Figure 188. Block diagram of the SPV_F_C unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Figure 189. Position of SPV_F_C unit in a transmission line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Figure 190. Amplifier boards block–diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Figure 191. Optical amplifiers configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Figure 192. Span variation compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Figure 193. Amplifier tuning for number of channels changes (previous span loss constant) . . . . . 288
Figure 194. SPVM2 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Figure 195. SPVM board in a Line Terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Figure 196. SPVM board in an OADM or Back–To–Back configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Figure 197. OMSC block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Figure 198. OSMC connection (measured points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Figure 199. I–Link_M block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 200. I–Link_S block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Figure 201. Electrical access, slot description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Figure 202. Block diagram of control LAN board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Figure 203. LAN board settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 8 / 390
390
Figure 204. Electrical links between RAI cards (slot 37) and TRU & PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Figure 205. 2 Mbit/s back–panel links between UIC Cards and the SPVM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Figure 206. OPC block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 207. PSC2 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Figure 208. PMU cabling scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Figure 209. PMU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Figure 210. Minimum configuration of the batteries in 1696MS_C Rel. 2.2, rack version . . . . . . . . 311
Figure 211. Maximum configuration of the batteries in 1696MS_C Rel. 2.2, table version . . . . . . . 311
Figure 212. Fan shelf description and Rack partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Figure 213. FAN_C description and Rack partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Figure 214. ALS mechanism on WDM line in point–to–point configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Figure 215. ALS in OADM configuration, channel in pass–through or in add/drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Figure 216. ALS procedure in a ring with Optical SNCP, in case of fiber failure in the ring . . . . . . . 328
Figure 217. ALS procedure in a point–to–point amplified transmission without OADM repeater . . 329
Figure 218. ALS mechanism with cascaded pre–amplifier and booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Figure 219. ALS mechanism with single pre–amplifier and booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Figure 220. Restart algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Figure 221. Climatogram for hazard level 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location . . . . . . 366
Figure 222. Climatogram for hazard level 3.2: partly temperature controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . 369
Figure 223. FAN_C: no–dast filter extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Figure 224. position of the alarms in a terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Figure 225. position of the alarms in an OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Figure 226. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
TABLES
Table 1. Handbooks related to the product’s hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Table 2. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control . . 14
Table 3. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Table 4. Documentation on CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Table 5. Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Table 6. IEC 950 –Table 16: Over–temperature limits, Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Table 7. Label references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table 8. 1696MS boards and units list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table 9. 1696MS explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Table 10. 1696MS_C boards and units list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Table 11. 1696MS_C explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Table 12. Example of Client signals – supported bit rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Table 13. Nominal frequencies allocation plan in C–Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Table 14. MCC protection: switching criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Table 15. OCC10 protection: switching criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Table 16. 4xANY client protection: switching criteria per each drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Table 17. Default thresholds for QoS alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Table 18. Configuration criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Table 19. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Table 29. MCC2 default Lasers and VOA states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 9 / 390
390
Table 30. OCC10 Shut down mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Table 31. OCC10 configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Table 32. Remote Loop–Back pass–through (NNI) in ring application (back–to–back or OADM) . 259
Table 33. Remote loop–back (NNI) in ring application (back–to–back or OADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Table 34. OCC10 default Lasers and VOA states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Table 35. Allowed drawers association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Table 36. Main differences between OAC1, OAC1_L, OAC2 and OAC2_L optical amplifiers . . . . . 283
Table 37. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Table 38. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD disable forced ON/OFF . . . . . . 289
Table 39. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Table 40. PDU Front Panel LED Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Table 41. TRU Front Panel LED Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Table 42. PSC and PSC3 LEDs signification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Table 43. Nominal frequencies allocation plan in C–Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Table 44. Relation between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity ter-
minology used for the ESC leds and ETSI market rack (TRU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Table 45. Valid tests and compliance criteria for immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Table 46. Requirements for RF emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Table 47. Main climatic conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Table 50. Example of correspondence between CS and ’suffix + ICS’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Table 51. Hardware presetting documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 10 / 390
390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
HANDBOOK GUIDE
11 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
12 / 390
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK
1.1 General information

ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or
special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
NOTICE
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.
COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
1.2 Handbook applicability
This handbook applies to the following product-releases:
PRODUCT ANV P/N FACTORY P/N

1696MSPAN 3AL 86601 AAAA 521.210.000
PRODUCT RELEASE VERSION (N.B.) ANV P/N FACTORY P/N

1696MSPAN 2.2 – 3AL 95009 ABAA
N.B. See NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS in para.6.4.1

on page 52.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 13 / 390
390
1.3 Product-release handbooks
The list of handbooks given here below is valid on the issue date of this Handbook and
can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.

Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available on the issue date of this
Handbook.
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose
product-release-version is stated on the manual’s front page consists of the following handbooks:
Table 1. Handbooks related to the product’s hardware
FACTORY THIS
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No.
Part No. HDBK
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2
3AL 95278 AAAA ––––––––
Technical Handbook
[1]
Provides information regarding Equipment description, Maintenance, Hardware
setting documentation.
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2
3AL 95278 CAAA ––––––––
Installation Handbook
[2]
Provides stepped procedural instructions for unpacking, inspecting, Alcatel Part
Number assembling, and mounting and wiring bays, sub–frames, I/O panels,
ancillary items, and cabling.
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2
3AL 95278 DAAA ––––––––
Turn–On & Commissioning Handbook
[3]
Provides procedures to support visual inspection, module installation, Alcatel Part
Number and provisioning; and local network element verification tests and generic
network tests.
Table 2. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control
THIS
FACTORY
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. HDBK
Part No.
or note
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2
3AL 95278 BAAA ––––––––
Operator’s Handbook
[4]
Provides information regarding maintenance using the craft terminal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 14 / 390
390
Table 3. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform
FACTORY THIS
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No.
Part No. HDBK

1320CT 3.X
3AL 79551 AAAA 957.140.042 N
Basic Operator’s Handbook
[5]
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT
(Craft terminal) of Alcatel Info–Model Network Elements.
1330AS Rel.6.5
3AL 88876 AAAA
Operator’s Handbook
[6]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm
Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
ELB Rel.2.X Operator’s Handbook 3AL 88877 AAAA
[7]
Provide detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log
Browser software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 15 / 390
390
Table 4. Documentation on CD–ROM
See para.6.5 on page 53
REF CD–ROM TITLE ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No.

1696MSPAN Rel.2.2 CD–ROM–DOC EN 3AL 95279 AAAA ––––––––
[8]
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF.[1] to [4]
Envisaged after the release of all handbooks.
1320CT 3.X CD–ROM–DOC EN 3AL 79552 AAAA 417.100.032
[9]
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF.[5] to [7]
Envisaged after the release of all handbooks
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 16 / 390
390
1.4 Handbook Structure
This handbook has been edited according to the Alcatel standardized “drawing–up guides” complying with
such suggestion.
This handbook is divided into the following main topics as described in the table of contents:
HANDBOOK GUIDE: It contains general information on safety norms, EMC and type
of labels that might be affixed to the equipment. Furthermore,
it describes the handbook structure and the customer
documentation. The abbreviation list is supplied too.
DESCRIPTION: It contains all the equipment’s general and detailed system

features including its application in the telecommunication
network. Furthermore, it supplies the equipment description and
specifications (i.e., system, mechanical,electrical and/or
optical).
MAINTENANCE: It contains all the details for periodic checks, fault location and
repair procedures and restore to normal operation through the
withdrawal of faulty units and their replacement with spares (*)
APPENDICES: Section envisaged (but not necessarily included) to describe

possible alternative unit.
HARDWARE SETTING It encloses the documents related to unit hardware setting

DOCUMENTATION: operations, if envisaged.
ANNEXES: Section envisaged (but not necessarily included) containing

additional documentation or general information on other topics
not inherent to the chapters making up the handbook.
(*) If the equipment is software integrated and man–machine interfaced (through a PCD, PC, Work
Station or other external processing/displaying system) the maintenance carried out with such
system is described in the Operator’s Handbook (see para.1.3 on page 14 )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 17 / 390
390
1.5 Handbook configuration check
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts

The following table indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.
Legenda
n = new part p =proposal part

m = modified part PR =proposal edition
Table 5. Handbook configuration check
EDITION 01 02 03 04 05 06
DESCRIPTION n
1. GENERAL n
2. PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION n
3. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION n
4. UNITS DESCRIPTION n
5. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION n
MAINTENANCE n
6. MAINTENANCE n
APPENDICES
Nothing envisaged
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION n
Unit documentation list n
ANNEXES
Nothing envisaged
Note: the edition of the enclosed documents (sections HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION
and ANNEXES) is not subjected to configuration check.
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01
Ed.01 created on October 2004 is the first validated and officially released issued of this Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 18 / 390
390
2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS.
2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

The CE markings printed on the product denote compliancy with the following Directives:
• 89/336/EEC of May 3rd, 1989 (EMC Directives), amended
– by the 92/31/EEC Directive issued on April 28th, 1992
– by the 93/68/EEC Directive issued on July 22nd, 1993
Compliancy to the above Directives is declared, when the equipment is installed as for the manufacturer
handbooks, according to the following European Norms:
• EN 300 386 (V1.3.1), environment “Telecommunication center”
WARNING
This is a class A product of EN 55022. In domestic, residential and light industry environments, this product
may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Compliancy Class of Compact shelf on table configuration: B

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 19 / 390
390
2.2 Safety
Compliancy to Safety Norms is declared in that the equipment satisfies standardized Norms :

• IEC 60950–1 ed. 2001 , for electrical safety

• EN 60950–1 ed. 2001 , for electrical safety
• EN 60825–1 ed. 1994 + A11 ed. 1996 + A2 ed. 2001 for optical safety
• IEC 60825–1 ed. 1993 + A2 ed. 2001 (1999) for optical safety
• EN 60825–2 ed. 2000 for optical safety
• IEC 60825–2 ed. 2000 for optical safety

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 20 / 390
390
3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS
3.1 First aid for electric shock

Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened.
Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with dry
material and free the patient from the conductor.
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
It is important to start mouth to mouth resuscitation at once and seek medical help immediately.
TREATMENT OF BURNS
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
the artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
WARNING:
• Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts;
• Apply dry gauze on the burns;
• Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 21 / 390
390
Mouth to mouth resuscitation method
Lay the patient supine with his arms parallel with the body, if the patient is laying

on an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest.

1
Open the patient’s mouth and check that there are no extraneous bodies in his
mouth (dentures, chewing–gum etc.),
Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put

a hand under the patient’s head and one under
2
his neck (see fig.) Lift the patient’s head and let
it recline backwards as far as possible
Shift the hand from the patient’s neck to is chin:

place your thumb between his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the
3 other fingers closed together (see fig.). While
performing these operations take a good supply
of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your
mouth open.
With your thumb between the patient’s chin and

4 mouth keep his lips together and blow into his
nasal cavities (see fig.)
While performing these operations observe if the

patient’s chest rises (see fig.) If not it is possible
that his nose is blocked: in that case open the
patient’s mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around
5 his mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observe
if the patient’s chest heaves. This second
method can be used instead of the first even
when the patient’s nose is kept closed by
pressing the nostrils together using the hand you
were holding his head with. The patient’s head
must be kept sloping backwards as much as
possible.
6 Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteen

expirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained
consciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 22 / 390
390
3.2 Safety Rules
3.2.1 General Rules

• Before carrying out any installation, turn–on, tests & operation and maintenance operations
carefully read the relevant Handbooks and chapters.
• Observe safety rules
– When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment
parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools
– In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating
this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical
assistance is meant :
”personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be

aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary
measurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others”.
The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified
is not permitted.
The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give
access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong
exclusively to the service personnel.
– For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any
inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings,
inscriptions ect.
– It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
• The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety,
i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
• Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.
To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station
upstream (rack or station distribution frame).
• Unless fitted into the equipment, an external protection device on power supply will be provided
in the building installation. The breaking capacity of the device will be adequate to the maximum
short circuit current which can flow.
• The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and
statement:
SAFETY RULES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 23 / 390
390
3.2.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command
It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.

The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 3846–1984. The symbols or statements are

enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 3864–1984.
CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT

INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND
WHIT RED RIM–BLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT)
IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUND–WHITE
SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).
CONTAINS A SYMBOL
INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW
BACKGROUND–BLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)
CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATION

OR INSTRUCTION.
(YELLOW BACKGROUND–BLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standard–known
symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common
ones, specifically:
• dangerous electrical voltages
• harmful optical signals
• risk of explosion
• moving mechanical parts
• heat–radiating Mechanical Parts
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 24 / 390
390
The symbols presented in para.3.2.3 through 3.2.7 are all the possible symbols that could be
present on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment this
handbook refers to.
3.2.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages
3.2.3.1 Labelling
The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).
If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the equipment
will have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
WARNING !
Ground protect the equipment before
connecting it to manins
Make sure that power has been cut off
before disconnecting ground protection.
3.2.3.2 Electrical safety: general rules
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where A.C. or
D.C. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance
documents and the following general rules:
a) Personal injury can be caused by –48 V dc (or by 220 V ac if envisaged in the equipment). Avoid
touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
b) Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in
burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
3.2.3.3 Electrical safety: equipment specific data
Refer to para. 5.2.1 on page 323.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 25 / 390
390
3.2.4 Harmful Optical Signals
3.2.4.1 Labelling

If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 825–1–1993

International Norms.
The symbol indicates the presence of a LASER beam. Danger level is stated within a rectangular label:
If the LASER is a class 1 or 1M product, the label depicting the symbol within a triangle is not compulsory.
The rectangular shaped label bears all the information needed, i.e.:
• LASER class
• Power emitted
• Wavelength
• Ref. Norm
• Precautionary measures taken depend on LASER class
• Indications given on openings, panels and safety interlocks
exemple of power and lenght values

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 26 / 390
390
3.2.4.2 Optical safety: general rules
On handling optical equipments or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed and
that the system complies with applicable optical standards.
DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by

the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures for
installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables
transporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turn–up and commissioning /
maintenance documents and the following general rules:
a) Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen,
laser radiation may be present.
b) Never look directly into a not terminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable,
unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
c) Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laser
radiation is present.
d) All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided with
protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is
disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation.
e) Never look directly into a not terminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable by
means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. A
magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes.
f) Never point a not terminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector to other persons, unless it is
absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
g) Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical
links between the transmitter and the receiver.
h) Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on optical
devices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.
3.2.4.3 Optical safety: equipment specific data
Refer to para. 5.2.2 on page 323.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 27 / 390
390
3.2.5 Risks of Explosions
3.2.5.1 Labelling and safety instructions

This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signalled by the following label:

Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow
(battery–emitted hydrogen). A 417–IEC–5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the
openings must not be covered up.
3.2.6 Moving Mechanical Parts
The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been
stopped.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 28 / 390
390
3.2.7 Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts

The presence of heat–radiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy
with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
As stated by IEC 60950 Norm., para.1.4.7 the touchable mechanical parts carrying the above depicted
warning label, are those whose temperature T exceeds the limits established by the following formula
(temperatures in °C ):
(T–Tamb) (DTmax + 25° – Tmra)

where:
T Temperature of the mechanical part measured at ambient temperature Tamb.

Tamb Ambient temperature during the test.
DTmax Value defined by IEC 950 Norm, Table 16 part 2a, para.5.1, and specified in the
table below.
Tmra The maximum room ambient temperature permitted by the equipment
specification or 25°C, whichever is greater.
Table 6. IEC 950 –Table 16: Over–temperature limits, Part 2
Maximum over–temperature (°C )

Operator–accessible parts
Glass, Plastic,
Metal
porcelain rubber
Handle knob, ect., held or touched

35 45 60
for short periods
Handles, knobs, ect., regularly held 30 40 50
Outer surface of the equipment that

45 55 70
can be touched
Inner surface of the equipment that

45 55 70
can be touched
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where
heat–radiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turn–up and
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:
a) Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of
your body.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 29 / 390
390
3.2.8 Specific safety rules in this handbook
Specific safety rules are specified in the following paragraphs:

– para. 5.2 on page 323

– para. 6.1.1 on page 373
– para. 6.2.1.1 on page 375
– para. 6.2.2.1 on page 377

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 30 / 390
390
4 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS
4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility

The equipment’s EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination,
grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic
units, presence of dummy covers, etc.).
• Before starting any installation, turn–on, tests & operation and maintenance work refer to the
relevant Handbooks and chapters.
• The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook
by the symbol and term:
ATTENTION EMC NORMS
4.1.1 General Norms – Installation
• All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use
only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant
Documentation, or those specified in the Customer’s”Installation Norms.” (or similar
documents)
• Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
• Install filters outside the equipment as required
• Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance
• Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before
having cleaned and degreased it.
• Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.)
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
• To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 31 / 390
390
4.1.2 General Norms – Turn–on, Tests & Operation
• Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility

• Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,

ESD connector protections, etc.)
• To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given
4.1.3 General Norms – Maintenance
• Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean
and degrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)
• Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 32 / 390
390
4.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD)
Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary
measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated
the maintenance and monitoring operations.

Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this concern the following warning
labels have been affixed:
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the
installation/maintenance phases.
Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of:
ELASTICIZED BAND
COILED CORD
• an elastic band worn around the wrist
• a coiled cord connected to the elastic band and to the stud on the subrack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 33 / 390
390
4.3 Suggestions, notes and cautions
Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol:

Suggestion or note....

Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:
TITLE...
(caution to avoid equipment damage)

statement....
4.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment
This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and serial
labels affixed to the equipment.
Figure 1. to Figure 7. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules and
subracks.
Figure 8. to Figure 11. illustrate the information (e.g., identification and serial No.) printed on the labels.
The table below relates the reference numbers stated on the figures to the labels used.
Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.
Table 7. Label references
Ref. No. Name of Label
1 label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial num-

ber)
2 label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
3 item identification label – item on catalog
4 label identifying the equipment
On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment.

Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer.
However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 34 / 390
390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
4
01
Figure 1. Subrack label
2
ABCD
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Table 7. on page 34
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
35 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
ABC

2
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
36 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
NB.1
2
NB.1 = The label is present on the support side

ABC

390
3AL 95278 AA AA
37 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
ABC
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
xxxxxxxxx
2
Figure 4. Labels on units with standard cover plate
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
3
38 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
ABC
Figure 5. Modules label

390
3AL 95278 AA AA
2
39 / 390
NB.1
1
ABC
NB.1 = The label is present on the p.c.s. component side

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 6. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 40 / 390
390
NB.1
ABC
NB. 1 = The label is present on p.c.s. components side or rear side on the empty spaces.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 7. Back panels internal label
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 41 / 390
390
FACTORY P/N + CS

FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE

(format 128; Module = 0,166; EN 799; Subset B/C)
Figure 8. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + space + ICS

ALCATEL FACTORY PART
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + ICS BAR CODE NUMBER + SPACE + CS
(format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
ACRONYM
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE

SERIAL NUMBER (format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 9. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 42 / 390
390
FREQUENCY
ACRONYM
(Optional)
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER
Figure 10. Item identification labels – item on catalog
EQUIPMENT NAME
Figure 11. Label identifying the equipment (example)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 43 / 390
390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
44 / 390
5 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
A/D Add and Drop functionality

ADM Add and Drop Multiplex

AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALC Automatic Laser Control
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
APS Automatic Protection switching
APSD Automatic Power ShutDown
AS Alarm Surveillance
ASAP Alarm Severity Assignment Profile
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
AT ATtended Alarm
ATTD ATtended (Alarm storing)
AU Administrative Unit
AUI Attachment Unit Interface for LAN connection
BER Bit Error Rate
BOL Beginning of Life
Ch Channel
CID Card IDentifier
CLEI Common Language Equipment Identification
CPE Costumer Premises Equipment
CSF Communication Subsystem Failure
CT Craft Terminal
DWDM Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplex
DCN Data Communication network
DCU Dispersion Compensating Unit
DFB Distributed Feedback Bragg
DL Download
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
DMUX Demultiplexing
DTMF Dual Tone Modulation FrequencyDTV (Decision Threshold voltage)
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 45 / 390
390
DV Digital Video
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplex

EC Equipment Controller

ECC Embedded Channel Communication
ECID Enhanced Card IDentifier
ECT Equipment Craft Terminal
ECC Embedded Channel Communication
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EML Equipment Management Layer
EOL End Of Life
EOW Engineering Order Wire
ESC Equipment and Shelf Controller
ESD Electrostatic Discharges
ETSI European Telecommunication Standard Institute
EXP Expansion
FC Fiber Channel
FDI Forward Defect Indication
FEC Forward Error Correction
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
HDLC High Level Data Link Control
HK HouseKeeping
HW HardWare
HWF HardWare Failure
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
I/F Interface
ILOS Input Loss Of Signal
IND INDeterminate
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
I/O Input/Output
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 46 / 390
390
IOPV Input Optical Power Voltage
IP Internet Protocol
ISO International Standard Organization

ISPB Intra Shelf Parallel Bus
ISSB Intra Shelf Serial Bus
IT Inter–stage
ITU_T International Telecommunication Union –Telecommunication
LAN Local Area Network
LAPD Link Access Protocol D
LB Long Band
LOC Loss Of Clock
LOS Loss Of Signal
LED Light Emitting Diode
LSD Laser ShutDown
LT Line Terminal
MAC Medium Access Control
MCC Multi Channel Card
MMF Multi Mode Fiber
MS Multiplex Section
MVAC Multi Variable Attenuation Card
NE Network Element
NDC Negative Dispersion Chromatic
NES Network Element Synthesis
NML Network Management Layer
NMS Network Management System
NNI Network Node Interface
NSAP Network Service Access Point
NTP Network Time Protocol
NURG Not URGent

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
OAC Optical Amplifier Card
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 47 / 390
390
OADM Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer
OAM Operator Alarm Maintenance

OBPS On Board Power Supply

OCH Optical Channel
OCHA Optical Channel Adaptation
ODU Optical channel Data Unit
OFA Optical Fiber Amplifier
OGPI Optical Generic Physical Interface
OMDX Optical Multiplexer and DemultipleXer
OMS Optical Multiplex Section
OMSA Optical Multiplex Section Adaptation
OOPV Output Optical Power Voltage
OPC Optical Protection Card
OS Operation System
OSC Optical supervisory channel
OSMC Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card
OSNR Optical Signal Noise Ratio
OSPI Optical Generic Physical Interface
OTN Optical Transport Network
OTS Optical Transmission Section
OTU Optical channel Transport Unit
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDL Polarization Dependent Loss
PDU Power Distribution Unit
PI Physical Interface
PM Performance Monitoring
PMU Power Management Unit
PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
PSC Power Supply Card
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 48 / 390
390
Q3 Interface with Q3 Protocol
QECC Interface with Q protocol for Embedded Control Channel

QoS Quality of Service

RAM Random Access Memory
RAI Remote Alarm Interface cart
RDI Remote Defect Indication
RECT REmote Craft Terminal
RI Remote Inventory
RUM Replaceable Unit Missing
RUP Replaceable Unit Problem
RUTM Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch
RX Receiver
SB Short Band
SC Shelf Controller
SD ShutDown
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFP Small Formfactor Pluggable
SMF Single Mode Fiber
SNCP Sub–Network Connection Protection
SPI Serial Peripheral Interface
SPVF SuPerVision Filter
SPVM SuPerVision Module
SSF Server Signal Failure
SWDL SoftWare DownLoad
SWP SoftWare Product
TCA Threshold Crossed Alarm
TRU Top Rack Unit
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TMN Telecommunication Management Network

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
TP Termination Point
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 49 / 390
390
TRU Top Rack Unit
TTP Trail Termination Point

TX Transmitter

UEP Unequipped Equipment Present
UIC User Interface Card
UNI User Network Interface
URG URGent
USM User Service Manager
VOA Variable Optical Attenuator
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 50 / 390
390
6 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION
6.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation

A ”product” is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of
performance and services for which it is meant.
A ”product” evolves through successive ”product-releases” which are the real products marketed for
their delivery at a certain ”product-release” availability date.
So, a ”product–release” defines a set of hardware components and a software package which, as a whole,
identify the possible network applications and the equipment performance which the specific
”product-release” has been designed, engineered and marketed for.
In some cases a ”product-release” has further development steps, named ”versions”, that are born to
improve or add some performance (mainly software) with respect to the previous version, or for bug fixing
purposes.
A ”product-release” has its own standard Customer Documentation, composed by one or more
handbooks.
A new ”version” of a ”product-release” may or may not produce a change in the status of the Customer
Documentation set, as described in para.6.4 on page 52.
6.2 Handbook supply to Customers
Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to.
The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.
6.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation
Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plant-independent.

Plant-dependent documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far
as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned (plant-dependent documentation is not
described here).
Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility
and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating and maintaining the equipment
according to Alcatel Laboratory design choices.
In particular: the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the
explanation of the man-machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it; maintenance is
described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.
Consequently, no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and
production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.
The handbooks concerning hardware (usually the ”Technical Handbook”) and software (usually the
”Operator’s Handbook”) are kept separate in that any product changes do not necessarily concern their
contents.
For example, only the Technical Handbook might be revised because of hardware configuration
changes (e.g., replacing a unit with one having different P/N but the same function).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
On the other hand, the Operator’s Handbook is updated because of a new software version but which
does not concern the Technical Handbook as long as it does not imply hardware modifications.
However, both types of handbooks can be updated to improve contents, correct mistakes, etc..
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 51 / 390
390
6.4 Handbook Updating
The handbooks associated to the ”product–release” are listed in para.1.3 on page 6 .

Each handbook is identified by:

– the name of the ”product-release” (and ”version” when the handbook is applicable to the versions
starting from it, but not to the previous ones),
– the handbook name,
– the handbook P/N,
– the handbook edition (usually first edition=01),
– the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date
on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production.
6.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)
The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons:
– only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to the
editorial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook.
– the edition, hence the date, is changed because modifications made concern technical contents. In
this case:
• the chapters modified with respect to the previous edition are listed in Table 5. on page 18;
• in affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text and
drawings.
Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.g. from
Ed.01 to Ed.02). Slight changes (e.g. for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition of
a version character (e.g. from Ed.02 to Ed.02A). Version character can be used for draft or proposal
editions.
NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
Handbooks (or part of the handbook) relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’s
Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software ”version” distributed to Customers
implies man–machine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the
understanding of the explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-release’s
”version” marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if
the screen contents are unchanged.
6.4.1.1 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers
Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted to
commercial criteria.
By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue
(supplying errata–corrige sheets is not envisaged).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
6.4.2 Changes due to a new product-release
A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01.
In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 52 / 390
390
6.5 Customer documentation supply on CD–ROM
In the following ’CD–ROM’ means ’Customer Documentation on CD–ROM’

6.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CD–ROM
In most cases, a CD–ROM contains in read–only eletronic format the documentation of one
product–release(–version) and for a certain language.
In some other cases, the same CD–ROM can contain the documentation of different
product–release(–version)s for a certain language.
As a general rule:
– CD–ROMs for Network Management products do not contain:
• the Installation Guides
• the documentation of system optional features that Customers could not buy from Alcatel
together with the main applicative SW.
– CD–ROMs for Network Elements products do not contain:
• the documentation of system optional features (e.g. System Installation Handbooks related to
racks that Customers could not buy from Alcatel together with the main equipment).
A CD–ROM is obtained collecting various handbooks and documents in .pdf format. Bookmarks and
hyperlinks make the navigation easier. No additional information is added to each handbook, so that the
documentation present in the CD–ROMs is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper.
The files processed in this way are added to files/images for managing purpose and a master CD–ROM
is recorded.
Suitable checks are made in order to have a virus–free product.
After a complete functional check, the CD–ROM image is electronically transferred to the archive of the
Production Department, so that the CD–ROM can be produced and delivered to Customers.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 53 / 390
390
6.5.2 Use of the CD–ROM
The CD–ROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments.

The CD–ROM starts automatically with autorun and hyperlinks from the opened “Index” document permit

to visualize the .pdf handbooks
Other hyperlinks permit to get, from the Technical handbooks, the specific .pdf setting documents.
In order to open the .pdf documents Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 4.0 (minimum) must have been
installed on the platform.
The CD–ROM doesn’t contain the Adobe Acrobat Reader program. The Customer is in charge of getting
and installing it.
ReadMe info is present on the CD–ROM to this purpose.
Then the Customer is allowed to read the handbooks on the PC/WS screen, using the navigation and
zooming tools included in the tool, and to print selected parts of the documentation through a local printer.
6.5.3 CD–ROM identification
Each CD–ROM is identified:
1) by the following external identifiers, that are printed both on the booklet and the CD–ROM upper
surface:
– the name of the ”product–release(s)” (and ”version” if applicable),
– a writing indicating the language(s),
– the CD–ROM P/N (Factory P/N and ANV P/N),
– the CD–ROM edition (usually first edition=01)
2) and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose
collection and processing the CD–ROM itself has been created.
6.5.4 CD–ROM updating
The list of source handbook/document P/Ns–editions indicated in section 6.5.3 point 2 ) , in association
with the CD–ROM own P/N–edition, is also loaded in the Alcatel–Information–System as a structured list.
Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released, a check is made in the
Alcatel–Information–System to identify the list of CD–ROMs that must be updated to include the new
editions of these handbooks/documents.
This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CD–ROM.
Updating of CD–ROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks
composing the collection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 54 / 390
390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
DESCRIPTIONS
55 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
56 / 390
1 FUNCTIONAL DESIGN
The 1696MSPAN product is a DWDM equipment intended for the so called ”enterprise” and metropolitan
market. It is compliant with both ETSI and ANSI standards.
It provides a higher transmission capacity on a single optical fiber by multiplexing up to 32 channels in the
C–band at the following bit rates:
• up to 2.5 Gbit/s (STM–16 / OC–48)
• 10 Gbit/s (STM–64/OC–192).
The 1696MSPAN is mainly composed of transponder cards connected to optical Mux/Demux cards to
manage the main DWDM signal (combined signal) and launch it in the fibre.
Client side, all the signals between 100Mbps to 2.7Gbps and 10Gbps native signals are supported.
A ”Compact WDM” architecture, 1696MS_C is proposed. It is a compact 13 slots shelf enabling point–to–
point and ring applications monitored by the Optical Supervisory Channel through SPVM board.
From Rel. 2.2 up to two 1696MS_C expansion shelves can be connected to the main one allowing 12 chan-
nels terminals or 4 channels OADM configurations.
Furthermore amplifiers can be placed inside the compact shelf.
The 1696MSPAN has been designed to offer the following main functions:
– Multiple configurations and multiple network architectures

The 1696MSPAN can be configured as
• line terminal
• back–to–back terminal
• Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM)
• in line repeater (optical amplifier)
These basic configurations cover both point–to–point and ring network applications and with or with-
out amplifiers.
Different optical add–drop (OADM) nodes can be provided: 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 16, 24, 32 channels OADM
(channels in Add/Drop in both direction).
– Possibility to manage a remote NE named Customer Premises (CPE): it is a 1696MS or 1696MS_C

located far from a Ring that can be linked to a NE of the ring (1696MS or 1696MS_C) or to another
NE (point–to–point link).
– Multi–rate client signals

The 1696MS is equipped with multi–rate transponders, which support the following Client signals
• from 100 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s, by means of the MCC boards
• 10Gbps by means of the OCC10 board using, over UNI. Supported bit rates are
– 9.953Gbps (STM–64/10Gbe WAN)
– 10.3125 Gbps (10Gbe LAN)
– Client signals TDM concentration

Up to 4 client signals may be concentrated by Time Division Multiplexing, on a unique STM–16 trans-
ponder access, in order to optimize the use of each wavelength.
Three boards are available (4 x ANY, 4 x ANY_S, 4 x ANY_P). Only their optical characteristics for
the 2.5Gb/s are different.
In this handbook the approach is the same for the three boards; each time a 4 x ANY is shown that
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
is also for the 4 x ANY_S and 4 x ANY_P.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 57 / 390
390
– Up to 32 optical channels in a single NE
Each client signal is assigned to one of the 32 optical channels provided by the transponders. Each
channel is associated to a fixed wavelength chosen in the third window or C–band (1.550 nm).
Up to 16 bidirectional transponders (i.e. 8 ch. OADM with 1+1 optical ch. protection) in one shelf.

Fully equipped system with up 32+32 bidirectional wavelengths in one rack (4 shelves per rack).

– Flexible and scalable architecture
The 1696MSPAN design allows to begin modestly with a partially equipped configuration (e.g.: 4 or
8 channels) that can be progressively upgraded as the traffic demand grows (e.g.: 16, 24, 32 chan-
nels). In particular, from the initial configuration, the transmission capacity can be increased without
interrupting the existing traffic.
– Protection
A protection at channel level is provided in ring application (Sub–Network Connection Protection,
SNCP) and point–to–point links (1+1). From rel. 2.2 the 4xANY drawers protection is also provided.
– Supervision
An extra channel at 1510 nm, the Optical Supervision Channel (OSC), can be optionally added to
the aggregate signal before being launched in the fiber.
– SFP modules performing CWDM, GBEthernet... functions

STM–1/4/16, GbEthernet, CWDM, Fiber Channel... SFP optical modules are provided, replacing, ac-
cording to the board type, the MCC3 client interface and the 4xANY_P aggregate interface.
It allows to fit the optical interface with the bitrate characteristics (GbE) or to use CWDM wavelengths.
It also allows to build access links with MCC3 on the core ring and 4xANY_P CPE.
– Automatic power equalization

It consists of an automatic adjustment of the power per channel in order to maintain the optical power
at each node output as flat as possible. This functionality needs OSMC (measuring the power per
channel) and MVAC (adjusting the power value) boards.
– 10Gbps backpanel
The 10Gbps backpanel, introduced in rel. 2.2, allows to link two adjacent OCC10s at 10.7 Gbps.
– Performance Monitoring
Monitoring the performances of the client signals and the WDM transmission is available for SDH and
SONET frames. Up to 32 PM per NE are managed in rel. 2.2.
– Management Interfaces
As the product is intended to both ETSI and ANSI market, Q3 interface and TL1 interface are supported.
– User Interfaces
The product offers user interfaces for various overhead for data channels and orders wires using (64
kbit/s, 2Mbit/s, RS232, audio).
– Firmware download
The 1696 MSPAN supports non–traffic affecting firmware download.
Boards supporting non–traffic affecting firmware download: OAC2, OAC2_L, OCC10, OSMC.
In rel. 2.2 the software NE automatically performs non–traffic affecting firmware download of the
OCC10 cards. It is the only firmware download performed by the NE software in rel. 2.2.
N.B. When a board is on Firmware download state the Harware failure LED on the front board lights
on yellow color. Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
board will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 58 / 390
390
1.1 Equipment basic configurations
The 1696MSPAN and 1696MS_C design, allows the following basic configurations of the equipment:
– Line Terminal
– Booster + Pre–amplifier Line Terminal

– Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM) or back–to–back terminal (hub)
– OADM or back–to–back terminal (hub) repeater
– In line repeater
– Customer Premises Equipment (CPE).
1.1.1 Line terminal
In line terminal configuration, the 1696MSPAN connects up to 32 clients signals (1696MS_C = up to 12

channels) to an optical fibre DWDM line. In this configuration, the equipment takes place at both ends of
point–to–point links.
B&W Client signals

Up to 32
client signals
TPD
(up to 32) SPV One fibre pair
Mux and Dmux can be Up to 32
OADM or OMDX boards WDM Mux Up to 32
signals λ 132
Dmux DWDM signals
SPV
Figure 12. The 1696MSPAN in line terminal configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 59 / 390
390
1.1.2 Booster + Pre–amplifier Line terminal
1 x OAC board by terminal

This configuration is made up of a line terminal + one OAC.

B&W Client signals
Up to 32
client signals
TPD
(up to 32) OFA SPV
One fibre pair
Mux and Dmux can be Up to 32
WDM Mux 2 Up to 32
OADM or OMDX boards signals λ 132 1
Dmux 1 DWDM signals
SPV
Figure 13. The 1696MSPAN in Booster + Pre–amplifier Line Terminal (1 x OAC) configuration
2 x OAC board by terminal
This configuration is made up of a line terminal + two OACs.
B&W Client signals

Up to 32
client signals
TPD
(up to 32)
OFA OFA SPV
Atten/ One fibre pair
Mux and Dmux Up to 32
WDM Mux VOA 1 DCU 2 Up to 32
can be OADM or signals λ 132
OMDX boards Dmux 2 Atten/ 1 DWDM signals
VOA
DCU
SPV
Figure 14. The 1696MSPAN in Booster + Pre–amplifier Line Terminal (2 x OACs) configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 60 / 390
390
1.1.3 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM) or back–to–back terminal (hub)
Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM)

In OADM configuration, the 1696MSPAN may add and drop a part of the traffic of an optical DWDM line,
in both directions. In this configuration the equipment takes place as linear add and drop multiplexer
in:
– point–to–point links
– ring networks.
Mux and Dmux Client signals

can be OADM or x added & dropped
OMDX boards channels
TPD TPD
SPV SPV
One fibre pair One fibre pair
Up to 32 Up to 32
DWDM Mux Mux DWDM
line signals Dmux Dmux line signals
n λ (up to 32) n λ (up to 32)
n–x
SPV SPV
pass through channels
Figure 15. The 1696MSPAN in OADM configuration
The OADM configuration, especially in ring network, allows the Sub–Network Connection Protection
(SNCP) of the added and dropped channels.
Back–to–back terminal (hub)
When ALL the DWDM line channels are added and dropped or electrically regenerated, the 1696MSPAN
is a back–to–back terminal or a hub node. There is no optical pass through channel. SNCP may be
performed on all the DWDM line channels.

can be OADM or n (up to 32)
OMDX boards
SPV
TPD TPD
SPV
Up to 32 Up to 32
DWDM Mux Mux DWDM
line signals Dmux Dmux line signals
SPV SPV
Figure 16. The 1696MSPAN in back–to–back terminal configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 61 / 390
390
1.1.4 OADM or back–to–back terminal (hub) repeater
1 x OAC board in West side + 1 x OAC board in East side

This configuration is made up of a OADM or back–to–back (hub) terminal + one OAC. In the example of

Figure 17. an OADM repeater configuration is shown.

can be OADM or x added & dropped
OMDX boards channels
One fibre pair SPV OFA

TPD TPD OFA SPV One fibre pair
Up to 32 1 2 Up to 32
VOA
DWDM Mux Mux DWDM
signals 2 Dmux Dmux 1 VOA signals
nλ nλ
(up to 32) SPV n–x SPV (up to 32)
pass through channels
Figure 17. The 1696MSPAN in OADM repeater (1 OAC west side + 1 OAC east side) configuration
OADM or back–to–back terminals can be equipped with amplifiers on West side or East side or both sides.
2 x OAC board in West side + 2 x OAC board in East side
This configuration is made up of a OADM or back–to–back (hub) terminal + two OACs. In the example of
an OADM repeater configuration is shown.
Mux and Dmux can be OADM or OMDX boards
SPV OFA OFA

One fibre pair
Atten/
Up to 32 VOA 1 DCU 2
DWDM TO/FROM MUX/DMUX
2 Atten/ 1 VOA
signals n λ DCU
(up to 32)
SPV
Client signals
x added & dropped
channels
TPD TPD
OFA OFA SPV
One fibre pair
Atten/
VOA 1 2 Up to 32
TO/FROM OFA Mux Mux DCU
DWDM
Dmux Dmux 2 Atten/ 1
DCU VOA signals
nλ
n–x (up to 32)
pass through channels SPV
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 18. The 1696MSPAN in OADM repeater (2 OACs west side + 2 OACs east side) configuration
OADM or back–to–back terminals can be equipped with amplifiers on West side or East side or both sides.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 62 / 390
390
1.1.5 In line repeater
In repeater configuration, the 1696MSPAN is a bidirectional DWDM amplifier, without transponders nor
MUX/DEMUX functions. In this configuration the equipment takes place as line repeater in:
– point–to–point links
– ring networks.
SPV OFA OFA SPV

Up to 32 VOA 1 Attenuator or DCU 2 Up to 32
DWDM DWDM
2 Attenuator or DCU 1 VOA
signals signals
SPV SPV
Figure 19. The 1696MSPAN in repeater configuration
1.1.6 Customer Premises Equipment (CPE)
A Customer Premises equipment (CPE) is a 1696MS_C or 1696MS located far from a ring which can be
linked to a NE of the ring (1696MS or 1696MS_C) or to an other NE in a point to point link.
In that configuration it is possible to manage a remote NE with no obligation to multiplex the optical signal
(see Figure 24. page 66).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 63 / 390
390
1.2 Network architectures
1.2.1 Point–to–point links

A point–to–point link, based on 1696MSPAN, is obtained with:
– a 1696MSPAN in line terminal configuration at each end of the link,

– eventually, one or more 1696MSPAN in OADM configuration.
Client Add & Drop traffic
Client Client
Line OADM Line
end Repeater end
traffic Terminal Terminal traffic
Figure 20. Point–to–point link
1.2.2 Ring networks
A two fibers ring network is obtained with 1696MSPAN equipment in back–to–back terminal and OADM
configurations.
Client end traffic
B–to–B
Client Client
Add & drop OADM OADM Add & drop
traffic repeater traffic
In Line
Repeater
Figure 21. Ring configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 64 / 390
390
NE
NE NE Black & White links

with supervision
NE NE NE NE
NE
Figure 22. Interconnected rings with data on customer ports and supervision carried by Optical Super-
vision Channel (OSC)
Such a ring interconnection is done through interconnection of customer ports of the adjacent NEs of the
interconnected rings. Supervision is transmitted from one ring to the other with optical insertion of the OSC
in one Black & White link through a SPV_F_C board. The NEs host of the interconnection do not need to
be colocated.
NE
NE NE
Supervision through
interconnected LAN_Q boards
NE NE LAN_Q NE NE
LAN_Q
NE
Figure 23. Interconnected rings with data on customer ports and LAN_Q management transmission
Such a ring interconnection is done through interconnection of customer ports of the adjacent NEs of the
interconnected rings. Supervision is transmitted from one ring to the other through the electrical connec-
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
tion of the LAN_Q boards (only the DCC). This type of interconnection can only be performed in ETSI mar-
ket. The NEs host of the interconnection need to be colocated.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 65 / 390
390
NE

NE

NE
CPE
NE NE
CPE
NO OSC
CPE OSC
CPE
Figure 24. CPE configuration
CPE consists in remote 4xANY or MCC transponders. Management is performed through OSC. Three
different channel configurations can be transmitted to/from a CPE:
• one Black & White channel (1310 nm)
• one colored channel (1550 nm)
• one 1310 nm and one 1550 nm channels.
A NE located on a ring can support several CPE links, but only two of them can be supervised.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 66 / 390
390
1.2.3 Host systems (ADM..)
Host systems can be all data equipments whose optical output signals have the following bit–rates
– between 100 and 2.5 Gbps
– 10 Gbps.
They can be :
– SDH/SONET (STM–1/OC–3, STM–4/OC–12, STM–16/OC–48, STM–64/OC–192 signals) equip-
ments
– IP routers
– Fast Ethernet, GBEthernet, 10GBEthernet WAN, 10 GBEthernet LAN, FC, FICON, ESCON... equip-
ments
10Gbps SDH Tx Rx Tx RxN (32MAX)

SONET OCC10 λ32 TxN (32MAX)
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx Tx Rx
10Gbps B&W 10Gbps
COLOURED
SIGNAL
10GBE WAN Tx Rx Tx Rx5

OCC10 λ5
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx 10Gbps B&W
Tx Rx
10Gbps
Tx5
COLOURED
SIGNAL
10Gbps LAN Tx Rx Tx Rx4

OCC10 λ4
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx Tx Rx Tx4
10Gbps B&W 10Gbps
COLOURED
SIGNAL
2.5Gbps Tx Rx Tx Rx3
SDH/SONET
Tx
MCC
Rx
λ3 Tx3
Tx
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx 2.5Gbps B&W 2.5Gbps Rx
COLOURED AGGREGATE
SIGNAL MULTIPLEXED
SIGNAL
STM1/16. OC3/48
Tx Rx Tx Rx2 (UP TO 32 λ)
FC/ESCON/FE
Tx
MCC
Rx
λ2 Tx2
GBE/FICON Rx
CLIENT SYSTEM from 100Mbps to 2.5Gbps 2.5Gbps
COLOURED
SIGNAL MUX/
λ1
λλ1 1 DEMUX
STM1/4, OC3/12, SCHEME
FC/ESCON/FE Tx Rx4
GBE/FICON
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx Tx4
UP TO FOUR Tx Rx Tx Rx1
4 x ANY MCC λ1
STM1/4, OC3/12, Rx Tx Rx Tx1
FC/ESCON/FE Tx 2.5Gbps B&W 2.5Gbps
Rx1
GBE/FICON COLOURED
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx Tx1 SIGNAL
1696MS
Figure 25. Connection to host equipments

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 67 / 390
390
1.3 Protection scenario
In a ring, the SNCP at OCh level can be provided either in back–to–back terminals or in OADM equipment,
as shown in Figure 26. on page 68.

At the transmit side, the signal is broadcasted on both arms of the ring and the available signal is selected

at the receive side (when failure of the other signal).
Split and select performed in optical

domain (by switching–off the user Tx)
Mux Mux
Dmux Dmux
back–to–back terminals
OADM or back–to–back
dropped channels added channels
Split and select performed in optical

domain (by switching–off the user Tx)
Figure 26. Optical SNCP protection scheme: with back–to–back terminals or OADM
The split and select function is optically performed.

The protection is optically performed, too; the function is ensured by 2 optical splitters.
The selection is done by switching–off the user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and re–activating
the protecting one (see Figure 27. ).
optical electrical optical electrical optical
user Rx WDM Tx WDM Rx user Tx
WDM
user Rx WDM Tx WDM Rx user Tx

optical splitter optical splitter
Figure 27. Optical SNCP way of working

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The protection schemes supported are: MCC1/2/3 only; MCC + 4xANY (only MCC is protected); 4xANY
only (each client/drawer can be protected); MCC2/MCC3 + OAC; OCC10 only; OCC10 + OAC.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 68 / 390
390
2 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION
The 1696MSPAN has been designed to offer a record size integration to meet the challenging require-
ments of the metropolitan environment. A fully loaded 1696MSPAN system with 32 protected channels
can be housed in one standard ETSI or ANSI racks.

The 1696MSPAN employs a common shelf type for the different network elements. Up to four shelves can
be fit into a single rack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 69 / 390
390
2.1 Rack design
The 1696MSPAN mechanical design allows to put up to four shelves in a single rack. It is compatible with
the following mechanical standards

– a 2000 mm high ETSI rack,

– a 1950 mm high NEBS 2000 rack.
The depth is compliant with the 300 mm deep ETSI rack (no limitations in ANSI rack).
OPTINEX RACK NEBS 2000 RACK

(ETSI)
Top rack unit

Power Distribution Unit
Fiber storage
2000
1950
Air deflector Air deflector
600 mm 600 mm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 28. Rack organization, 32 channel bi–directional terminal
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 70 / 390
390
2.2 1696MS shelf physical configuration
The 1696MS shelf is made up by an empty shelf and the boards and units installed in it.
One 1696MS system is composed by one mandatory main/master shelf and up to three slave/expansion
shelves. The board composition determines the shelf type: master or slave.
2.2.1 1696MS Empty shelf
2.2.1.1 1696MS shelf organization
The shelf is organized into three parts (one main and two extension), hosting 49 boards or unit slots:
– the main part, which is the upper part and comprises the slots from 1 to 24; here are located the 285
mm high boards performing the elaboration of the signal.
This part hosts the equipment and shelf controller, up to 16 transponders, up to 11 TDM concentrators
(4xANY), optical amplifiers, one mux/demux for LT or two mux/demux or OADM boards (east/west)
for hub/OADM application, optical supervisory channel...
– the first extension part, which is the middle part and comprises the slots from 25 to 48; here are lo-
cated the 88 mm high boards, herebelow listed
• two redundant –48V power supply boards
• one LAN access board for the CT or the EML (LAN_Q) connection (in master shelf only)
• one LAN access board for inter–shelf communication (LAN_I)
• one house–keeping board with 8 x input access + 8 x output access (HK) (in master shelf only)
• one remote alarms board (RAI) (in master shelf only)
• two user interface boards (UIC) (in master shelf only)
• one optical protection channel board (OPC) per protected channel (optical SNCP)
– the second extension part, which is the bottom part and comprises slot 49, where are located the fans.
All the optical and electrical connectors are located on the front of the units to be easily accessed.
This chapter illustrates the physical structure, layout and composition, coding and partition of the shelf.
The Equipment shelf front view is illustrated herebelow, in Figure 29. on page 72 and in Figure 30. on
page 74.
The units codes and partition are listed in Table 8. on page 76.
Main part (slot 1 to 24)
First extension part (slot 25 to 48)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Second extension part (slot 49)
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 71 / 390
390
2.2.1.2 1696MS Shelf dimensions
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

285
443
15
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
88
40
49
FANS
96 TE (24 x 4 TE wide slots)

21’’ (533.4 mm)
Figure 29. Shelf dimensions

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 72 / 390
390
2.2.2 1696MS Shelf configuration rules
The board composition and placement of a shelf respects some constraints at the hardware, software and
functional levels.
If general rules are followed, a certain number of standard configurations can be obtained in which boards
can be exchanged without functionality loss.
2.2.2.1 1696MS configuration constraints
Optical Sub–Network Channel Protection requires:
– transponder boards (MCC/OCC10) must be placed in consecutive slots. [4,5] or [6,7] or [8,9] or
[10,11] or [14,15] or [16,17] or[18,19] or [20,21]
– each Optical Protecting Channel boards (OPC) must be placed

• when protecting transponders, in one of the two slots, located under the corresponding trans-
ponder (MCC/OCC10) pair (e.g.: the OPC in slot 28 or 29 corresponds to the slots 4–5). The
transponder above the OPC is the main one and the other is the protecting transponder (e.g.:
OPC in slot 28 implies main transponder in slot 4 and protecting one in slot 5)
• when protecting 4xANY client signals, in the four slots located below the corresponding 4xANY
pair; the 4xANY on the right side contains the MAIN/protected drawers. Starting from the left
the first OPC protects drawer 2, the second one drawer 1, the third one drawer 3, the fourth one
drawer 4; in case of 4xANY in slots 6,7,8,9, the OPC in slot 30 protects drawer 2, that in slot
31 protects drawer 1, that in slot 32 protects drawer 3, that OPC in slot 33 protects drawer 4
– if TDM concentrators (4xANY/_S/_P) are used with few channels, all the boards are preferably put
in a single shelf.
– if TDM concentrators are used with more than 8 channels, 4xANY(_S/_P) boards are preferably put
in one dedicated shelf.
– using MVAC (for power adjustment of external colored wavelengths, of channel or band optical
passthrough and for transponder post–emphasis, channel/band loop power adjustment) the boards
allocation depends on the needed configuration (for the boards location refer to installation hand-
book).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 73 / 390
390
2.2.2.2 1696MS Typical shelf configuration
Figure 30. shows a typical configuration of a fully equipped shelf and Table 8. resumes the possibilities
that satisfy the configuration constraints.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
(X)
Equipment Shelf controler
Mux/Demux or OADM
Mux/Demux or OADM
Optical amplifier
Optical amplifier
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
OSMC
SPVM
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L O O O O H R O O O O U U P
S A P P P P K A P P P P I I S
C N C C C C (*) I C C C C C C C
(*) Master 49
shelf only FANS
Figure 30. Typical fully equipped shelf
In the first extension part, except for the PSC and the LAN boards, the placement of the boards has no
hardware limitation. However, here is the most frequently used configuration:
– the slots 28 to 35 and 38 to 45 are dedicated to the Optical Protection Channel board (OPC),
– the slot 36 hosts the HouseKeeping board (HK),
– the slot 37 hosts the Remote Alarm Interface board (RAI),
– the slots 46 and 47 hosts the User Interface Card (UIC).
Mandatory boards are:
– Slot 1 is dedicated to ESC board (Master and expansion (SC) shelves).

– Slots 25 and 48 are dedicated to the Power Supply Cards (Master and Expansion shelves).
– Slot 26 of the master shelf is dedicated to the LAN_Q card.
– Slot 27 of the slave shelf is dedicated to the LAN_I card.
– Slot 49 hosts the FANs card (Master and Expansions).
N.B. Particular setting of the LAN board (slot 26) on the Master shelf:
On this board, the rotary switch SW3 corresponding to the ”Equipment Type” must be set in 5
value (hexadecimal), otherwise the Shelf Controller will not start.
When the straps on the board are forced (by pass state) to be LAN #26 or LAN #27 board, take
care to insert the LAN board in the correct slot.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. the slot 2 can be used for OSMC; it is an optional card.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 74 / 390
390
2.2.3 1696MS Part list
In Table 8. on page 76 of the following paragraph are listed, named and coded the items and units making
up the Equipment Shelf (see paragraph 2.2.3.1 on page 76).
Furthermore, for any item the position and the maximum quantity that can be allocated inside a single
shelf, are indicated too.
Such table reports the following information :
• Item Name
• The ”Acronym” identifying the units
• ANV part numbers (3ALXXXXX XXXX)
• Maximum quantity per each shelf
• Position of the unit inside the equipment. Refer to Figure 29. on page 72 and Figure 30. on
page 74 for slot numbering.
• Number of explanatory notes
Table 9. on page 85 reports the explanatory notes.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 75 / 390
390
2.2.3.1 1696MS shelf and boards designation and reference
Table 8. 1696MS boards and units list

ANV Max Not
NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e
MECHANICAL STRUCTURE
1696MSPAN shelf 3AL 86607 AA–– – –– [1]
Shelf 1696MSPAN 10G 3AL 95270 AA–– – –– [2]
1696MSPAN FB shelf 3AL 86607 AC–– – ––
Shelf FB 1696MSPAN 10G 3AL 95270 AB–– – –– [2]
21” D.C.U. assembled support 3AL 86607 AC–– 2 ––
TRIBUTARIES
Multirate CH 192.000–192.100 MCC1 192.0–192.1 3AL 86603 AA––
Multirate CH 192.200–192.300 MCC1 192.2–192.3 3AL 86603 AB––
Multirate CH 192.500–192.600 MCC1 192.5–192.6 3AL 86603 AC––
Multirate CH 192.700–192.800 MCC1 192.7–192.8 3AL 86603 AD––
Multirate CH 193.000–193.100 MCC1 193.0–193.1 3AL 86603 AE––
Multirate CH 193.200–193.300 MCC1 193.2–193.3 3AL 86603 AF––
Multirate CH 193.500–193.600 MCC1 193.5–193.6 3AL 86603 AG––
Multirate CH 193.700–193.800 MCC1 193.7–193.8 3AL 86603 AH–– 411
16 [3]
Multirate CH 194.200–194.300 MCC1 194.2–194.3 3AL 86603 AL–– 14 21
1421
Multirate CH 194.400–194.500 MCC1 194.4–194.5 3AL 86603 AM––
Multirate CH 194.700–194.800 MCC1 194.7–194.8 3AL 86603 AN––
Multirate CH 194.900–195.000 MCC1 194.9–195.0 3AL 86603 AP––
Multirate CH 195.200–195.300 MCC1 195.2–195.3 3AL 86603 AQ––
Multirate CH 195.400–195.500 MCC1 195.4–195.5 3AL 86603 AR––
Multirate CH 195.700–195.800 MCC1 195.7–195.8 3AL 86603 AS––
Multirate CH 195.900–196.000 MCC1 195.9–196.0 3AL 86603 AT––
MCC2 192.0–192.1 3AL 86603 BA––
MCC2 192.2–192.3 3AL 86603 BB––
MCC2 192.5–192.6 3AL 86603 BC––
MCC2 192.7–192.8 3AL 86603 BD––
MCC2 193.0–193.1 3AL 86603 BE––
MCC2 193.2–193.3 3AL 86603 BF––
MCC2 193.5–193.6 3AL 86603 BG––
Enhanched Multirate CH MCC2 193.7–193.8 3AL 86603 BH–– 411
16 [4]
19x.x00–19x.x00 MCC2 194.2–194.3 3AL 86603 BL–– 1421
14 21
MCC2 194.4–194.5 3AL 86603 BM––
MCC2 194.7–194.8 3AL 86603 BN––
MCC2 194.9–195.0 3AL 86603 BP––
MCC2 195.2–195.3 3AL 86603 BQ––
MCC2 195.4–195.5 3AL 86603 BR––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
MCC2 195.7–195.8 3AL 86603 BS––

MCC2 195.9–196.0 3AL 86603 BT––
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 76 / 390
390
ANV Max Not
NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e
MCC3 192.0–192.1 3AL 95150 AA––
MCC3 192.2–192.3 3AL 95150 AB––

MCC3 192.5–192.6 3AL 95150 AC––
MCC3 192.7–192.8 3AL 95150 AD––
MCC3 193.0–193.1 3AL 95150 AE––
MCC3 193.2–193.3 3AL 95150 AF––
MCC3 193.5–193.6 3AL 95150 AG––
Enhanched Multirate CH MCC3 193.7–193.8 3AL 95150 AH–– 411
19x.x00–19x.x00 with SFP opti- 16 [5]
MCC3 194.2–194.3 3AL 95150 AJ–– 14 21
1421
cal modules
MCC3 194.4–194.5 3AL 95150AK––
MCC3 194.7–194.8 3AL 95150 AL––
MCC3 194.9–195.0 3AL 95150 AM––
MCC3 195.2–195.3 3AL 95150 AN––
MCC3 195.4–195.5 3AL 95150 AP––
MCC3 195.7–195.8 3AL 95150 AQ––
MCC3 195.9–196.0 3AL 95150 AR––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 77 / 390
390
ANV Max Not
NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e
OCC10 CH 192.000 OCC10 192.000 3AL 86834 AA––

OCC10 CH 192.100 OCC10 192.100 3AL 86834 AB––
OCC10 CH 192.200 OCC10 192.200 3AL 86834 AC––
OCC10 CH 192.300 OCC10 192.300 3AL 86834 AD––
OCC10 CH 192.500 OCC10 192.500 3AL 86834 AE––
OCC10 CH 192.600 OCC10 192.600 3AL 86834 AF––
OCC10 CH 192.700 OCC10 192.700 3AL 86834 AG––
OCC10 CH 192.800 OCC10 192.800 3AL 86834 AH––
OCC10 CH 193.000 OCC10 193.000 3AL 86834 AL––
OCC10 CH 193.100 OCC10 193.100 3AL 86834 AM––
OCC10 CH 193.200 OCC10 193.200 3AL 86834 AN––
OCC10 CH 193.300 OCC10 193.300 3AL 86834 AP––
OCC10 CH 193.500 OCC10 193.500 3AL 86834 AQ––
OCC10 CH 193.600 OCC10 193.600 3AL 86834 AR––
OCC10 CH 193.700 OCC10 193.700 3AL 86834 AS––
OCC10 CH 193.800 OCC10 193.800 3AL 86834 AT–– 411
16 [6]
OCC10 CH 194.200 OCC10 142.200 3AL 86834 BA–– 1421
14 21
OCC10 CH 194.300 OCC10 194.300 3AL 86834 BB––
OCC10 CH 194.400 OCC10 194.400 3AL 86834 BC––
OCC10 CH 194.500 OCC10 194.500 3AL 86834 BD––
OCC10 CH 194.700 OCC10 194.700 3AL 86834 BE––
OCC10 CH 194.800 OCC10 194.800 3AL 86834 BF––
OCC10 CH 194.900 OCC10 194.900 3AL 86834 BG––
OCC10 CH 195.000 OCC10 195.000 3AL 86834 BH––
OCC10 CH 195.200 OCC10 195.200 3AL 86834 BL––
OCC10 CH 195.300 OCC10 195.300 3AL 86834 BM––
OCC10 CH 195.400 OCC10 195.400 3AL 86834 BN––
OCC10 CH 195.500 OCC10 195.500 3AL 86834 BP––
OCC10 CH 195.700 OCC10 195.700 3AL 86834 BQ––
OCC10 CH 195.800 OCC10 195.800 3AL 86834 BR––
OCC10 CH 195.900 OCC10 195.900 3AL 86834 BS––
OCC10 CH 196.000 OCC10 196.000 3AL 86834 BT––
[7]
4xANY Host I–16.1 i/f 4xANY 3AL 86639 AA––
2;4;6;8; [9]
10;12; [8]
4xANY Host S–16.1 i/f 4xANY_S 3AL 86872 AA–– 11 14;16;
18;20; [9]
22 [10]
4xANY Host fully pluggable 4xANY_P 3AL 95063 AA––
[9]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 78 / 390
390
ANV Max Not
NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e
TRIBUTARY SUBSYSTEM
4 X ANY SDH/SONET cartridge SDH–SONET_1310 Drawer 3AL 86673 AA–– –– –– [11]

4 X ANY Low speed cartridge LF_1310_2 Drawer 3AL 86674 AA–– –– –– [12]
4 X ANY High speed cartridge HF_1310 Drawer 3AL 86672 AA–– –– –– [13]
4 X ANY Low speed optical car- [14]
LF_850 Drawer 3AL 86869 AA–– –– ––
tridge [9]
4 X ANY High speed optical car- [15]
HF_850 Drawer 3AL 86870 AA–– –– ––
tridge [9]
4 X ANY Low speed plug–in 1310 [16]
3AL 81617 AA–– –– ––
(OL–I) [9]
411
Multiple attenuator card MVAC 3AL 86892 AA–– 16 [17]
1421
SFP MODULES
STM–1 SFP (S–1.1, FE, FDDI,
SFP_Generic 1AB 19467 0001 –– ––
100BaseLX)
STM–1 SFP S–1.1 W/DDM SFP_Generic contact Alcatel –– ––
STM–1 SFP L–1.1 SFP_Generic 1AB 19467 0002 –– ––
STM–4 SFP (S–4.1, ESCON) SFP_S4_1 1AB 19636 0001 –– ––
STM–4 SFP S–4.1 W/DDM SFP_S4_1 contact Alcatel –– ––
STM–4 SFP L–4.1 1AB 19636 0003 –– ––
SFP_Generic
STM–4 SFP L–4.2 1AB 19636 0002 –– ––
1.25GBE SFP (Gbe1000LX/LH 1
SFP_GBE_LX 1AB 18728 0001 –– ––
FiberChannel 1300nm stop gap)
1.25GBE SFP Gbe 1000 LX/LH
SFP_GBE_LX contact Alcatel –– ––
W/DDM
1.25GBE SFP (Gbe 1000 SX, 1 Fi-
SFP_GBE_SX 1AB 18728 0002 –– ––
ber Channel 850 nm stop gap [18]
1.25GBE SFP Gbe 1000 SX
SFP_GBE_SX contact Alcatel –– ––
W/DDM
1.25GBE SFP Gbe 1000 ZX SFP_Generic contact Alcatel –– ––
SFP 1FC, 2FC 850 nm W/DDM SFP_FC_S contact Alcatel –– ––
SFP 1FC, 2FC 1310 nm W/DDM SFP_FC_L contact Alcatel –– ––
STM–16 SFP (S–16.1, 2FC stop
SFP_S16_1 1AB 19637 0001 –– ––
gap)
STM–16 SFP I–16.1 SFP_I16_1 1AB 19637 0002 –– ––
STM–16 SFP I–16.1 W/DDM SFP_I16_1 contact Alcatel –– ––
STM–16 SFP S–16.1 multirate/
SFP _S16_1 1AB 19637 0007 –– ––
multiformat W/DDM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 79 / 390
390
ANV Max Not
NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e
STM–16 CWDM 1470 NM PIN 1AB 19634 0001 –– ––

STM–16 CWDM 1490 NM PIN 1AB 19634 0002 –– ––
STM–16 CWDM 1510 NM PIN 1AB 19634 0003 –– ––
STM–16 CWDM 1530 NM PIN 1AB 19634 0004 –– ––
SFP_C_Bronze
STM–16 CWDM 1550 NM PIN 1AB 19634 0005 –– ––
STM–16 CWDM 1570 NM PIN 1AB 19634 0006 –– ––
STM–16 CWDM 1590 NM PIN 1AB 19634 0007 –– ––
STM–16 CWDM 1610 NM PIN 1AB 19634 0008 –– ––
STM–16 CWDM 1470 NM PIN ext
contact Alcatel –– ––
Temp Range
STM–16 CWDM 1490 NM PIN ext [18]
Temp Range
STM–16 CWDM 1510 NM PIN ext [19]
Temp Range
Temp Range
SFP_C_Bronze
Temp Range
Temp Range
Temp Range
Temp Range
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 80 / 390
390
ANV Max Not
NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e
STM–16 CWDM 1470 NM APD
1AB19635 0001 –– ––
STC

1AB 19635 0002 –– ––
STC
1AB 19635 0003 –– ––
STC
1AB 19635 0004 –– ––
STC
SFP_C_Silver
1AB 19635 0005 –– ––
STC
1AB 19635 0006 –– ––
STC
1AB 19635 0007 –– ––
STC
1AB 19635 0008 –– –– [18]
STC
STM–16 CWDM 1470 NM APD [20]
STC ext Temp Range
STC ext Temp Range
STC ext Temp Range
STC ext Temp Range
SFP_C_Silver
STC ext Temp Range
STC ext Temp Range
STC ext Temp Range
STC ext Temp Range
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 81 / 390
390
ANV Max Not
NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e
MULTIPLEXERS

1x8 Mux/Demux 300–380 + EXP
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS 3AL 86615 AA–– [21]
+ SPV
1x8Mux/Demux 300–380+EXP OMDX8100_M_L1_X 3AL 86615 AJ–– 2;3;4;5; [22]
2 6;12;13
1x8 Mux/Demux 200–280 OMDX8100_M_L2 3AL 86615 AB––
;22
1x8 Mux/Demux 520–600 OMDX8100_M_S1 3AL 86615 AC–– [23]
1x8 Mux/Demux 420–500 OMDX8100_M_S2 3AL 86615 AD––
OADM 8 CH 300–380 + SPV OADM8100_M_L1_S 3AL 86637 AA––
OADM 8 CH 200–280 + SPV OADM8100_M_L2_S 3AL 86637 AB–– 2;3;4;5; [24]
2 6;12;13
OADM 8 CH 520–600 + SPV OADM8100_M_S1_S 3AL 86637 AC–– [25]
;22
OADM 8 CH 420–500 + SPV OADM8100_M_S2_S 3AL 86637 AD––
OADM 4 CH 200–230 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch20–23_S 3AL 86637 BC––
OADM 4 CH 250–280 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch25–28_S 3AL 86637 BD––
OADM 4 CH 300–330 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch30–33_S 3AL 86637 BA––
OADM 4 CH 350–380 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch35–38_S 3AL 86637 BB–– 2;3;4;5;
[26]
2 6;12;13
OADM 4 CH 420–450 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch42–45_S 3AL 86637 BG–– [25]
;22
OADM 4 CH 470–500 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch47–50_S 3AL 86637 BH––
OADM 4 CH 520–550 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch52–55_S 3AL 86637 BE––
OADM 4 CH 570–600 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch57–60_S 3AL 86637 BF––
OADM 2 CH 300–310 + SPV OADM2100_M_30–31_S 3AL 86778 AB––
OADM 2 CH 320–330 + SPV OADM2100_M_32–33_S 3AL 86778 AC–– 2;3;4;5;
OADM 2 CH 350–360 + SPV OADM2100_M_35–36_S 3AL 86778 AD–– 2 6;12;13 [27]
OADM 2 CH 370–380 + SPV OADM2100_M_37–38_S 3AL 86778 AE–– ;22
OADM 2 CH 470–480 + SPV OADM2100_M_47–48_S 3AL 86778 AF––
OADM 1 CH 300 + SPV OADM1100_M_30_S 3AL 86777 AJ––
OADM 1 CH 310 + SPV OADM1100_M_31_S 3AL 86777 AK––
OADM 1 CH 320 + SPV OADM1100_M_32_S 3AL 86777 AL––
OADM 1 CH 330 + SPV OADM1100_M_33_S 3AL 86777 AM––
OADM 1 CH 350 + SPV OADM1100_M_35_S 3AL 86777 AN–– 2;3;4;5;
2 6;12;13 [28]
OADM 1 CH 360 + SPV OADM1100_M_36_S 3AL 86777 AP––
;22
OADM 1 CH 370 + SPV OADM1100_M_37_S 3AL 86777 AQ––
OADM 1 CH 380 + SPV OADM1100_M_38_S 3AL 86777 AR––
OADM 1 CH 470 + SPV OADM1100_M_47_S 3AL 86777 BE––
OADM 1 CH 480 + SPV OADM1100_M_48_S 3AL 86777 BF––
2;3;12;
Mux–Demux 1310–1550+SPV SPV_F_1310_1550 3AL 86779 AA–– 1 [29]
13;22
2835
1510 SPV COUPLER SMALL SPV_F_C 3AL 86779 BA–– 1 [30]
3845
OPTICAL AMPLIFIER
OFA +17 dBm (22/9) OAC1 3AL 86703 AA–– 4; 5;
OFA +17 dBm (28/9) OAC1_L 3AL 86703 AB–– 12; 13;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
8 [31]
OFA +17 dBm (22/9) OAC2 3AL 86703 AC–– 20; 21;
OFA +17 dBm (28/9) OAC2_L 3AL 86703 AD–– 22; 23
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 82 / 390
390
ANV Max Not
NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e
CONTROLLER
ESC (Equipment and Shelf Con-

ESC 3AL 86661 AA–– 1 1; 24 [32]
troller)
FLASH CARD 80 MB MEM–DEV 1AB 15205 0001 1 1 [33]
SPV–M + OW SPVM2 3AL 86606 AB–– 2 2;22;23 [34]
SPVM_H SPVM_H 3AL 86606 AC–– 2 2;22;23 [35]
LAC (LAN Access card) LAN_Q or LAN_I 3AL 86653 AA–– 1 26 [36]
Housekeeping card HK 3AL 86668 AA–– 1 36 [37]
Alarm Card RAI 3AL 87009 AA–– 1 37 [38]
UAC (User Access Card) UIC 3AL 86654AA–– 2 46;47 [39]
2;12;
OSM_C (Monitoring Card) OSMC 3AL 86893AA–– 1 [40]
13;23
SWITCHING PROTECTION
Passive optical protect. module OPC 3AL 86708 AA–– 8 [41]
Dual MM Optical Splitter OPC OPC 3AL 86708 AB–– 8 [42]
2835
28 35
SM–OPC CONNECTORS OPC 3AL 86708 AC–– 8 [43]
3845
MM–OPC CONNECTORS OPC 3AL 86708 AD–– 8 [44]
MM_OPC_850 OPC 3AL 95113 AA–– 8 [45]
POWER SUPPLY
Power Supply Card PSC 3AL 86652 AA–– 2 25;48 [46]
Power Supply Card PSC3 3AL 86652 AB–– 2 25;48 [47]
FANS
Fan Card FANC 3AL 86625 AA–– 1 49
[48]
Fan Card FANC 3AL 86625 AB–– 1 49
NO–DUST FILTER – 3AL 86633 AA–– 1 49
OPTICAL COMPENSATION DEVICE
DCM–5 DCM–5 1AB 15169 0013
DCM–10 DCM–10 1AB 15169 0007
DCM–15 DCM–15 1AB 15169 0014
DCM–20 DCM–20 1AB 15169 0008
2 – [49]
DCM–30 DCM–30 1AB 15169 0009
DCM–40 DCM–40 1AB 15169 0010
DCM–60 DCM–60 1AB 15169 0011
DCM–80 DCM–80 1AB 15169 0012
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 83 / 390
390
ANV Max Not
NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES

Circuit breaker 15A 72VDC – 1AB 16271 0006 2 – [50]

Alarm chain cable – 3AL 86750 AA–– 1 – [51]
HK user cable – 3AL 86751 AA–– 1 – [52]
ANSI & NEBS installation kit – 3AL 86725 AA–– 1 – [53]
1696MS Optinex installation kit – 3AL 86772 AA–– 1 – [54]
KIT – Optical kit 8–channel – 3AL 95184 AA–– 2 – [55]
Jumper kit 4 lambda OADM – 3AL 86827 AA–– 2 – [56]
Optical kit 4xANY intra–shelf – 3AL 86863 AA–– 4 – [57]
Opt. kit 4xANY intra–shelf Prot – 3AL 86864 AA–– 4 – [58]
Air deflector ETSI – 3AN 51293 AA–– 3 –
UAC user cable – 3AL 86753 AA–– 1 – [59]
Opto jumper SMF MU/PC–SC/
– 1AB 1675400010 16 – [60]
PC L = 3MT
SFP module extractor kit – 3AL 81728 AAAA 1 – [61]
KIT – OPC connection SM – 3AL 95185 AAAA 8 – [62]
KIT – OPC connection MM – 3AL 95186 AAAA 8 – [63]
Jumper SM MU/PC–LC/PC cable – 1AB 18577 0004 16 – [64]
KIT–Common optical amplif. – 3AL 95136 AAAA 1 – [65]
KIT–Common optical not amplif – 3AL 95137 AAAA 1 – [66]
Dummy plate 4TE for PBA – 3AN 50555 AA–– 22 –
Dummy plate 4TE for UTILITY – 3AN 50556 AA–– 22 –
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
Opto atten MU/PC 1dB plug type 1AB 20480 0001
–
JUMPER SM MU/MU CABLE
1AB 18240 0042 –
2 MM 810 MM
1AB 18240 0050 1 [67]
2 MM 500 MM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

1AB 18240 0013 8 [68]
2 MM 650 MM
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 84 / 390
390
1AB 18240 0012 2 [69]
2 MM 650 MM
REMOVAL TOOL MU/PC
1AD 03860 0002 1 [70]
PLUG_IN ATTEN.
SOFTWARE [71]
Table 9. 1696MS explanatory notes
Note Explanation
[1] It is the equipment shelf, including the back panel. Up to four subracks can be housed in an ETSI and
NEBS compliant rack
[2] Backpanel able to transmit 10G data, able to link two adjacent OCC10s
[3] It is a universal bidirectional multi–clock 3R transponder supporting all the most common bit rates
(from 100 Mbps to 2.5 Gbps) and tunable over two coloured wavelenghts in C band. In case of protec-
tion, 2 adjacent MCCs and 1 x OPC are required
[4] 3R transponder supporting all the MCC functions (see [3]) plus VOA to adjust the output optical power
[5] It performs all the MCC2 functions but the optical client interface is replaced by SFP (S–1.1, L–1.1,
L–1.2, S–4.1, L–4.1, L–4.2, S–16.1, I–16.1, L–16.1, L–16.2, CWDM, GbEthernet, FC, 2 FC, ES-
CON...) optical modules
[6] 10Gbps Optical Channel Card designed for 3R transport of 10 Gbps native signals. This transponder,
compliant with ITU–T G.709 Rec, can be provisioned to accept the following client signals
– any STM–64/OC–192 (9.953Gbps) to serve as UNI and non–SDH/SONET signals (10GbeWAN)
– 10.3125 Gbps (10Gbe LAN)
[7] TDM concentrator multiplexing any mix of up to four client signals (100Mbps1.25 Gbps) into a B&W
(@ 1310nm) 2.5 Gbps optical channel, SDH/SONET framing standard (STM–16/OC–48) compliant.
It is used with a MCC transponder which provides the coloured optic for WDM transmission. 2.5Gbps
interface is I–16.1. It occupies two slots: the first slot is always an even position (i:e: 2–3; 4–5;..)
[8] Remote application. It differs from the above 4xANY board (see point [7]) only for the optical 2.5Gbps
interface: it is S–16.1 type, allowing to cover a longer span (15 Km for S–16.1; 2 Km for I–16.1)
[9] To take into account more stringent EMI requirement with the compact shelf using, the end of Alcatel
code must be:
– 4xANY High speed 850 nm cartridge HF–850_Drawer 3AL 86870 AAAG
– 4xANY Low speed 850 nm cartridge LF–850_Drawer 3AL 86869 AAAG
– 4xANY Host w/ S–16.1 i/f 4xANY_S 3AL 86872 AAAC
[10] TDM concentrator (4xAny) with B&W (I–16.1, S–16.1) or CWDM pluggable (by means of SFP optical
modules) optical interface at 2,5Gbps
[11] 2nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting STM–1/OC–3 and STM–4/OC–12.
If it is set as STM–1, up to four drawers can be housed in one 4xANY board; if it is set as STM–4,
up to three drawers can be housed. STM–1 drawers can be plugged on any slot. STM–4 drawers
can be plugged only on ports #3 and #4; for 3 x STM–4 configuration only, port #1 is available, too
[12] 2nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, DV.
Up to four low frequency (FE, FDDI, ESCON, DV) drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY
[13] 2nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Gigabit Ethernet, FICON and FC
Up to two high frequency drawers can be housed only on ports #3 and #4 of a 4xANY board
[14] 1nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, DV
Up to four low frequency (FE, FDDI, ESCON, DV) drawers can be housed on any port of a 4xANY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
[15] 1nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Gigabit Ethernet, FICON and FC
[16] 2nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Digital Video transport. Up to four
low frequency drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 85 / 390
390
Note Explanation
[17] Allow to manually adjust the optical power budget. Each MVAC board includes two VOAs
[18] STM1/4/16, GBE, C–WDM, Fiber Channel (2FC, 1FC).... SFP optical plugin modules; they can be

fitted in 4xANY_P and/or MCC3 boards (refer to Figure 47. on page 118 for SFP placing)
[19] It is the “Bronze” CWDM (SFP STM–16)
[20] It is the “Silver” CWDM (SFP STM–16)
[21] 8 x L1 ch Mux/Demux with expansion (LB/SB combiner/splitter) and Supervision, for hub nodes. Slots
4,5,6 are available in master shelf only. Starting MUX if 32 channels hub extension is required without
amplifiers
[22] 8 x L1 ch Mux/Demux with expansion (LB/SB combiner/splitter), for hub nodes. Slots 4,5,6 are avail-
able in master shelf only. Starting MUX if 32 supervised channels hub extension is required when
amplifiers are used
[23] 8 x L2/S1/S2 ch Mux/Demux for hub nodes, used to upgrade the L1 Mux/Demux
[24] Allows to add/drop 8 supervised channels in L1 (3038)/L2 (2028)/S1 (5260)/S2 (4250) band
[25] Can be used also as MUX/DEMUX
[26] Allows to add/drop the 4 supervised channels shown in its own acronym
[27] Allows to add/drop the 2 supervised channels shown in its own acronym
[28] Allows to add/drop the supervised channel shown in its own acronym. From 25 to 38 are long band
channels: From 47 to 57 are short band channels
[29] Allows to mux/demux a 1310nm channel, a 1550nm multiplexed signal and the SPV/OSC (1510nm)
channel. This board allows to supervise a CPE
[30] Allows to mux/demux a SPV/OSC (1510nm) channel and a 1310nm or 1550nm channel. This board
allows to supervise a CPE
[31] Double–stage optical amplifiers able to amplify all the 32 channels in C band. Slots 22 and 23 are
available in expansion shelves only. OAC1_L and OAC2_L provide long spans transmission. OAC2
and OAC2_L reduce power dissipation
[32] It includes both the equipment and shelf controller functionalities. It has to be fitted in expansion
shelves, too, to only perform the shelf controller function. Instead, in slot 24 it is only used to have
a back–up of the slot 1 flash memory, in TL1 management case (North America)
[33] The flash card contains the equipment data base.
It must be equipped only on ESC board plugged in slot 1 of the master shelf
[34] 1510nm Optical Supervisory Channel card managing up to 2 x 1510nm OSC, 2 external 2Mps user
interfaces and the EOW (audio channel). Hosted in master shelf only.
The SPVM2 board in slot 23 is exclusively linked to an OADM/OMDX or OAC. Another SPVM2 can
be installed whether in slot #2 or #22 but not in both slots #2 and #22
[35] Depopulated SPVM with one 1510 nm laser, managing 1 x OSC channel
[36] Provide the Q3 management interface allowing to the NMS to supervise the equipment:
– plugged in slot #26 of the master shelf, it is used as LAN_Q to connect the NMS
– plugged in slot #27, it is used as LAN_I to inter connect the expansion shelves.
The LAN board code 3AL 86653 AAAD or later must be used for LAN_I installation in slot 27 of the
extension shelf. Any variant of 3AL 86653AA–– may be used for LAN_Q in slot 26 of the master shelf
[37] Hosted in master shelf only, provides 8 input accesses and 8 output accesses
[38] Fitted in master shelf only, is used for monitoring the rack alarms
[39] Hosted in master shelf only, manages G.703 user channels. For any SPVM, two cards are required
[40] The Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card measures the power of each channel. Coupled with MVAC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
provides automatic power equalization

[41] SM optical splitter with SMF MU/PC jumpers, performing passive OCh (linear config.) or O–SNCP
(ring config) protection. It is linked to 2 adjacent MCC/OCC boards and plugged below the main one.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 86 / 390
390
Note Explanation
[42] MM optical splitter. In addition to the features provided by the SM splitter (ref. [41]), it manages the
HWF led on its front plate and the LOS alarm
[43] SM optical splitter with connectors, having the same features of the SM splitter with jumpers (ref. [41]
[44] MM optical splitter with connectors, having the same features of the MM splitter with jumpers (ref.[42]
[45] MM optical splitter with connectors, used for protection of 4xANY drawers with 850nm transceiver
[46] PSCs work in “1+1” protection meaning that only one PSC is active at once
[47] PSC3 is a Power Supply Card (evolution of PSC card for central office shelf)
[48] It is equipped with three fans; an anti–dust filter has to be put just below the fans
[49] Dispersion Compensating Modules providing chromatic dispersion compensation. The number in
the acronym refers to the SMF distance for which the module provides compensation. DCMs can be
placed either in the inter–stage of an optical amplifier or in the booster and preamplifier of a link. One
DCM simultaneously compensates for the chromatic dispersion of all the (up to 32) 1696 channels
[50] To be used for external subrack power protection with optinex subrack only
[51] Allows the chain connection of the rack alarms, between the SUB–D 9p and RJ45 connectors of two
RAI cards in two different shelves
[52] Used to perform the HK connections from the 25p connector of the HK card to the DDF
[53] Used for equipment installation in ANSI & NEBS rack
[54] Used for equipment installation in OPTINEX rack
[55] The kit contains the fibers to connect 8 transponders to the 8–channel MUX/DEMUX (OMDX/OADM)
following the installation rules. 2 kits are needed to connect a shelf equipped with 16 transponders
[56] The kit contains the fibers to connect 8 wavelenght adapters and SPVM to the 4–channel MUX follow-
ing the installation rules. Optimized solution can be ordered using single MU–MU jumpers
[57] Required to connect 4xANY HOST to MCC in the same shelf, following installation rules
[58] Required to connect 4xANY HOST to the optical splitter (MCC protection) in the same shelf, following
the installation rules
[59] Used to perform the (2Mbps and 64Kbps) AUX/service channels connection from the 50pin connec-
tor of the UIC card to the DDF
[60] MU–SC/PC jumper for plug–in attenuator manager in ODF
[61] Used to extract the SFP modules (plugged in 4xANY_P and MCC3)
[62] It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect a SM OPC with a couple of transponders, providing 1+1
protection. 8 codes are needed in a fully equipped transponder shelf with sixteen OCC10/MCC (8 + 8).
[63] It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect a MM OPC with a couple of transponders, providing 1+1
protection. 8 codes are needed in a fully equipped transponder shelf with sixteen OCC10/MCC (8 + 8).
[64] It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect an OPC with a couple of 4xANY drawers, providing 1+1
protection. 16 codes are needed in a fully equipped shelf with 32 (16 + 16) 4xANY drawers in eigth 4xANY
[65] Allows the common connection in amplified systems, like the Mux/Demux connection with OAC, con-
nection between two stages of the same OAC, connection between two different OACs and extra or
pass–through channel connections (Extra IN/OUT connector of the Mux–Demux pair). For details
refer to the installation handbook
[66] Allows the common connection in non–amplified systems, like the OSC channel (IN/OUT connector
of SPVM) and extra or pass–through channel connections (Extra IN/OUT connector of the Mux–De-
mux pair). For details refer to the installation handbook
[67] Used to connect the OSMC to the the OMDX/OADM for monitoring
[68] Used to connect the OSMC to the OAC monitoring points (stage1 IN/OUT, stage 2 IN/OUT)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
[69] Used to connect the OMDX/OADM to the OAC

[70] Used to remove the opto attenuator plug–in
[71] Details concerning the software part number are given in the Operator’s Handbook
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 87 / 390
390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
2.2.4 1696MS shelf front view
Figure 32. Shelf front view with cover

Figure 31. Example of Master shelf front view
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
88 / 390
2.3 1696MS_C (compact shelf) physical configuration
The 1696MS_C shelf is a ”Compact WDM” architecture.

It is a compact 6 slots shelf with possible expansion to 3 compact shelves (1 master shelf plus 2 expansion
shelves).
It is dedicated to receive the units developped for the 1696MSPAN shelf.

As the 1696MS, the compact shelf has two redundant power feeds for –48V.
This architecture enables point to point and ring applications

– up to 12 channels in LT configuration
– up to 4 channels in OADM configuration
(colored or black and white) monitored by the SPVM board.
1696MS_C rack version powered from 48V DC voltage source from the rack connected to the Power
Supply Card.
Figure 33. 1696MS_C Rack version
1696MS_C table version
In a table version using, the operator should wear a wrist–strap bracelet connected to the me-
chanical ground (available on the rear of the shelf) for each handling a board, optical connectors
or a part of the shelf.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 34. 1696MS_C Table version with and without cover
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 89 / 390
390
1Main features provided by the 1696MS_C shelf
• It is very easy to use due its small size (6 unit slots versus 24 in the 1696MSPAN shelf)
• Independent stand alone 1696MS_C shelf can be used

• Units of the 1696MS_C are set horizontally

• Up to 12 1696MS_C shelves can be set in a 2000 mm high ETSI rack, or a 2150 mm high ANSI
rack, or a 1950 mm high NEBS 2000 rack.
2.3.1 1696MS_C Empty shelf
2.3.1.1 1696MS_C Shelf organization
The 1696MS_C shelf is organized into three parts (one main part and two extensions parts), hosting 13
boards or unit slots:
– the main part, which is the middle part and comprises the slots from 1 to 6; here are located the 285
mm high boards performing the elaboration of the signal.
This part hosts the equipment and shelf controller, up to 4 transponders, up to 2 TDM concentrators
(4xANY), one mux/demux for LT or two mux/dmux or OADM boards (east/west) for hub/OADM ap-
plication, optical supervisory channel board (optimized application with SPVM_Half, that is a depopu-
lated SPVM supporting one transceiver at 1510 nm instead of two, is possible for point to point and
spur configuration)...
– the first extension part, which is the right part and comprises the slots from 7 to 12; here are located
the 88 mm high boards, herebelow listed
• two redundant –48V power supply boards
• one LAN access board for the CT or the EML (LAN_Q) connection
• one house–keeping board with 8 x input access + 8 x output access (HK)
• one remote alarms board (RAI)
• one optical protection channel board (OPC) per protected channel
– the second extension part, which is the left part and comprises slot 13, where are located the fans.
All the optical and electrical connectors are located on the front of the units to be easily accessed.
This chapter illustrates the physical structure, layout and composition, coding and partition of the shelf.
The shelf front view is illustrated herebelow, in Figure 36. on page 91 and in Figure 37. on page 93.
The units codes and partition are listed in Table 10. on page 95.
Second extension part (slot 13) First extension part (slot 7 to 12)
Main part (slot 1 to 6)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 35. 1696 MS_C – Mechanical structure
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 90 / 390
390
2.3.1.2 1696MS_C Shelf dimensions
Shelf size:
– the size of the 1696MS_C shelf is 446.2mm (19” width) x 274mm (depth with cover) x 132.4 mm
(heigth)
– the depth is compliant with the 300 mm deep ETSI rack (no limitation in ANSI rack).
2.3.1.3 Rack partionning
In current release one master shelf and up to two expansion shelves are managed.
Slot 6 12 PSC
Slot 5 11
F A N _C Slot 4 10
Slot 3 9
Slot 2 8
13 7 PSC
Slot 1 I–link_S
SLAVE
Fiber drawer
MASTER
Slot 6 I–link_M 12 PSC
Slot 5 11
132.4
F A N _C Slot 4 10
Slot 3 9
Slot 2 8 LAN_Q
13 7 PSC
Slot 1 ESC
300 88
19’’(446.2 mm)
N.B. dark boards are mandatory
Figure 36. 1696 MS_C – Main shelf board arrangement

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 91 / 390
390
2.3.2 1696MS_C Shelf configuration rules
The board composition and placement of a shelf respects some constraints at the hardware, software and
functional levels.

If general rules are followed, a certain number of standard configurations can be obtained in which boards

can be exchanged without functionality loss.
The main configurations available are:
• OADM 1/2/4 channels (protected back–to–back) configuration with/without OPC

• up to 12 channels Line Terminal
• Remote 4xANY + protected MCC
• Remote 4xANY + protected MCC on 1550 nm
• SPVM Manager
• 2 channels Line Terminal (MCC + 4xANY)...
• Local spur (up to two x 4xANY to save cost of one supervision unit).
Amplified configurations are allowed, by means of OAC2 and OAC2_L.

The 4xANY drawers 1+1 protection is also allowed, by means of OPCs.
2.3.2.1 1696MS_C configuration constraints
Optical Sub–Network Channel Protection requires:
– Transponder boards (MCC, OCC10) must be placed in consecutive slots (slots [2,3] or [4,5],
– 4xANY(_S/_P) unit must be placed in a 2–slots space beginning with an even address ([2,3] or [4,5]);
if two 4xANY are used, they must be installed in in slots ([2,3] and [4,5]);
– if 4xANY is associated with a MCC all the board are put in a single compact shelf.
– Each Optical Protecting Channel board (OPC) must be placed in one of the two slots, located on the
right side of the corresponding MCC/OCC10 pair (e.g.: the OPC in slot 9 or 10 corresponds to the
slots 2–3). The MCC/OCC10 on the left of the OPC is the main one and the other is the MCC/OCC10
in protection (e.g.: OPC in slot 9 implies main MCC/OCC10 in slot 3 and protecting MCC/OCC10 in
slot 2).
When protecting 4xANY client signals, the OPCs have to be fitted in the four slots located on the right
of the 4xANY couple; the OPC in slot 8 protects drawer #2, the OPC in slot 9 protects drawer #1, the
OPC in slot 10 protects drawer #3, the OPC in slot 11 protects drawer #4;
– When expansion shelves are used

• in slot 6 of the master shelf have to be plugged the I–Link_M board
• in slot 1 of each expansion shelf have to be plugged the I–Link_S board
N.B. There is no specific NE configuration. The behavior is always the same. The OADM is equiva-
lent to the back–to back terminal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 92 / 390
390
2.3.2.2 1696MS_C typical shelf configuration
Figure 37. shows a typical configuration of an equipped 1696MS_C Master shelf and Table 10. resumes
the possibilities that satisfy the configuration constraints.
Figure 37. Typical 1696MS_C equipped shelf
For Hardware and/or Software organization, boards are located on dedicated slots.
The position of the boards on the 1696MS_C shelf are:
– ESC board (mandatory): dedicated slot 1 of master shelf

– I–link_M card (mandatory, only when expansion shelves are used): dedicated slot 6 of master shelf
– I–link_S card (mandatory): dedicated slot 1 of each expansion shelf
– PSC/PSC2 cards : dedicated small slots (mandatory equipped) 7 and 12
– SPVM cards slot #4, #5, or #6
• SPVM in slot #4 must be provisioned to supervise the multiplexed signal
• SPVM boards set in slot #5 and #6 are dedicated to an application with no multiplexed signal
– LAN_Q card (mandatory): dedicated small slot 8
– HK card can be installed in small slot 11
– RAI card can be installed in small slots 9 or 10
– OAC2 and OAC2_L cards can be installed in slot 2, 3
– FAN_C card (mandatory): dedicated slot 13.
Mandatory boards are:
– ESC board in slot 1 of master shelf

– LAN_Q card in slot 8 of master shelf
– I–link_M card in slot 6 of the master shelf (only when expansion shelves are used)
– I–link_S card in slot 1 of each expansion shelf
– PSC/PSC2 cards in slots 7 and 12
– FAN_C card in slot 13.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 93 / 390
390
2.3.3 1696MS_C Part list
In Table 10. on page 95 of the following paragraph are listed, named and coded the items and units mak-
ing up the Equipment Shelf (see paragraph 2.2.3.1 on page 76).

Furthermore, for any item the position and the maximum quantity that can be allocated inside the equip-
ment, are indicated too.
Such table reports the following information :
• Item Name
• The ”Acronym” identifying the units
• ANV part numbers (3ALXXXXX XXXX)
• Maximum quantity per each shelf
• Position of the unit inside the equipment. Refer to Figure 36. on page 91 for slot numbering.
• Number of explanatory notes
Table 11. on page 104 reports the explanatory notes.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 94 / 390
390
2.3.3.1 1696MS_C shelf and boards designation and reference
Table 10. 1696MS_C boards and units list

ANV Max Not

NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e
MECHANICAL STRUCTURE
1696MS_C shelf 3AL 86799 AA–– – –– 1
TRIBUTARIES
MCC1 192.0–192.1 3AL 86603 AA––
MCC1 192.2–192.3 3AL 86603 AB––
MCC1 192.5–192.6 3AL 86603 AC––
MCC1 192.7–192.8 3AL 86603 AD––
MCC1 193.0–193.1 3AL 86603 AE––
MCC1 193.2–193.3 3AL 86603 AF––
MCC1 193.5–193.6 3AL 86603 AG––
MCC1 193.7–193.8 3AL 86603 AH––
Multirate Channel Card 4 26 2
MCC1 194.2–194.3 3AL 86603 AL––
MCC1 194.4–194.5 3AL 86603 AM––
MCC1 194.7–194.8 3AL 86603 AN––
MCC1 194.9–195.0 3AL 86603 AP––
MCC1 195.2–195.3 3AL 86603 AQ––
MCC1 195.4–195.5 3AL 86603 AR––
MCC1 195.7–195.8 3AL 86603 AS––
MCC1 195.9–196.0 3AL 86603 AT––
MCC2 192.0–192.1 3AL 86603 BA––
MCC2 192.2–192.3 3AL 86603 BB––
MCC2 192.5–192.6 3AL 86603 BC––
MCC2 192.7–192.8 3AL 86603 BD––
MCC2 193.0–193.1 3AL 86603 BE––
MCC2 193.2–193.3 3AL 86603 BF––
MCC2 193.5–193.6 3AL 86603 BG––
Enhanced Multirate Channel MCC2 193.7–193.8 3AL 86603 BH––
4 26 3
Card MCC2 194.2–194.3 3AL 86603 BL––
MCC2 194.4–194.5 3AL 86603 BM––
MCC2 194.7–194.8 3AL 86603 BN––
MCC2 194.9–195.0 3AL 86603 BP––
MCC2 195.2–195.3 3AL 86603 BQ––
MCC2 195.4–195.5 3AL 86603 BR––
MCC2 195.7–195.8 3AL 86603 BS––
MCC2 195.9–196.0 3AL 86603 BT––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 95 / 390
390
ANV Max Not
NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e
MCC3 192.0–192.1 3AL 95150 AA––

MCC3 192.2–192.3 3AL 95150 AB––
MCC3 192.5–192.6 3AL 95150 AC––
MCC3 192.7–192.8 3AL 95150 AD––
MCC3 193.0–193.1 3AL 95150 AE––
MCC3 193.2–193.3 3AL 95150 AF––
MCC3 193.5–193.6 3AL 95150 AG––
Enhanched Multirate CH MCC3 193.7–193.8 3AL 95150 AH––
19x.x00–19x.x00 with SFP opti- 4 26 4
MCC3 194.2–194.3 3AL 95150 AJ––
cal modules
MCC3 194.4–194.5 3AL 95150AK––
MCC3 194.7–194.8 3AL 95150 AL––
MCC3 194.9–195.0 3AL 95150 AM––
MCC3 195.2–195.3 3AL 95150 AN––
MCC3 195.4–195.5 3AL 95150 AP––
MCC3 195.7–195.8 3AL 95150 AQ––
MCC3 195.9–196.0 3AL 95150 AR––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 96 / 390
390
ANV Max Not
NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e
OCC10 CH 192.000 OCC10 192.000 3AL 86834 AA––
OCC10 CH 192.100 OCC10 192.100 3AL 86834 AB––

OCC10 CH 192.200 OCC10 192.200 3AL 86834 AC––
OCC10 CH 192.300 OCC10 192.300 3AL 86834 AD––
OCC10 CH 192.500 OCC10 192.500 3AL 86834 AE––
OCC10 CH 192.600 OCC10 192.600 3AL 86834 AF––
OCC10 CH 192.700 OCC10 192.700 3AL 86834 AG––
OCC10 CH 192.800 OCC10 192.800 3AL 86834 AH––
OCC10 CH 193.000 OCC10 193.000 3AL 86834 AL––
OCC10 CH 193.100 OCC10 193.100 3AL 86834 AM––
OCC10 CH 193.200 OCC10 193.200 3AL 86834 AN––
OCC10 CH 193.300 OCC10 193.300 3AL 86834 AP––
OCC10 CH 193.500 OCC10 193.500 3AL 86834 AQ––
OCC10 CH 193.600 OCC10 193.600 3AL 86834 AR––
OCC10 CH 193.700 OCC10 193.700 3AL 86834 AS––
OCC10 CH 193.800 OCC10 193.800 3AL 86834 AT––
4 26 5
OCC10 CH 194.200 OCC10 142.200 3AL 86834 BA––
OCC10 CH 194.300 OCC10 194.300 3AL 86834 BB––
OCC10 CH 194.400 OCC10 194.400 3AL 86834 BC––
OCC10 CH 194.500 OCC10 194.500 3AL 86834 BD––
OCC10 CH 194.700 OCC10 194.700 3AL 86834 BE––
OCC10 CH 194.800 OCC10 194.800 3AL 86834 BF––
OCC10 CH 194.900 OCC10 194.900 3AL 86834 BG––
OCC10 CH 195.000 OCC10 195.000 3AL 86834 BH––
OCC10 CH 195.200 OCC10 195.200 3AL 86834 BL––
OCC10 CH 195.300 OCC10 195.300 3AL 86834 BM––
OCC10 CH 195.400 OCC10 195.400 3AL 86834 BN––
OCC10 CH 195.500 OCC10 195.500 3AL 86834 BP––
OCC10 CH 195.700 OCC10 195.700 3AL 86834 BQ––
OCC10 CH 195.800 OCC10 195.800 3AL 86834 BR––
OCC10 CH 195.900 OCC10 195.900 3AL 86834 BS––
OCC10 CH 196.000 OCC10 196.000 3AL 86834 BT––
4xANY Host w/ I–16.1 i/f 4xANY 3AL 86639 AA–– 6, 7
2 2;4
4xANY Host w/ S–16.1 i/f 4xANY_S 3AL 86872 AA–– 8, 7
4xANY Host fully pluggable 4xANY_P 3AL 95063 AA–– 2 2;4 9, 7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 97 / 390
390
ANV Max Not
NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e
TRIBUTARY SUBSYSTEM (4xANY DRAWERS)

4 X ANY SDH/SONET cartridge SDH–SONET_1310 Drawer 3AL 86673 AA–– –– –– 10
4 X ANY Low speed cartridge LF_1310_2 Drawer 3AL 86674 AA–– –– –– 11
4 X ANY High speed optical car-
HF_1310 Drawer 3AL 86672 AA–– –– –– 12
tridge
4 X ANY Low speed optical car- 13,
LF_850 Drawer 3AL 86869 AA–– –– ––
tridge 7
4 X ANY High speed optical car- 14,
HF_850 Drawer 3AL 86870 AA–– –– ––
tridge 7
4 X ANY Low speed plug–in 1310 15,
3AL 81617 AA–– –– ––
(OL–I) 7
SFP MODULES
STM–1 SFP (S–1.1, FE, FDDI,
SFP_Generic 1AB 19467 0001 –– ––
100BaseLX)
STM–1 SFP S–1.1 W/DDM SFP_Generic contact Alcatel –– ––
STM–4 SFP (S–4.1, ESCON) SFP_S4_1 1AB 19636 0001 –– ––
STM–4 SFP L–4.1 1AB 19636 0003 –– ––
SFP_Generic
STM–4 SFP L–4.2 1AB 19636 0002 –– ––
1.25GBE SFP (Gbe1000LX/LH 1
SFP_GBE_LX 1AB 18728 0001 –– ––
FiberChannel 1300nm stop gap
1.25GBE SFP Gbe 1000 LX/LH
SFP_GBE_LX contact Alcatel –– ––
W/DDM
1.25GBE SFP (Gbe 1000 SX, 1 Fi-
SFP_GBE_SX 1AB 18728 0002 –– ––
ber Channel 850 nm stop gap 16
1.25GBE SFP Gbe 1000 SX
SFP_GBE_SX contact Alcatel –– ––
W/DDM
1.25GBE SFP Gbe 1000 ZX SFP_Generic contact Alcatel –– ––
SFP 1FC, 2FC 850 nm W/DDM SFP_FC_S contact Alcatel –– ––
SFP 1FC, 2FC 1310 nm W/DDM SFP_FC_L contact Alcatel –– ––
STM–16 SFP (S–16.1, 2FC stop
SFP_S16_1 1AB 19637 0001 –– ––
gap)
STM–16 SFP I–16.1 SFP_I16_1 1AB 19637 0002 –– ––
STM–16 SFP I–16.1 W/DDM SFP_I16_1 contact Alcatel –– ––
STM–16 SFP S–16.1 multirate/
SFP _S16_1 1AB 19637 0007 –– ––
multiformat W/DDM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 98 / 390
390
ANV Max Not
NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e
STM–16 CWDM 1470 NM PIN 1AB 19634 0001 –– ––
STM–16 CWDM 1490 NM PIN 1AB 19634 0002 –– ––

STM–16 CWDM 1510 NM PIN 1AB 19634 0003 –– ––
STM–16 CWDM 1530 NM PIN 1AB 19634 0004 –– ––
SFP_C_Bronze
STM–16 CWDM 1550 NM PIN 1AB 19634 0005 –– ––
STM–16 CWDM 1570 NM PIN 1AB 19634 0006 –– ––
STM–16 CWDM 1590 NM PIN 1AB 19634 0007 –– ––
STM–16 CWDM 1610 NM PIN 1AB 19634 0008 –– ––
Temp Range
STM–16 CWDM 1490 NM PIN ext 16
Temp Range
STM–16 CWDM 1510 NM PIN ext 17
Temp Range
Temp Range
SFP_C_Bronze
Temp Range
Temp Range
Temp Range
Temp Range
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 99 / 390
390
ANV Max Not
NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e

1AB19635 0001 –– ––
STC

1AB 19635 0002 –– ––
STC
1AB 19635 0003 –– ––
STC
1AB 19635 0004 –– ––
STC
SFP_C_Silver
1AB 19635 0005 –– ––
STC
1AB 19635 0006 –– ––
STC
1AB 19635 0007 –– ––
STC
1AB 19635 0008 –– ––
STC 16
STM–16 CWDM 1470 NM APD 18
STC ext Temp Range
STC ext Temp Range
STC ext Temp Range
STC ext Temp Range
SFP_C_Silver
STC ext Temp Range
STC ext Temp Range
STC ext Temp Range
STC ext Temp Range
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 100 / 390
390
ANV Max Not
NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e
MULTIPLEXERS
1x8 Mux/Demux 300–380 + EXP

OMDX8100_M_L1_XS 3AL 86615 AA–– 19
+ SPV
1x8Mux/Demux 300–380+EXP OMDX8100_M_L1_X 3AL 86615 AJ–– 20
2 4;5:6
1x8 Mux/Demux 200–280 OMDX8100_M_L2 3AL 86615 AB––
1x8 Mux/Demux 520–600 OMDX8100_M_S1 3AL 86615 AC–– 21
1x8 Mux/Demux 420–500 OMDX8100_M_S2 3AL 86615 AD––
OADM 8 CH 300–380 + SPV OADM8100_M_L1_S 3AL 86637 AA––
OADM 8 CH 200–280 + SPV OADM8100_M_L2_S 3AL 86637 AB–– 22,
2 4;5;6 23,
OADM 8 CH 520–600 + SPV OADM8100_M_S1_S 3AL 86637 AC–– 24
OADM 8 CH 420–500 + SPV OADM8100_M_S2_S 3AL 86637 AD––
OADM 4 CH 200–230 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch20–23_S 3AL 86637 BC––
OADM 4 CH 250–280 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch25–28_S 3AL 86637 BD––
OADM 4 CH 300–330 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch30–33_S 3AL 86637 BA––
OADM 4 CH 350–380 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch35–38_S 3AL 86637 BB–– 25,
2 4;5;6
OADM 4 CH 420–450 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch42–45_S 3AL 86637 BG–– 23
OADM 4 CH 470–500 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch47–50_S 3AL 86637 BH––
OADM 4 CH 520–550 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch52–55_S 3AL 86637 BE––
OADM 4 CH 570–600 + SPV OADM4100_M_ch57–60_S 3AL 86637 BF––
OADM2100_M_30–31_S 3AL 86778 AB––
OADM2100_M_32–33_S 3AL 86778 AC––
2 channels OADM with SPV card OADM2100_M_35–36_S 3AL 86778 AD–– 2 4;5;6 26
OADM2100_M_37–38_S 3AL 86778 AE––
OADM2100_M_47–48_S 3AL 86778 AF––
OADM1100_M_25_S 3AL 86777 AE––
OADM1100_M_30_S 3AL 86777 AJ––
OADM1100_M_31_S 3AL 86777 AK––
OADM1100_M_32_S 3AL 86777 AL––
OADM1100_M_33_S 3AL 86777 AM––
OADM1100_M_35_S 3AL 86777 AN––
1 channel OADM with SPV cards 2 4;5;6 27
OADM1100_M_36_S 3AL 86777 AP––
OADM1100_M_37_S 3AL 86777 AQ––
OADM1100_M_38_S 3AL 86777 AR––
OADM1100_M_47_S 3AL 86777 BE––
OADM1100_M_48_S 3AL 86777 BF––
OADM1100_M_57_S 3AL 86777 BN––
Supervision Filter card
SPV_F_1310_1550 3AL 86779 AA–– 1 5;6 28
(SPV_F_1310_1550)
Supervision Filter card SPV_F_C 3AL 86779 BA–– 3 811 29
OPTICAL AMPLIFIER
OFA +17 dBm (22/9) OAC2 3AL 86703 AC––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
2 2,3 30
OFA +17 dBm (28/9) OAC2_L 3AL 86703 AD––
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 101 / 390
390
ANV Max Not
NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e
CONTROLLER

Equipment and Shelf Controller ESC 3AL 86661 AA–– 1 1 31
FLASH CARD 80 MB MEM–DEV 1AB 15205 0001 1 1 32
SPVM + OW SPVM2 3AL 86606 AB–– 2 4;5;6 33
SPVM_H SPVM_H 3AL 86606 AC–– 2 4;5;6 34
LAN Access card LAN_Q 3AL 86653 AA–– 1 8 35
Housekeeping card HK 3AL 86668 AA–– 1 11 36
Rack Alarm Interface board RAI 3AL 87009 AA–– 1 9;10 37
I–LINK MASTER I–LINK_M 3AL 86805 AA–– 1 6
38
I–LINK_SLAVE I–LINK_S 3AL 86808 AA–– 1 1
SWITCHING PROTECTION
Optical Protection Card OPC 3AL 86708 AA–– 39
Dual MM Optical Splitter OPC OPC 3AL 86708 AB–– 40
4 811
SM–OPC CONNECTORS OPC 3AL 86708 AC–– 41
MM–OPC CONNECTORS OPC 3AL 86708 AD–– 42
MM_OPC_850 OPC 3AL 95113 AA–– 43
POWER SUPPLY
PSC_C PSC2 3AL 86888 AA–– 2 7;12 44
Power Management Unit PMU 3AL 86825 AA––
1 – 45
Batteries for PMU 3AL 95210 AA––
Power supply BOX – 3AL 95239 AA–– – – 46
FANS
COMPACT FAN FAN_C 3AL 86802 AA–– 1 13 47
COMPACT DUST FILTER – 3AN 51151 AA–– 1 13
OPTICAL COMPENSATION DEVICE
DCM–5 DCM–5 1AB 15169 0013
DCM–10 DCM–10 1AB 15169 0007
DCM–15 DCM–15 1AB 15169 0014
DCM–20 DCM–20 1AB 15169 0008
2 – 48
DCM–30 DCM–30 1AB 15169 0009
DCM–40 DCM–40 1AB 15169 0010
DCM–60 DCM–60 1AB 15169 0011
DCM–80 DCM–80 1AB 15169 0012
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 102 / 390
390
ANV Max Not
NAME ACRONYM SLOT
Part Number Q.ty e
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
Circuit breaker 15A 72VDC – 1AB 16271 0006 2 – 49

HK user cable – 3AL 95073 AA–– 1 – 50
1696MS_C ANSI install. kit – 3AL 95101 AAAA 1 – 51
Kit for C_shelf install on ETSI rack – 3AN 51124 AAAA 1 – 52
I–Link cable – 3AL 95179 AA–– 2 – 53
Cable from BOX to PSC/PSC2 – 3AL 95264 AA–– 2 – 54
SFP module extractor kit – 3AL 81728 AAAA 1 – 55
JUMPER SMF MU/MU CABLE
– 1AB 18240 0049 4 – 56
2MM 1700MM
JUMPER SMF MU/PC–MU/PC
– 1AB 18240 0004 4 –
360MM
57
JUMPER SMF MU/PC–MU/PC
– 1AB 18240 0007 4 –
450MM
KIT – OPC connection SM – 3AL 95185 AAAA 2 – 58
KIT – OPC connection MM – 3AL 95186 AAAA 2 – 59
Jumper SM MU/PC–LC/PC cable – 1AB 18240 0004 4 – 60
Dummy plate 4TE for PBA – 3AN 50555 AA–– 6 –
Dummy plate 4TE for UTILITY – 3AN 50556 AA–– 6 –
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
–
JumperSM MU/MU cable 2mm 810 1AB 18240 0042
–
JumperSM MU/MU cable 2mm 500 1AB 18240 0050
REMOVAL TOOL MU/PC
1AD 03860 0002 1 61
PLUG_IN ATTEN.
SOFTWARE 62
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 103 / 390
390
Table 11. 1696MS_C explanatory notes
Note Explanation

1 It is the equipment shelf, including the back panel.

2 It is a universal bidirectional multi–clock 3R transponder supporting all the most common bit rates
(from 100 Mbps to 2.5 Gbps) and tunable over two coloured wavelenghts in C band. In case of protec-
tion, 2 adjacent MCCs and 1 x OPC are required
3 3R transponder supporting all the MCC functions (see [3]) plus VOA to adjust the output optical power
4 It performs all the MCC2 functions but the optical client interface is replaced by SFP (S–1.1, L–1.1,
L–1.2, S–4.1, L–4.1, L–4.2, S–16.1, I–16.1, L–16.1, L–16.2, CWDM, GbEthernet, FC, 2 FC, ES-
CON...) optical modules
5 10Gbps Optical Channel Card designed for 3R transport of 10 Gbps native signals. This transponder,
compliant with ITU–T G.709 Rec, can be provisioned to accept the following client signals
– any STM–64/OC–192 (9.953Gbps) to serve as UNI and non–SDH/SONET signals (10GbeWAN)
– 10.3125 Gbps (10Gbe LAN)
6 TDM concentrator multiplexing any mix of up to four client signals (100Mbps1.25 Gbps) into a B&W
(@ 1310nm) 2.5 Gbps optical channel, SDH/SONET framing standard (STM–16/OC–48) compliant.
It is used with a MCC transponder which provides the coloured optic for WDM transmission. 2.5Gbps
interface is I–16.1. It occupies two slots: the first slot is always an even position (i:e: 2–3; 4–5;..)
7 To take into account more stringent EMI requirement with the compact shelf using, the 4xANY and
4xANY_S, the end of Alcatel code must be:
– 4xANY High speed 850 nm cartridge HF–850_Drawer 3AL 86870 AAAG
– 4xANY Low speed 850 nm cartridge LF–850_Drawer 3AL 86869 AAAG
– 4xANY Host w/ S–16.1 i/f 4xANY_S 3AL 86872 AAAC
8 It differs from the above 4xANY boards (see point [7]) only for the optical 2.5Gbps interface: it is
S–16.1 type, allowing to cover a longer span (15 Km for S–16.1; 2 Km for I–16.1)
9 TDM concentrator (4xAny) with B&W (I–16.1, S–16.1) or CWDM pluggable (by means of SFP optical
modules) 2,5Gbps optical interface
10 2nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting STM–1/OC–3 and STM–4/OC–12.
If it is set as STM–1, up to four drawers can be housed in one 4xANY board; if it is set as STM–4,
up to three drawers can be housed. STM–1 drawers can be plugged on any slot. STM–4 drawers
can be plugged only on ports #3 and #4; for 3 x STM–4 configuration only, port #1 is available, too
11 2nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, DV.
Up to four low frequency (FE, FDDI, ESCON, DV) drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY
12 2nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Gigabit Ethernet, FICON and FC
13 1nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, DV
Up to four low frqeuency (FE, FDDI, ESCON, DV) drawers can be housed on any port of a 4xANY
14 1nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Gigabit Ethernet, FICON and FC
Up to two high frqeuency drawers can be housed only on ports #3 and #4 of a 4xANY board
15 2nd window plug–in cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Digital Video transport. Up to four
low frequency drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY
16 STM–1/4/16, GBE, Fiber Channel (2FC, 1FC).... SFP optical plugin modules; they can be fitted in
4xANY_P and/or MCC3 boards (refer to Figure 47. on page 118 for SFP placing)
17 It is the “Bronze” CWDM (SFP STM–16)
18 It is the “Silver” CWDM (SFP STM–16)
19 8 x L1 ch Mux/Demux with expansion (LB/SB combiner/splitter) and Supervision, for hub nodes. Slots
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
4,5,6 are available in master shelf only. Starting MUX if 32 channels hub extension is required without
amplifiers
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 104 / 390
390
Note Explanation
20 8 x L1 ch Mux/Demux with expansion (LB/SB combiner/splitter), for hub nodes. Slots 4,5,6 are avail-
able in master shelf only. Starting MUX if 32 supervised channels hub extension is required when
amplifiers are used

21 8 x L2/S1/S2 ch Mux/Demux for hub nodes, used to upgrade the L1 Mux/Demux

22 Allow to add/drop 8 supervised channels in L1 (3038)/L2 (2028)/S1 (5260)/S2 (4250) band
23 Can be used also as MUX/DEMUX
24 SW managed in future releases
25 Allow to add/drop the 4 supervised channels shown in its own acronym
26 Allow to add/drop the 2 supervised channels shown in its own acronym
27 Allow to add/drop the supervised channel shown in its own acronym. From 25 to 38 are long band
channels: from 47 to 57 are short band channels
28 Allow to mux/demux a 1310nm channel, a 1550nm multiplexed signal and the SPV/OSC (1510nm)
channel. This board allows to supervise a CPE
29 Insert/extract the SPV channel to/from a 1310nm or 1550nm channel, allowing to supervise a CPE;
slot 8 is available in expansion shelf only
30 Double–stage optical amplifiers able to amplify all the channels. OAC2 provides short span transmis-
sion. OAC2_L provides long spans transmission.
31 It includes both the equipment and shelf controller functionalities.
32 The flash card contains the equipment data base.
33 1510nm Optical Supervisory Channel card managing up to 2 x 1510nm OSC, 2 external 2Mps user
interfaces and the EOW (audio channel).
The SPVM2 board in slot 4 is exclusively linked to an OADM/OMDX. Another SPVM2 can be installed
whether in slot #5 or #6 but not in both slots #5 and #6
34 Depopulated SPVM with one 1510 nm laser, managing 1 x OSC channel
35 Provide the Q3 management interface allowing to the NMS to supervise the equipment. It is directly
connected to the manager
36 Hosted in master shelf only, provides 8 input accesses and 8 output accesses
37 Fitted in master shelf only, is used for monitoring the rack alarms
38 Allow the communication between the master shelf and the up to two expansion shelves, by means
of a direct connection from I–LINK_M (slot 6 of master shelf) and I–LINK_S (slot 1 of each exp. shelf)
39 Single Mode optical splitter with SMF MU/PC jumpers, performing passive OCh (linear config) or
O–SNCP (ring) protection. It is linked to 2 adjacent MCC/OCCs and plugged below the main one
40 Multi Mode optical splitter. In addition to the features provided by the SM splitter (ref. 39), it manages
the HWF led on its front plate and the LOS alarm
41 SM optical splitter with connectors, having the same features of the SM splitter with jumpers (ref. 39)
42 MM optical splitter with connectors having the same features of the MM splitter with jumpers (ref. 40)
43 MM optical splitter with connectors, used for protection of 4xANY drawers with 850nm transceiver
44 PSC2 is an evolution of the PSC card for the compact shelf but supply less power. It works in “1+1”
protection meaning that only one board is active at once; it can be plugged both in master and slave
shelves
45 External module transforming the alternative 110/230V voltage into a –48V continuous wave, thus al-
lowing a 1696MS_C to be plugged directly to a power supply (avoiding the usage of a telecom rack
for feeding)
46 For power distribution; it is used only in table version
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
47 FAN module for compact shelf. It is equipped with two fans; an anti–dust filter has to be put on the
left side of the fans
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 105 / 390
390
Note Explanation
48 Dispersion Compensating Modules providing chromatic dispersion compensation. The number in
the acronym refers to the SMF distance for which the module provides compensation. DCMs can be

placed either in the inter–stage of an optical amplifier or in the booster and preamplifier of a link. One

DCM simultaneously compensates for the chromatic dispersion of all the 1696 channels
49 To be used for external subrack power protection with optinex subrack only
50 Used to perform the HK connections from the 25p connector of the HK card to the DDF
51 Used for the 1696MS_C installation in ANSI rack; it includes power supply cable, alarm PDU cable...
52 Used for the 1696MS_C installation in ETSI rack; it includes power supply cable, RAI–TRU cable...
53 Used to connect I–link_M (in master shelf) with I–Link_S (one per each slave shelf)
54 Power supply cable used only in table version. It has to be connected between the BOX and the pow-
er supply card (input power connector)
55 Used to extract the SFP modules (plugged in 4xANY_P and MCC3)
56 Used to connect each other boards located in different shelves; i.e. the OCC10/MCC with the relevant
MUX/DEMUX and/or the MUX/DEMUX with the OAC
57 Used to connect each other boards located in the same shelf; i.e. the OCC10/MCC with the relevant
MUX/DEMUX and/or the MUX/DEMUX with the OAC
58 It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect a SM OPC with a couple of transponders, providing 1+1
protection. 2 codes are needed in a fully equipped transponder shelf with four OCC10/MCC (2 + 2).
59 It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect a MM OPC with a couple of transponders, providing 1+1
protection. 2 codes are needed in a fully equipped transponder shelf with four OCC10/MCC (2 + 2).
60 It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect an OPC with a couple of 4xANY drawers, providing 1+1
protection. 4 codes are needed in a fully equipped shelf with 8 (4 + 4) 4xANY drawers in two 4xANY
61 Used to remove the opto attenuator plug–in
62 Details concerning the software part number are given in the Operator’s Handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 106 / 390
390
2.3.3.2 FAN_C board
A particular board adapted for the compact shelf is available. It also enables to manage the Power Monito-
ring Unit to feed the shelf with the alternative mains supply.
Figure 38. Fan_C board

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 107 / 390
390
2.4 Equipment connections
The external connections of the 1696MSPAN may fall into to following categories:

– optical

– management
– maintenance
– power supply
– user interfaces
All the equipment connection are detailed in the Installation Handbook.
Next paragraph 2.5 on page 112 presents the front view of all the cards, where the connection points can
be identified.
In the following some general indication and reference to the relevant front view are given.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 108 / 390
390
2.4.1 Optical connections
2.4.1.1 Optical connections made with simple MU connectors

See Figure 39. The optical connections are made with simple MU connectors on:
– MCC boards, see Figure 42. on page 113
– OPC boards, see Figure 67. on page 138
– SPV–M boards, see Figure 58. on page 129 and Figure 59. on page 130
– MVAC boards, see Figure 46. on page 117.
Figure 39. Simple MU optical connector
2.4.1.2 Optical connections made with double MU connectors
See Figure 40. The optical connections are made with double MU connectors on:
– OMDX and OADM boards, see para. 2.5.2 on page 119
– OAC boards, see Figure 56. on page 127
– OCC10 boards, see Figure 44. on page 115
– SPV_F boards, see Figure 54. on page 125 and Figure 55. on page 126.
– OSMC boards, see on page

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 109 / 390
390
Figure 40. Double MU optical connector
2.4.1.3 Optical connections made with LC connectors
The optical connections are made with LC connectors on:
– 4xANY boards (both client and aggregate sides), see Figure 45. on page 116
– all the Small Formfactor Modules (STM–16, GBEthernet, CWDM..) plugged on 4xANY (aggregate
side) and MCC3 (client side) boards, see Figure 41. on page 110, Figure 43. on page 114, Figure 45.
on page 116, Figure 47. on page 118.
SFP STM–16 optical module
Optical cables
Figure 41. LC/SPC optical connector on SFP modules

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 110 / 390
390
2.4.2 Management and maintenance connections
2.4.2.1 Housekeeping
The housekeeping alarm signal are available on the front panel connector of the HK board. It is a 25 pin
SUB–D Female connector.

Note: 25 pin SUB–D connector is connected to GNDM by the 2 screw’s holes called pin 26 and pin 27.
See Figure 64. on page 135.
2.4.2.2 Rack Alarm Interfaces
The rack alarm interface signals are available on the two front panel connectors of the RAI board. These
two interfaces are:
– A 9 pins SUB–D female connector, which provides the interface between the master shelf and the
TRU (or PDU),
– A 6 pins RJ11 connector, which provides the interface between two shelves.
2.4.2.3 LAN accesses
The LAN board provides LAN accesses on both RJ–45 and BNC connectors.
* LAN access code 3AL 86653 AAAD or later must be used for LAN_I installations in slot 27.
Any variant of 3AL 86653AA may be used for LAN_Q in master slot 26.
2.4.2.4 “Q3” Interface
At the ESC front panel, a 9–pin SUB–D female connector provides an access to an ”Q3” interface. It allows
to connect a Craft Terminal.
2.4.2.5 1696MS_C Intershelf link
The 15–pin SUB–D female connector, located on the front panel of the I–link_M and I–link_S boards, al-
lows to link the SPI bus and the card presence signal from slave to master 1696MS_C shelves.
2.4.2.6 “DBG” Interface Connector
8–pin RJ45 connectors at the front–panel of the ESC board, are used for the “DBG” interface (factory
tests).
2.4.3 Power supply connections
Power supply voltage is distributed to the shelves on a 3 pin SUB–D connector, in front panel of each PSC.
It is also available on the M1 and M2 connectors of the Power Monitoring Unit.
2.4.4 User interfaces
The user interfaces are available on the front panel connector of the UIC(s).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
52 pin SCSI–2 Female connector of the UIC.

Note: 50 pin SUB–D connector is connected to GNDM by the 2 screw’s holes called pin 51 and pin 52.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 111 / 390
390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
2.5 Units front view
together with legenda and meaning.
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
The following paragraphs show the units front views and the relevant access points (Leds, switches etc.)
112 / 390
2.5.1 Tributaries front view
3AL86603XX
ACRONYM 1696MS 1696MS_C
Extraction
SLOTS SLOTS handle

MCC1 4;5;6;7;
8;9;10;11
2; 3; 4; 5; 6 Power failure LED
14;15;16;17;
MCC2 Out Of Service LED
18;19;20;21 Abnormal Rx LED
Abnormal Tx LED
Hardware failure
LED
Access points description APSD restart

Name Meaning push–button
This led is ON when the board is plugged in absence of

Green led hardware failure (HWF)
This led is ON when the board is plugged but not configured by
Yellow led the software
Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side, depending on the User Rx
configuration. The LED is ON when
Yellow led 1) Add/Drop configuration: WDM Rx alarm or User Tx alarm
2) Pass–through configuration: WDM Rx alarm
Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side, depending on the User Tx
1) Add/Drop configuration: User Rx alarm or WDM Tx alarm
Yellow led
2) Pass–through configuration: WDM Tx alarm
3) Shut–down of the WDM Tx
Hardware failure. The LED is WDM Rx
– green when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
Green /
– yellow when the board is plugged and in firmware download state*
Yellow /
– red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure
Red led
(OR on the power supply alarms) or C_TYPE
WDM Tx
User Rx – User Reception: client input signal (from client)
User Tx – User Transmission: client output signal (to client)
WDM Rx – WDM Reception: WDM input signal from OMDX/OADM
WDM Tx – WDM Transmission: WDM output signal to
OMDX/OADM
N.B. * When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure led Optical safety
on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a board while label
this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board will not restart and
may have to be returned for factory repair.
Extraction handle
N.B. Make sure fibers are disconnected when plugging / unplugging the
card.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 42. MCC1 and MCC2 boards Front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 113 / 390
390
1696MS 1696MS_C
3AL95150AX
ACRONYM SLOTS SLOTS Extraction
handle
4;5;6;7;

8;9;10;11
MCC3 2; 3; 4; 5; 6
14;15;16;17; Power failure LED
Out Of Service LED
18;19;20;21 Abnormal Rx LED
Abnormal Tx LED
Hardware failure
LED
Access points description
APSD restart
Name Meaning
push–button
This led is ON when the board is plugged in absence of
Green led hardware failure (HWF)
Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side, depending on the
Yellow led 1) Add/Drop configuration: WDM Rx alarm or User Tx alarm
2) Pass–through configuration: WDM Rx alarm User Tx (SFP)**
Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side, depending on the User Rx (SFP)**
1) Add/Drop configuration: User Rx alarm or WDM Tx alarm
Yellow led
2) Pass–through configuration: WDM Tx alarm
3) Shut–down of the WDM Tx
Hardware failure. The LED is
– green when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
Green /
Yellow / WDM Rx
(OR on the power supply alarms) or C_TYPE
Red led
User Tx – User Transmission: client output signal (to client)*

User Rx – User Reception: client input signal (from client)*
WDM Rx – WDM Reception: WDM input signal from OMDX/OADM WDM Tx
OMDX/OADM
N.B. * User TX and User RX access points have to be equipped with Small
Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) optical modules, shown in Figure 47.
on page 118
Optical safety
label
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Extraction handle
Figure 43. MCC3 board Front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 114 / 390
390
1696MS 1696MS_C
3AL86834XX
4;5;6;7; handle
8;9;10;11
OCC10
14;15;16;17; 2; 3; 4; 5; 6
Power failure Led
18;19;20;21 Out Of Service Led
Abnormal Rx Led
Access points description Abnormal Tx Led
Hardware failure
Name Meaning Led
Managed by hardware. This led is ON when the board is APSD restart
Green led plugged in absence of hardware failure (HWF) push–button
Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side. Managed by SW. User Rx
The LED is ON when User Tx
Yellow led – (LOS/LOF_OTN/LOM_OTN)_WDM_RX
– DEG_OUT_User_TX WDM Rx
The LED is ON only if the alarm is “shown” WDM Tx
Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side. Managed by SW.

The LED is ON when SD or
– (LOS_User_RX
Yellow led
– (LOS/DEG_OUT/TOR)_WDM_TX
The LED is ON only if the alarm is “shown”
Hardware failure. Managed by SW. The LED is
– green when the board is plugged, configur and without failure
Green /
– yellow when the board is in firmware download state*
Yellow /
Red led
(OR on the power supply alarms) 10Gbps Rx
User Rx – User Reception: client input signal (from client)
User Tx – User Transmission: client output signal (to client)
WDM Rx – WDM Reception: WDM input signal from

OMDX/OADM 10Gbps Tx
OMDX/OADM
10 Gbps front panel link to substitute back panel links, when only
2.5Gb back panel is present
Optical safety
N.B. * When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure label
led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a
board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board
will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair. Extraction
** When the board is configured in loopback, the RXA and TXA handle
LEDs are always turned OFF.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 44. OCC10 front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 115 / 390
390
1696MS 1696MS_C Extraction
ACRONYM handle
SLOTS SLOTS
2–3; 4–5; 6–7;

4 X ANY

8–9; 10–11; 2–3; Drawer 3
Power presence LED
4 X ANY_S 12–13; 14–15; Power
4–5 Out Of Service LED
presence
16–17; 18–19; Abnormal reception LED LED
4 X ANY_P Abnormal transmission LED
20–21; 22–23
Hardware failure LED
Tx Client
Drawer 1 Rx signal
3
Power presence LED

Name Meaning
PWR Managed by hardware. It is ON when the board is Client Tx
Green led plugged and no power failure detected signal Rx Drawer 4
1 Power
OOS This led is ON when the board is plugged but not con-
presence
Yellow led figured by the software LED
Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side. ON means
RXA
– SD drawers
Yellow
– ILOS on STM–16 side.
led
Managed by software Tx Client
TXA Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side. ON means Drawer 2 Rx signal
Yellow – ILOS on drawer side. 4
Power
led Managed by software. presence
LED
Green / – Green when the board is plugged, configured and
Yellow / without failure
Red led – Yellow when the board is plugged and in firmware
download state* Client Tx
signal Rx
– Red when one of the On Board power supply 2
(OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms)
N.B. * When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware fail- Tx STM16
ure led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug aggregate
Rxsignal **
a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board
will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair.
LASER PRODUCT
HAZARD LEVEL 1
** On 4xANY_P only, the STM–16 aggregate signal is provided

by means of Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) optical modules,
3ALXXXXX X
shown in Figure 47. on page 118

N.B. Make sure fibers are disconnected when plugging / unplug- Extraction
ging the drawers or the 4xANY host card. handle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 45. 4ANY front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 116 / 390
390
1696MS 1696MS_C
3AL86892AA
handle
4;5;6;7;
8;9;10;11
MVAC Not used
14;15;16;17;
18;19;20;21

Name Meaning VOA1 input
PWR Power and hardware failure led. It is

Green/Red – Green when the board is plugged, configured and without
led failure
– Red when the card is plugged and in hardware failure VOA1 output
In1 Input signals (cable connection 1 and 2) to be adjusted by
In2 the 2 VOAs of the MVAC board
Out1 Output signals (cable connection 1 and 2) adjusted/optimized
Out2 by the 2 VOAs of the MVAC board
VOA2 input
VOA2 output
Extraction
handle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 46. MVAC front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 117 / 390
390
ACRONYM EQUIPPED ON PORT
STM–16 SFP: S–16.1/2FC; I–16.1;

L–16.1; L–16.2;

S–16.1; S–16.1 multirate 4xANY_P
MCC3
STM–16 SFP: Bronze/PIN CWDM
STM–16 SFP: Silver/APD CWDM
STM–1 SFP: S–1.1/FE/FDDI/100BaseLX;
L–1.1; L–1.2
STM–4 SFP: S–4.1/ESCON; L–4.1; L–4.2
1.25GBE SFP: GBE1000LX/LH/1FC 1300nm;
MCC3
GBE1000SX/1FC 850nm; GBE1000ZX
1FC SFP: 1FC/2FC 850nm;
1FC/2FC 1310nm
SFP optical module
OUTPUT SIGNAL
INPUT SIGNAL
Optical cables
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 47. SFP optical module
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 118 / 390
390
2.5.2 Multiplexers front view
3AL86615XX
ACRONYM 1696MS 1696MS_C Extraction
SLOTS SLOTS
handle
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS HardWare
2; 3; 4; 5; 6;
(shown in figure) Failure LED
4,5,6
OMDX8100_M_L1_X 12; 13; 22
Monitoring Monitor Tx out

Monitor Rx out
Line Line Tx out
Name Meaning
Line Rx in
Ch#38
WDM Tx in
Green / – Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure WDM Rx out
Red led – Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in
failure (OR on the power supply alarms) WDM Tx in
37
WDM Rx out
Monitor Output power measurement signal (to optical measurement de-
Tx out vice)
WDM Tx in
36
Monitor Input power measurement signal (to optical measurement de- WDM Rx out
Rx out vice)
WDM Tx in
35
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line) WDM Rx out
Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from line)
WDM Tx in
33
WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding MCC (Ch. Access- WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
30 38) channels
WDM reception output signal, to corresponding MCC (Ch. 30 WDM Tx in
32
WDM Rx
WDM Rx out
out 38)
Extra Tx Extra channels input (from other Mux/Demux board) WDM Tx in
31
in WDM Rx out
Extra Rx Extra channels output (to other Mux/Demux board)
WDM Tx in
30
out WDM Rx out
SPV Tx in Supervision transmission input signal (from SPVM board)
SPV Rx out Supervision reception output signal (to SPVM board) Extra Extra Tx in
channels Extra Rx out
SB Tx in Short Band transmission channels input (from other Mux/Demux)
SPV Tx in
SB Rx out Short Band reception channels output (to other Mux/Demux) Supervision S
SPV Rx out
N.B. The OMDX8100_M_L1_X board is not provided with Expansion SB Tx in

EX
the Supervision (SPV Tx in / out) access points SB Rx out
Optical safety
label
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 48. OMDX8100_M_L1_XS board front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 119 / 390
390
3AL86615XX
SLOTS SLOTS handle
OMDX8100_M_L2

HardWare

(shown in figure)
2; 3; 4; 5; 6; Failure LED
OMDX8100_M_S2 4, 5, 6
12; 13; 22
OMDX8100_M_S1
Line Tx out
Line
Line Rx in
Ch#28
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
27
WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
26
WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
25
Access- WDM Rx out
channels
WDM Tx in
23
WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
22
Name Meaning WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
21
20
WDM Rx out
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line or other Mux/Demux)
Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from line or other Mux/Demux) Extra Tx in
Extra
WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding MCC (Ch. Extra Rx out
WDM Tx in
2028 for L2 band, 4250 for S2 band, 5260 for S1 band)
WDM Rx WDM reception output signal, to corresponding MCC (Ch.
out 2028 for L2 band, 4250 for S2 band, 5260 for S1 band)
Extra Tx Extra channels input (from other Mux/Demux board)
in
Extra Rx Extra channels output (to other Mux/Demux board)
Optical safety
out label
Extraction
handle
This front panel is similar to that of OMDX8100_M_S2 and S1 boards, except for the set of channels,
i.e. Ch. 42 to 50 for S2 band and Ch. 52 to 60 for S1 band. The set of channels is printed on the front
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type.
Figure 49. OMDX8100_M_L2/S2/S1 boards front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 120 / 390
390
3AL86637AX
SLOTS SLOTS Extraction
handle
OADM8100_M_L1_S
HardWare
(shown in figure)
Failure LED
OADM8100_M_L2_S 2; 3; 4; 5; 6;
4; 5; 6
OADM8100_M_S1_S 12; 13; 22
OADM8100_M_S2_S Monitor Rx out
Line Line Tx out

Line Rx in
Ch#38
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
Access points description WDM Tx in
37
Hardware failure. The LED is WDM Tx in
36
WDM Tx in
35
failure (OR on the power supply alarms) WDM Rx out
Monitor Output power measurement signal (to optical measurement de- Channels
Tx out vice) accesses WDM Tx in
33
WDM Rx out
Monitor Input power measurement signal (to optical measurement de-
Rx out vice) WDM Tx in
32
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line) WDM Rx out
Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from line) WDM Tx in
31
WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding MCC: WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in ch. 30 38 (L1 band), ch. 2028 (L2), ch. 4250 (S2),
WDM Tx in
30
ch. 5260 (S1) WDM Rx out
WDM Rx WDM reception output signal, to corresponding MCC: ch. 30
out 38 (L1 band), ch. 2028 (L2), ch. 4250 (S2), ch. 5260 (S1) Extra Extra Tx in
Extra Tx Extra or pass–through channels input (from other Mux/Demux channels Extra Rx out
in board) SPV Tx in
Supervision S
Extra Rx Extra or pass–through channels output (to other Mux/Demux SPV Rx out
out board)
SPV Tx in Supervision transmission input signal (from SPVM board) Unused
Unused
SPV Rx out Supervision reception output signal (to SPVM board)
Optical safety
label
Extraction
handle
This front panel is similar to that of OADM8100_M_L2/S2/S1_S boards, except for the set of channel, i.e. Ch.
20 to 28 for L2 band, Ch. 42 to 50 for S2 band and Ch. 52 to 60 for S1 band. Four different boards are so available.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The set of channels is printed on the front panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type.
Figure 50. OADM8100_M_L1_S (L2/S1/S2) boards front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 121 / 390
390
3AL86637BA
SLOTS SLOTS Extraction handle
OADM4100_M_ch20–23_S

HardWare Failure LED

(shown in figure) 2; 3; 4; 5; 6;
OADM4100_M_ch35–38_S 4; 5; 6
12; 13; 22
OADM4100_M_ch57–60_S Monitor Tx out
Monitoring Monitor Rx out
Line Tx out
Line Line Rx in
Ch#33
WDM Tx in
Hardware failure. The LED is WDM Tx in
32
– Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure WDM Rx out
Green / Channels
Red led – Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in accesses
WDM Tx in
31
failure (OR on the power supply alarms) WDM Rx out
Monitor Output power measurement signal (to optical measure-
Tx out ment device) WDM Tx in
30
WDM Rx out
Monitor Input power measurement signal (to optical measure- Extra or
Rx out ment device) pass– Extra Tx in
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line) through Extra Rx out
channels
Supervision SPV Tx in S
SPV Rx out
WDM Tx in WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding MCC: ch.
2023; 2528; 3033; 3538; 4245; 4750; 5255;
Unused
5760
Unused
WDM Rx WDM reception output signal, to corresponding MCC: ch.
out 2023; 2528; 3033; 3538; 4245; 4750; 5255;
5760
Extra Tx Extra or pass–through channels input (from other Mux/De-
in mux board)
Extra Rx Extra or pass–through channels output (to other Mux/De-
out mux board)
SPV Tx in Supervision transmission input signal (from SPVM board) Optical safety label
Extraction handle
This front panel is the same for all OADM4100_M_chXX–YY_S four channels boards, except for the set
of channels: eight sets of 4 channels are available for this board type; eight different boards are so available.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The set of channels is printed on the front panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type.
Figure 51. OADM4100_M_chxx–yy_S boards front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 122 / 390
390
3AL86778XX
handle
OADM2100_M_30_31_S
(shown in figure) HardWare

Failure LED
OADM2100_M_32_33_S 2; 3; 4; 5; 6; 4; 5; 6
OADM2100_M_35_36_S
12; 13; 22
OADM2100_M_37_38_S
OADM2100_M_47_48_S Monitor Rx out
Line Line Tx out

Line Rx in
Ch#30
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
Ch #1
Access points description Channel

accesses
Name Meaning
Green / – Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure
31
WDM Rx out
Monitor Output power measurement signal (to optical measure- Ch #2
Tx out ment device)
SPV Tx in S
Supervision
Monitor Input power measurement signal (to optical measure- SPV Rx out
Rx out ment device)
Extra Extra Tx in
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line)
Unused
WDM Tx in WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding MCC:
Unused
ch. 30–31; 32–33; 35–36; 37–38; 47–48
WDM Rx WDM reception output signal, to corresponding MCC:
out ch. 30–31; 32–33; 35–36; 37–38; 47–48
Extra Tx in Extra or pass–through channels input (from other Mux/De-
mux board)
Extra Rx Extra or pass–through channels output (to other Mux/De-
out mux board)
SPV Rx out Supervision reception output signal (to SPVM board) Optical safety
label
Extraction
handle
This front panel is the same for all OADM2100_M_chxx_yy_S two channels boards, except for the set
of channels: five sets of 2 channels are available for this board type; five different boards are so available.
The set of channels is print on the front panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 52. OADM2100_M_xx_yy_S board front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 123 / 390
390
3AL86777XX
handle
OADM1100_M_25_S

HardWare

OADM1100_M_30_S Failure LED
OADM1100_M_31_S
LONG BAND
OADM1100_M_32_S
OADM1100_M_33_S Monitoring Monitor Tx out
Monitor Rx out
OADM1100_M_35_S 2; 3; 4; 5; 6;
OADM1100_M_36_S 4; 5; 6 Line Line Tx out
12; 13; 22 Line Rx in
OADM1100_M_37_S
Ch# xx
Channel Add WDM Tx in
OADM1100_M_38_S access Drop WDM Rx out
OADM1100_M_47_S
SHORT
BAND
OADM1100_M_48_S
OADM1100_M_50_S

Name Meaning
Green / – Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure SPV Tx in
Supervision S
Red led – Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in SPV Rx out
failure (OR on the power supply alarms)
Extra Extra Tx in
Monitor Output power measurement signal (to optical measure-
Tx out ment device)
Monitor Input power measurement signal (to optical measure-
Rx out ment device)
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line)
WDM Tx in WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding MCC:

ch. 25; 30; 31; 32; 33; 35; 36; 37; 38; 47; 48; 50
WDM Rx WDM reception output signal, to corresponding MCC:
out ch. ch. 25; 30; 31; 32; 33; 35; 36; 37; 38; 47; 48; 50
Extra Tx in Extra or pass–through channels input (from other Mux/De-
mux board)
Optical safety
Extra Rx Extra or pass–through channels output (to other Mux/De- label
out mux board)
Extraction
handle
This front panel is the same for all OADM1100_M_xx_S one channel boards, except for the channel:
12 different channels are available for this board type and then twelve different boards are available.The
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
number of the channel is printed on the front panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type.
Figure 53. OADM1100_M_xx_S board front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 124 / 390
390
3AL86779AA
handle
SPV_F_1310_1550 2; 3; 12
5; 6 HardWare
13; 22 Failure LED

Monitor Rx out
Common Line Tx out

Access points description Line Line Rx in
Name Meaning
1310
1310 Mux In
Dmux out
Monitor Output power measurement signal (to optical measurement
Tx out device)
Monitor Input power measurement signal (to optical measurement
Rx out device) Mux In
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to the line) 1550 Dmux out
Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from the line) SPV Tx in
Mux in Input 1310 nm signal Supervision S
SPV Rx out
Dmux out Output reception 1310 nm signal
Mux in Input 1550 nm signal
Dmux out Output reception 1550 nm signal
Optical safety
label
Extraction
handle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 54. SPV_F_1310_1550 board front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 125 / 390
390
SLOTS SLOTS
28 35

SPV_F_C 9; 10; 11

38 45
HardWare
Failure LED
Extra Tx in
Extra
SPV Tx in
Supervision S
SPV Rx out
Tx input
Client access
Rx output
3AL86779BAXX

Name Meaning
Extra In Input extra signal (1310 or 1550 nm)
Extra Out Output extra signal (1310 or 1550 nm)
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to the line)
Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from the line)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 55. SPV_F_C board front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 126 / 390
390
2.5.3 Optical amplifiers front view
1696MS SLOTS 1696MS_C

ACRONYM Master Expans SLOTS Extraction

handle
OAC1
4; 5; 4; 5;
L_OAC1 Power ON LED
12; 13; 12; 13; 2,3** Out Of Service LED
OAC2 20; 21; Abnormal input signal alarm LED
20; 21 22; 23* APSD status LED
L_OAC2
Reset push–button

Name Meaning
PW Power led managed by HW. It is ON when Stage 1 Mon. Rx (IN)
Green led the board is plugged and without HWF monitoring Mon. Tx (OUT)
OOS Managed by SW. It is ON when the board is

Yellow led plugged but not configured by the SW
Abnormal input signal alarm. Caused by Stage 2 Mon. Rx (IN)
ABN 1) 1st stage input optical signal level has de- monitoring Mon. Tx (OUT)
Yellow led creased below the input signal loss threshold Removable
2) Output safety shutdown ot the 2nd stage. cover
Managed by SW
APSD Managed by SW. The LED is Input
Yellow – OFF when APSD enable Stage 1 Output
led *** – ON when APSD disable forced ON or OFF
Input
Hardware failure led, managed by SW. It is Stage 2 Output
HWF – Green when the board is plugged, configu
Green / red and without failure Input
VOA Output
Yellow / – yellow when the board is in firmware down
Red led load state****
Input Optical
– Red when Supervision safety
Output
a) one of the On Board power supply is in label
failure (OR on the power supply alarms) Input

Extra pump
b) C_TYPE alarm is raised Unused
Unused
N.B. * Slots 22 and 23 are available in compact shelf only Unused
** Only OAC2 and OAC2_L can be equipped in compact shelf
*** The LED is always ON because the APSD enable mode is
not supported
**** When the board is on firmware download state, the hard-
ware failure led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never
unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur,
3AL86703AX
the board will not restart and may have to be returned for
factory repair. Only OAC2 and OAC2_L support FW download
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Extraction handle
Figure 56. OAC1, OAC2, OAC1_L and OAC2_L front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 127 / 390
390
2.5.4 Controller front view
3AL 86661AAXX
SLOTS SLOTS

handle

1 (master
ESC 1 shelf only)
URG Urgent Alarm LED
NRG Not Urgent alarm LED
ATD Attended alarm LED
ABN
Abnormal Condition LED
IND Indicative alarm LED
SC Shelf Controller LED

Access points description STATUS
Name Meaning EC Equipment Controller LED

URG Urgent Alarm (major or critical)
Red led
NRG Not Urgent Alarm (minor)
ACO Alarm Cut Off push button
Red led
ATD Attended Alarm: acknowledged URG or NURG LAT Lamp Test push button*
Yellow led alarm (alarm storing)
ABN Abnormal condition
Yellow led RST RESET push button
IND Indicative Alarm (warning)
Yellow led
EC Green led means communication OK between EC/SC Craft
Green / Red led means no communication between EC/SC

Red / but SC is started ”F” Interface for CT connection
Yellow led Yellow led means start time SUB–D 9 pins connector
SC Green led means SC started
Green/Red Red led means SC default
/Yellow led Yellow led means start time
”DBG” Interface
RJ45 connector
”DBG” Interface
RJ45 connector
NB:*LAT button lights up all leds of the NE except for the ESC ones. Extraction
When pressing RST button, EC & SC LEDs status doesn’t change handle
When SC is restarted, the EC led is red and the SC led is green.
When the communication between EC & SC is re–established, both EC & SC LEDs are green
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 57. ESC front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 128 / 390
390
SPVM2 2; 22; 23 4; 5; 6
Power ON LED
Line Busy LED
Conference Call LED
Vacant Line LED
J1: Speech channel

handset connector
Access points description Board reset push button
Name Meaning
Line pick up push button
PWR PoWeRing led: it is ON when the board is powered and
Green led without HardWare Failure (HWF). Managed by HW
LB Line Busy led: it is ON when the speech
Yellow led channel is busy
CC Conference Call led: it is ON when a conference Rx1 input
Yellow led call is occuring on the speech channel
OSC 1
VL Vacant Line led: it is ON when the Speech channel
Yellow led is vacant
Hardware failure. The LED is Tx1 output
Yellow / – Yellow when the board is in firmware download state*
RX1 input OSC1 reception input signal, from OAC, OMDX or OADM Rx2 input
TX1 input OSC1 transmssion output signal, to OAC, OMDX or OADM
OSC 2
RX2 input OSC2 reception input signal, from OAC, OMDX or OADM
J1 Speech channel handset connection Tx2 output
Optical safety label
Speech channel number

coding wheels
N.B. * When a board is on firmware download state, the hard-

ware failure led on the front board lights on yellow colour.
Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should
3AL86606AB
this occur, the board will not restart and may have to be
returned for factory repair.
Extraction handle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 58. SPVM2 front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 129 / 390
390

SPVM_H 2; 22; 23 4; 5; 6

Power ON LED
Line Busy LED
Conference Call LED
Vacant Line LED
J1: Speech channel

handset connector
Access points description Board reset push button
Name Meaning
Line pick up push button
PWR PoWeRing led: it is ON when the board is powered and
Green led without HardWare Failure (HWF). Managed by HW
LB Line Busy led: it is ON when the speech
Yellow led channel is busy
CC Conference Call led: it is ON when a conference Rx1 input
Yellow led call is occuring on the speech channel
VL Vacant Line led: it is ON when the Speech channel OSC 1
Yellow led is vacant
Hardware failure. The LED is Tx1 output
Yellow / – Yellow when the board is in firmware download state*
RX1 input OSC1 reception input signal, from OAC, OMDX or OADM
J Speech channel handset connection
N.B. * When the board is on firmware download state, the hardware Optical safety label
failure led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never un-
plug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, Speech channel number
coding wheel
the board will not restart and may have to be returned for
factory repair.
3AL86606AC
Extraction handle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 59. SPVM_H front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 130 / 390
390
SLOTS SLOTS
2; 12;
OSMC Not used

13; 23
Out Of Service LED
Power ON LED
Inputs power
Access points description monitoring
Name Meaning
The led is GREEN when the board is plugged, configured
Green/ and without Hardware failure (HWF).
Red led It is RED when the board is plugged and in HWF.
This led is ON when a firmware download is being per-

Yellow led formed
.... Input power monitoring points giving the possibility to check Inputs power
the power in 8 different locations per each channel monitoring
N.B. When the board is on firmware download state, the OOS Led
on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a
board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the
board will not restart and may have to be returned for fac-
tory repair
3AL86893AA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 60. OSMC front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 131 / 390
390
SLOTS SLOTS

I–Link_M Not used 6 (master

shelf only)
EXP. shelves 1, 2,
3, CONNECTION
STATUS LEDs
Power Failure LED
HW Failure LED
SUB–D15P, to be
connected to ex-
pansion shelf 1

Name Meaning
The led is ON when the connection with slave shelf 1 is
Orange led established
SUB–D15P, to be
The led is ON when the connection with slave shelf 2 is connected to ex-
Orange led established pansion shelf 2
The led is ON when the connection with slave shelf 3 is
Orange led established (only 2 slave shelves allowed in current rel.)
Power failure led; it is ON when the board is properly
Orange led powered
Hardware failure led. It is
– GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and
Green/Red
without failure
led SUB–D15P, to be
– RED when software reset is being performed
connected to ex-
Connection point with 1696MS_C expansion shelf 1
pansion shelf 3
Connection point with 1696MS_C expansion shelf 2 (not used in cur-
Connection point with 1696MS_C expansion shelf 3 rent rel.)
(not used in current release)
3AL86893AA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 61. I–Link_M board front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 132 / 390
390
SLOTS SLOTS
1 (slave
I–Link_S Not used

shelf only) NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
Power Failure LED
HW Failure LED

Name Meaning
Power failure led; it is ON when the board is properly

Orange led powered SUB–D15P, to be
Hardware failure led. It is connected to the
– GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and 1696MS_C mas-
Green/Red ter shelf
without failure
led
– RED when software reset is being performed
Connection point with 1696MS_C master shelf
3AL86893AA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 62. I–Link_S board front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 133 / 390
390
SLOTS SLOTS
LAC (LAN_Q) 26 8

LAC (LAN_I) 27 –
HardWare
Failure LED
RJ45
connector
NMS / INTRA–SHELF
connections
BNC
connectors

Name Meaning
Green / – Green when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
Red led – Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure
(OR on the power supply alarms)
– in master shelf, slot 26, or in compact shelf, slot 8 (LAN_Q), these connec-
RJ45 and tors provide the physical access (Q3 interf.) to connect an external supervi-
BNC con- sion equipment (1353..). Slot 26 is linked to the ESC board via backpanel link
nectors – a second board can be plugged in master shelf, slot 27 (LAN_I), to allow
the intra–shelf communication via a cascade (BNC) or HUB (RJ45) link with
the same connector of the LAN_I board, slot 27, of each expansion shelf.
If a cable is fitted in RJ45 conn., BNC is unavailable and viceversa
Figure 63. LAN boards front panel

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 134 / 390
390
SLOTS SLOTS
HK 36 11
HardWare
Failure LED
25 pins SUB–D female connector for house-

keeping alarms (8 inputs and 8 outputs)

Name Meaning
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 64. Housekeeping board front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 135 / 390
390
SLOTS SLOTS

RAI 37 9; 10

HardWare
Failure LED
9 pins SUB–D female

connector (to PDU/TRU)
RACK ALARMS
RJ11, 6 pins connector (to

the 9 pins SUB–D female
connector of the shelf below)

Name Meaning
9 pins SUB–D fe- Used to connect the RAI card of the master shelf with the
male connector PDU/TRU
RJ11 6 pins Used for intra–shelf communication. It has to be connected to
connector the 9–pin connector of the slave shelf below. Only for 1696MS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 65. RAI front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 136 / 390
390
SLOTS SLOTS
UIC 46; 47 –
HardWare
Failure LED
52 pins SCSI–2
female connector

Name Meaning
Red led – Red when the board is in hardware failure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 66. UIC front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 137 / 390
390
2.5.5 Switching protection, power supply and fans front view

SLOTS SLOTS

OPC 28 35 9, 10, 11
38 45
SM & MM OPC SM & MM OPC

with connectors with jumpers
3AL86708AC HardWare Failure LED* 3AL86708AA
3AL86708AD 3AL86708AB
3AL95113AA
channel 1 Tx Input
To (Rx OUT) /
Tx input (Tx1IN)
channel 2 Tx Input From (Tx IN) channel1 Rx output (Rx1OUT)
transponders
channel 1 Rx Output or 4xANY Tx input (Tx2IN)
drawers channel2 Rx output (Rx2OUT)
channel 2 Rx Output
To (Tx Out) / Tx output
From (Rx IN)

Tx output To (Tx Out) / Client Rx input
From (Rx IN)
Rx input Client
Optical safety label

Name Meaning
Hardware failure. The LED is *
N.B. * The hardware failure led is not managed/provided on the SM optical splitter with jumpers
(P/N3AL 86708 AA––)
Figure 67. OPC front panel

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 138 / 390
390
SLOTS SLOTS
PSC 25, 48
PSC2 7, 12 (master/exp shelves)
PSC3 25, 48
1 (male) + VBATT
3–pin SUB–D
2 (female) GND
connector
3 (male) – VBATT

Name Meaning
Green / – GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
Red led – RED when the board is in failure or the power supply cable is not
connected
Figure 68. PSC/PSC2/PSC3 front panel

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 139 / 390
390
SLOTS SLOTS
PMU Placed below the 1696MS_C
Not used

master shelf

CONTROL UNIT
RECTIFIER 1 RECTIFIER 2 1) 2) 7)
in1 in2 OUT OUT
IN OUT
3) 3) 4) 5) 6)
3)
Two different solutions are provided 7) 1) 2)
OUT OUT
in1 F
A IN OUT
in2 N
5) 4) 3) 6)

Name Meaning
1) GREEN/ MAJOR alarm. The LED is
RED LED – GREEN when the board is plugged and without failure
– RED when the alarm is present (raised only if PMU_Presence). It is the OR of
• both rectifiers aremissing or both rectifiers input voltage < 85V rms
• both rectifiers output voltage <38V or >60V
• both fans from PMU case 1 failed (OR fan from PMU case 2 failed)
• both rectifiers temperature >55 C or output current < 12A
2) GREEN/ MINOR alarm. The LED is
RED LED – GREEN when the board is plugged and without failure
– RED when the alarm is present (raised only if PMU_Presence). It is the OR of
• one rectifier is missing or one rectifier input voltage < 85V rms
• one rectifier output voltage <38V or >60V
• one FAN from PMU case 1 failed or one rectifier temperature >55 C
• battery present but battery breaker open
3) GREEN/ BATTERY CONNECTED. The LED is RED if battery connection is failed.
RED LED The LED is GREEN if battery is connected.
4) GREEN/ TEST BATTERY. The LED is RED if test battery is failed.
RED LED The LED is GREEN if test battery is OK. The LED is LIT OFF if no battery connected
5) BATTERY CONNECTOR. It has to be conncted to the (optional) back–up battery
6) OUTPUT POWER CONNECTORS. SUB–D 3p to be connected to the two PSC(2) cards
7) PMU ALARMS CONNECTORS. SUB–D 15p to be connected to the FAN_C
8) AC INPUT POWER CONNECTORS. To be connected to the primary AC power supply
(100V/50–60Hz, 115V/60Hz, 230V/50Hz)
Figure 69. PMU front panel

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 140 / 390
390
SLOTS SLOTS
FANC 49 –
FAN_C – 13
FANC (for 1696MS)
HardWare
Failure LED
HardWare
Failure LED
15 pins SUB–D
female connector
(for batteries
EXT
PMU alarms raising)
FAN FAN_C (for 1696MS_C)

FILTER

Name Meaning
Green / – Green when the board is powered
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 70. FANs front panel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 141 / 390
390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
142 / 390
3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
3.1 General description

This section describes the main functions carried out by the
• 1696MSPAN
• 1696MS_C (CPE, housed in a compact shelf, with reduced functionalities)
Alcatel products.
The functions carried out by the NE, can be splitted in some sub–systems herebelow listed, and described
from para. 3.1.1 to para. 3.1.10:
• Transponder sub–system – see para.3.1.1
• TDM client signal concentrator sub–system – optional, see para. 3.1.2
• Optical MUX/DMUX (Wavelength Division Multiplexing) sub–system, see para. 3.1.3
• Optical Fiber Amplification (OFA) sub–system – optional – used in 1696MS only, see para.
3.1.4
• Supervision management (Optical Supervisory Channel, OSC) sub–system – optional,

see para. 3.1.5
• Automatic Power Equalization sub–system (APE) – optional, see para. 3.1.6
• Controller sub–system, see para. 3.1.7
• Power supply sub–system, see para. 3.1.8
• Protection (O–SNCP) sub–system, see para. 3.1.9
• Performance Monitoring sub–system, see para. 3.1.10.
Before starting with the presentation of the above listed functions / sub–systems, for a better system com-
prehension, the 1696MS main configurations (Line Terminal, OADM, back–to–back terminal, Repeater)
and the functions implemented in each of them are described in the following.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 143 / 390
390
Line Terminal configuration
Booster OSC
Up to insertion

32

TDM MUX OFA
Client concentrator
Transponder OSC DWDM
signals Up to 32
Up to extraction
32 line
Up to DMUX OFA
32
Pre–amp.
To boards Supervision OSC

TDM bus
LEGEND: SPI bus
3.6 V
Optical link
Equipment and User To 5.5 V Power
Electrical link boards supply
shelf control Interfaces 48 V
Optional
function 2
LAN–Q3
2 Mbit/s 48 V
NE management
application User service accesses Station batteries
If needed DCU modules can be used (placed before BOFA booster input, in both directions).
This type of configuration can be provided with one (as shown in current figure) or two OFAs (see
also para. 1.1.2 on page 60).
Figure 71. Functional synopsis in Line Terminal configuration
In the line terminal configuration all the above functions are needed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 144 / 390
390
OADM / back–to–back terminal (Hub) configuration
Client signals
TDM
concentrator
Up to 32
O–SNCP
Transponder Back panel Transponder

electrical links
(West) (East)
OSC Pre–amp. Booster OSC
extraction insertion
OFA DMUX MUX OFA

Pass through traffic
DWDM DWDM
line line
(West) OSC Pre–amp. OSC
Booster (East)
insertion extraction
OFA MUX DMUX OFA

Pass through traffic
OSC OSC
Supervision
To boards To boards
LEGEND:
TDM bus 48 V 5.5 V 3.6 V
SPI bus
Optical link
Electrical link
Equipment and User Power
shelf control Interfaces supply Optional
function
LAN–Q3 2
NE management 2 Mbit/s Station

application User service accesses batteries
If needed DCU modules can be used (placed before BOFA booster input, in both directions).
This type of configuration can be provided with one (as shown in current figure) or two OFAs (see
also para. 1.1.4 on page 62).
Figure 72. Functional synopsis in OADM configuration
The hub configuration is similar to the OADM one, but without pass–through channels (all the channels
are added/dropped).
In OADM configuration all the optical transmission functions (transponder, MUX and DMUX) are dupli-
cated to transmit the client signals in two directions. This configuration allows optical channel protection
functions (O–SNCP).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 145 / 390
390
In line repeater configuration

OFA 1 OFA 2
OSC OSC
VOA Stage 1 DCU Stage 2
DWDM DWDM
line OSC OSC line
Stage 2 DCU Stage 1 VOA
OSC OSC
Supervision
To boards To boards LEGEND:
TDM bus 48 V 5.5 V 3.6 V
SPI bus Optical link
Electrical link
Equipment and User Power
shelf control Interfaces supply
Optional
function
LAN–Q3 2
NE management 2 Mbit/s Station

application User service accesses batteries
Figure 73. Functional synopsis in Repeater configuration
In In line repeater configuration, the MUX/DEMUX and Transponder functions are not implemented. The
equipment acts as an in line amplifier, which allows nevertheless the Optical Supervision Channel (OSC)
and the supervision functions.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 146 / 390
390
3.1.1 Transponder sub–system
The transponder sub–system is built with

– Multi–rate Channel Cards (MCC)
– Optical Channel Cards (OCC10)

one per client signal. The role of this function is:
– At the transmit side (from client to DWDM line):

to adapt the client incoming optical signals to a dedicated wavelength and deliver those optical sig-
nals to the multiplexer (MUX) function.
– At the receive side (from DWDM line to client):

to restitute the client optical signals from the signal delivered by the demultiplexer (DEMUX) function.
The payload type configuration of the client signal is under control of the operator.
Up to 32 Client signals
User Tx User Rx
Up to 32
MCC / OCC10
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx WDM Tx
To MUX function
Up to 32
WDM channels
From DMUX function
Transponder function
Figure 74. Line terminal transponder function
In back–to–back and OADM configuration, the transponder function is doubled and is able to transmit and
receive the clients signals in two directions. It provides optionally Optical Sub–Network Connection
Protection (O–SNCP), see section 3.1.9, page 169.
Up to 32 Client signals
O–SNCP
Up to 32 Up to 32
MCC/OCC10 West MCC OCC10 East
MCC
User Tx User Rx MCC
User Tx User Rx
: Options
WDM Rx WDM Rx
8x8 Matrix Back–panel 8x8 Matrix
electrical
WDM Rx links WDM Rx
WDM Rx WDM Tx WDM Rx WDM Tx
From DMUX To MUX
function function
Up to 32 Up to 32
WDM channels WDM channels
To MUX From DMUX
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
function Transponder function function
Figure 75. Back–to–back terminal or OADM transponder function
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 147 / 390
390
3.1.1.1 Client signals
3.1.1.1.1 MCC client signals

The MCC1, MCC2 and MCC3 boards accept all bit rates from 100 Mbit/s to 2.66 Gbit/s in 3R (Re–time,

Re–amplify, Re–shape) mode. However beyond 2.5 Gbit/s the performances may be degraded.
The typical client signals accepted by the MCCs board are listed in the following table.
Some of them are proposed with a 3R regeneration mode for MCC1 and they are indicated with (*) on the
table. All the other signals are in 2R mode in MCC1.
Table 12. Example of Client signals – supported bit rates
MCC1, MCC2, MCC3

Bit rates (Mbit/s) Signal
100.000 FDDI
125.000 FE / FDDI
132.815 FC (12-M6–LE–I)
155.520 STM–1 / OC–3 (*)
200.000 ESCON
265.620 FC (25-M6–LL–I)
270.000 DTV / HDTV
466.560 OC–9
531.250 FC (50-M5–SL–I)
622.080 STM–4 / OC–12 (*)
933.120 OC–18
FC (100-SM–LL–I) (*)
1062.500
FICON / Inter–System Coupling Channel (ISC) (*)
1244.160 OC–24
1250.000 GBE (*)
1866.240 OC–36
2125.000 2FC (*)
2488.320 STM–16 / OC–48 (*)
2500.000 INFINIBAND
3.1.1.1.2 OCC10 client signals
The OCC10 board accepts the following client signals in 3R (Re–time, Re–amplify, Re–shape) mode:
– 9953.28 Gbps (STM–64 / OC–192 / 10GBE WAN)
– 10.3125 Gbps (10GBE LAN)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 148 / 390
390
3.1.1.2 Optical channels
The 1696MSPAN transmits the 32 possible channels in the C–band. Table 13. on page 149 gives the
nominal central frequencies allocation plan, based on the 100 GHz channel spacing anchored to a
193.100 THz reference (ITU–T standard grid).

The C–band is split into 4 sub–bands, which support 8 channels each: the long bands L1 and L2, and the
short bands S1 and S2.
Then, each sub–band is composed of 2 sets of 4 consecutive channels. Each set is separated from the
adjacent sets by one unused channel, except between L1 and S2, where the separation is 3 unused chan-
nels.
Table 13. Nominal frequencies allocation plan in C–Band
Band Central frequency (GHz) Channel Number Central wavelength (nm)

(Craft terminal name) wavelength deviation : 0,12 nm (EOL)
192,000 20 1561,42
192,100 21 1560,61
192,200 22 1559,79
192,300 23 1558,98
L2
192,500 25 1557,36
192,600 26 1556,55
192,700 27 1555,75
192,800 28 1554,94
BLUE
BAND
193,000 30 1553,33
193,100 31 1552,52
193,200 32 1551,72
193,300 33 1550,92
L1
193,500 35 1549,32
193,600 36 1548,51
193,700 37 1547,72
193,800 38 1546,92
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 149 / 390
390
Band Central frequency (GHz) Channel Number Central wavelength (nm)
194,200 42 1543,73

194,300 43 1542,94
194,400 44 1542,14
194,500 45 1541,35
S2
194,700 47 1539,77
194,800 48 1538,98
194,900 49 1538,19
195,000 50 1537,40
RED
BAND
195,200 52 1535,82
195,300 53 1535,04
195,400 54 1534,25
195,500 55 1533,47
S1
195.700 57 1531,90
195.800 58 1531,12
195.900 59 1530,33
196.000 60 1529,55
The Central frequency value (in GHz) is the channel name, visualized on the Craft Terminal.
The Multi–rate Channel Cards (MCC1, MCC2 and MCC3), support two channels each. 16 different MCCs
(transponders) are able to cover the 32 channels.
The 10 Gbps Optical Channel Cards (OCC10), support instead one channel each. Then 32 different
OCC10s (transponders) are necessary to cover the 32 channels.
Mixed configuration (MCC and OCC10 in the same equipment) are allowed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 150 / 390
390
3.1.2 TDM client signal concentrator (4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P) sub–system
The transponder sub–system supports clients signals from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s. Each client signal
connected to a transponder access uses a WDM channel, a wavelength (λ).
The aim of the 4ANY TDM concentration is to save transponders and to optimize the use of each WDM
channel. Client signals from 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s can be concentrated in one STM16. For example,
4 x STM1 client signals can be concentrated on a unique STM16 signal and applied on a unique transpond-
er access.
4 Transponders
1 Concentrator
Transponder
1 Transponder
Transponder Up to 4 4xANY
Up to 4 WDM Up to 4 1 WDM
TDM Transponder
client signals optical client signals optical
concent.
Transponder channel
channels 1 STM16
Transponder
Figure 76. Principle of the 4xANY TDM concentration
The available client signal accesses and their maximum number are:
– Low bit rate:

• 4 x Fast Ethernet
• 4 x FDDI
• 4 x ESCON
• 4 x Digital Video
– SDH:
• 4 x STM1
• 3 x STM4
– High bit rate:

• 2 x Gigabit Ethernet
• 2 x Fiber Channel or FICON
The following mixes are also possible:

• 3 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x STM4
• 2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 2 x STM4
• 2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x (FC or GbEth or FICON)
• 1 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x STM4 +1 x (FC or GbEth or FICON).
• 2 x (FC or GbEth or FICON).
Low bit rate and High bit rates are available at 1310 nm and 850 nm. SDH bit rates are only available at
1310 nm.
On the aggregate side, the 4xANY_P board is equipped with a SFP optical module providing I–16.1,
S–16.1, Silver CWDM or Bronze CWDM interfaces, according to the SFP module used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 151 / 390
390
3.1.3 Wavelength Division Multiplexing sub–system
The optical multiplexer function

– receives from the transponder sub–system the colored optical channels

– multiplexes them into a DWDM signal

– launches the DWDM signal on the line.
The optical demultiplexer function
– receives the DWDM line signal
– demultiplexes this signal
– sends the recovered optical channels to the transponder sub–system.
The multiplexer/demultiplexer sub–system have a scalable architecture. By combining three sorts of basic
MUXes and three sorts of basic DMUXes, 4, 8, 12, 16, 24 and 32 channels, the multiplexing and demulti-
plexing capacities can be obtained.
3.1.3.1 Optical multiplexing
The multiplexer function may be obtained with the following optical MUXes:
– 5:1 and 9:1 MUXes:

This sort of optical MUX is able to multiplex 4 or 8 channels issued from the transponder function with
an extra input aggregate signal. The extra input may be connected to the output of another MUX
(MUX cascading), connected to the extra output of a corresponding DMUX (traffic pass through) or
simply not connected.
Aggregate signal Extra input

(n channels) Aggregate signal output Aggregate signal
5:1 (n+4 channels)
4 channels 4 Channel inputs
from TPD
Aggregate signal Extra input

(n channels) Aggregate signal output Aggregate signal
9:1 (n+8 channels)
8 channels 8 Channel inputs
from TPD
Figure 77. 4 and 8 channels optical MUXes
– 2:1 expansion MUX:

This sort of optical MUX is able to multiplex 2 aggregate signals, one in the long band and the other
in the short band. It is necessary to reach the multiplexing capacity of 24 and 32 channels and belongs
to the OMDX8100_M_L1_XS and OMDX8100_M_L1_X boards.
Aggregate signal LB input

(n1 channels) 2:1 Aggregate signal output Aggregate signal
Aggregate signal SB input EXP (n1+n2 channels)
(n2 channels)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 78. LB and SB aggregate signals expansion MUX
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 152 / 390
390
3.1.3.2 Optical demultiplexing
The demultiplexer function may be obtained with the following optical DMUXes:
– 1:5 and 1:9 DMUXes:

This sort of optical DMUX is able to demultiplex an input aggregate signal (n channels) into 4 or 8
channels and an output aggregate signal (n–4 or n–8 channels). The extra output may be connected
to the input of another DMUX (DMUX cascading), connected to the extra input of a MUX of the multi-
plexer function (traffic pass through) or simply not connected.
Aggregate signal Extra output

(n–4 channels) Aggregate signal input Aggregate signal
1:5 (n channels)
4 channels 4 Channel outputs
to TPD
Aggregate signal Extra output

(n–8 channels) Aggregate signal input Aggregate signal
1:9 (n channels)
8 channels 8 Channel outputs
to TPD
Figure 79. 4 and 8 channels optical DMUX
– 2:1 expansion DMUX:

This sort of optical DMUX is able to demultiplex the DWDM line signal into two aggregate signals,
one in the long band and the other in the short band. It is necessary to reach the demultiplexing capac-
ity of 24 and 32 channels and belongs to the OMDX8100_M_L1_XS and OMDX8100_M_L1_X
boards.
Aggregate signal LB output

(n1 channels) 1:2 Aggregate signal input Aggregate signal
Aggregate signal SB output EXP n1 LB channels
(n2 channels) n2 SB channels
Figure 80. LB and SB aggregate signals expansion MUX

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 153 / 390
390
3.1.3.3 Example of MUX and DMUX functions
Line Terminal configurations

In a 4 or 8–channels Line Terminal, multiplexing and demultiplexing are performed in one step. The extra

input of the MUX and the extra output of the DMUX are not connected.
MUX function
NC
9:1 8 channels
From transponder 8 to DWDM line
transmit functions
DMUX function
NC
1:9 8 channels
To transponder 8 from DWDM line
receive functions
Figure 81. MUX and DMUX functions of an 8 channels Line Terminal
In a 12 or 16–channels Line Terminal, multiplexing and demultiplexing are performed in two steps. The
example of Figure 82. shows how to cascade 2 MUXes and 2 DMUXes to obtain a 12–channels Line Ter-
minal.
The extra input of the first MUX is not connected. The 4–channels aggregate signal output of the first MUX
is connected to the extra input of the second MUX.
The extra output of the first DMUX is connected to the 4 channels aggregate signal input of the second
DMUX. The extra output of the second DMUX is not connected.
From
4 channels MUX function
aggregate
transponder 4 5:1
9:1 12 channels
transmit 8 to DWDM line
functions
4 channels DMUX function

To aggregate
transponder 4 1:5
1:9 12 channels
receive 8 from DWDM line
functions
Figure 82. MUX and DMUX functions of a 12 channels Line Terminal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 154 / 390
390
In a 24 or 32–channels Line Terminal, multiplexing and demultiplexing are performed in three steps. The
example of Figure 83. shows how the 2:1 expansion MUX multiplexes the 16–channels in long band and
16–channels in short band.
8 channels MUX function

aggregate
From 8 9:1 16 channels (LB)
aggregate
9:1 32 channels
transponder 8 2:1 to DWDM line
transmit 8 EXP
functions
8
9:1 16 channels (SB)
9:1 8 channels aggregate
aggregate
8 channels DMUX function

aggregate
8 1:9 16 channels (LB)
aggregate
To 1:9 32 channels
transponder 8 1:2 from DWDM line
OMDX_L1_X(S)
receive 8 EXP
functions 8 1:9 16 channels (SB)
1:9 8 channels
aggregate
aggregate
Figure 83. MUX and DMUX functions of a 32 channels Line Terminal
OADM configurations
The example of Figure 84. is an 8–channels OADM. 8 channels are dropped and added on both east and
west lines. In this configuration, the extra output of each DMUX is connected to the extra input of the MUX
of the opposite transmission direction. This allows to place the other 24 channels in pass through.
To/from To/from
transponder transponder
8 channels 8 channels 8 channels 8 channels
dropped added dropped added
DMUX 8 8 MUX
32 channels 24 channels aggregate 32 channels
from DWDM line 1:9 pass through 9:1 to DWDM line
West line East line

MUX 8 DMUX
32 channels 32 channels
9:1 1:9 from DWDM line
to DWDM line
24 channels aggregate
pass through
Figure 84. MUX and DMUX functions of an 8 channels OADM

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The same configuration is available with 1, 2, 4 and 8–channels (n–channels). In this case, the number
of aggregate channels available in pass through is 32 – n.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 155 / 390
390
The example of Figure 85. is a 32–channels back–to–back terminal. In this configuration, there no is pass
through traffic, the 1696MSPAN is like a hub–node.
From/to

transponder function

32 channels 32 channels
MUX function MUX function

9:1 8 8 9:1
9:1 8
9:1 32 channels
8 2:1
32 channels 2:1
8 8 to DWDM line
to DWDM line EXP EXP
8 8
9:1 9:1
9:1 9:1
East line
West line
DMUX function DMUX function
1:9 1:9
8 8
1:9 1:9
1:2 8 8 1:2 32 channels
32 channels 8 from DWDM line
8
from DWDM line EXP EXP
1:9 8 8 1:9
1:9 1:9
Figure 85. MUX and DMUX functions of a 32 channels back–to–back terminal
Remote channel to/from CPE.
Client signals Optional

functions
TPD TPD
OFA OFA
DWDM DWDM
line Mux Mux line
signal Dmux Dmux signal
n λ (up to 32) Passthrough n λ (up to 32)
ÉÉÉ
Remote channel
ÉÉÉ
TPD
Client signal
To/from CPE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 86. 1696MSPAN in back–to–back terminal configuration and with a remote channel
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 156 / 390
390
3.1.4 Optical Fiber Amplification sub–system
The Optical Fiber Amplification (OFA) sub–system can deliver:

– single or double stages amplification
– VOA at the first stage entry

– Up to 17 dBm output power.
As shown in Figure 71. and Figure 72. the 1696MSPAN may be equipped with one or two OFAs (one OFA
in west side and one in east side or two OFAs in west side and two in east side) in line terminal and OADM/
back–to–back configuration. In the following example is shown a double stage amplification.
In a single stage amplification, the line terminal or OADM is placed inside the OFA inter–stage (see
Figure 17. on page 62 as an example)
WEST SIDE LEGEND:

Stage 1 – Preamp. Stage 2– Booster
Optional
Pump 1 Pump 2 function
OSC
extraction
ATTEN/
VOA OFA 1 DCU OFA 2
MUX
DWDM function
line OSC (OMDX/OADM)
insertion
ATTEN/
OFA 2 DCU OFA 1 VOA
Pump 2 Pump 1
Stage 2 – Booster Stage 1 – Preamp.
Supervision function
Figure 87. OFA sub–system in line terminal or OADM configuration
In repeater configuration, the 1696MSPAN is mainly a bidirectional optical amplifier.
WEST SIDE LEGEND: EAST SIDE

Stage 1 – Preamp. Stage 2– Booster
Optional
Pump 1 Pump 2 function
OSC OSC
VOA ATTEN/
OFA 1 DCU OFA 2
DWDM DWDM
line OSC OSC line
OFA 2 ATTEN/ OFA 1 VOA
DCU
Pump 2 Pump 1
Stage 2 – Booster Stage 1 – Preamp.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Supervision function
Figure 88. OFA sub–system in repeater configuration
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 157 / 390
390
3.1.5 Optical supervisory channel (OSC) sub–system
An optional channel named OSC is allocated to the transport of the supervision data. The OSC allows the
remote monitoring of the NE in a network and gives some order–wires (data channel and voice channel)

to the users.

The OSC channel is managed by the SPV management unit. It is
– inserted at the output of the terminal equipment (input of the WDM line),
– regenerated in each OADM, back–to–back terminal or repeater,
– dropped at the input of the terminal equipment (output of the WDM line).
WDM OADM
terminal OADM repeater
O
M OADM 1 2
X OSC OSC
OSC OADM
SPVM SPVM SPVM

unit unit unit
OSC OSC OADM OSC

O
D OADM 2 1
X
WDM
OADM repeater In Line Repeater terminal
O
1 2 1 2 D
OSC X
OSC OSC
OADM
SPVM SPVM Unit SPVM

unit unit
OADM OSC OSC

OSC O
2 1 2 1 M
X
SPVM SPVM
SPVM
CPE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 89. Optical Supervisory Channel management in Line Terminal, OADM, OADM repeater and
In–Line–Repeater Equipment
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 158 / 390
390
In case of repeaters the SPV is inserted at the output of the NE: either in the amplifier board or in the last
mux board (OMDX or OADM). The optical interfaces are located inside the SPV management unit.
More than one SPVM board can be used in one shelf. A link from/to a Customer Premises Equipment
(CPE) carrying only one or two (1550 and/or 1310) data channels can be inserted on any kind of 1696MS
node (terminal or OADM).

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 159 / 390
390
3.1.6 Automatic Power Equalization (APE) subsystem
Automatic Power Equalization (APE) is a function which allows the automatic balancing of the optical spec-
trum at node output. The objective is to have a flat spectrum in power per channel.

For all information related to automatic power equalization, refer to the commissioning handbook.
Two kinds of boards are mandatory to perform APE :
– OSMC : OSMC board is a embedded optical spectrum analyser. It can measure 8 different spectra
at 8 different points of the NE. Only one OSMC per NE is needed. It must be optically connected to
monitoring ports of the NE
– MVAC : all loop, pass–through bands and external colored channels must be connected to MVAC.
Before launching APE, the operator needs to perform some pre–settings.
Firstly, the operator must declare the cabling between :
– MVAC & OADM or OMDX ports.
– OSMC & monitored boards.
Then, the operator sets the OSMC configuration parameters :
– Calibration factors : Because OSMC is connected to board monitoring outputs, calibration of the at-
tenuation path beween real signal on the line and OSMC input is needed.
8 calibration factors are set (one per OSMC input).
Calibration can be performed manually or automatically.
Each OSMC input can be independently calibrated or not, in automatic or manual mode.
– Optical LOS threshold : OSMC board detects two kinds of LOS of signals :
• Total LOS on input #i : Total LOS is raised on input #i if :

Maximum channel power of input #i < Total LOS threshold of input #i
• Relative LOS on channel x of input #i : relative LOS on channel x of input #i is raised if :

Maximum channel power of input #i – channel power x > Relative LOS threshold
These thresholds are configurable by the operator
Finally, the operator must load APE parameters :
– Installation or Upgrade
– Direction to equalize
– Interstage attenuation and maximum number of iterations in case of an OADM repeater.
When the operator launches the equalization, the NE asks for some spectrum acquisitions to the OSMC.
Spectrum data are sent from OSMC to the NE. The NE calculates required MVAC & transponders attenua-
tions so to have a flat spectrum at node output. The process can be iterative in case of an OADM repeater.
When the output tilt is optimized, resulting spectrum and tilt at node output are displayed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 160 / 390
390
MVAC
MVAC
D
E M
1 M U 2
U X
X
MVAC
OSMC
Figure 90. Automatic Power Equalization
APE is stopped if RUM, RUP, RUTM are raised, in case of communication problem or if maximum number
of iterations is reached.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 161 / 390
390
3.1.7 Controller sub–system
See Figure 91. on page 164 and Figure 92. The controller sub–system is based on a two levels model:
– Shelf Controller (SC)

– Equipment Controller (EC)

In current release the ESC (Equipment and Shelf Controller) is the hardware platform designed to support
the Equipment Controller (EC) functions and the Shelf Controller (SC) functions.
The Equipment Shelf Controller (ESC) board provides both features or only one (as needed).
It performs both EC and SC when it is located in slot 1 of the Master shelf and only the SC functionality
when it is plugged in slot 1 of an expansion shelf.
The Flash memory of the ESC board must be plugged on its socket and in the correct
sense. In this case, it is plugged easily without constraint. On the wrong sense the Flash
memory cannot be plugged. Then invert the side to be plugged and try again. Furthermore that
flash card must not be installed in a ESC used in Expansion shelf.
The Control Platform is also provided by the ESC board for the 1696MS_C.
Shelf Controller function
SC provides the resources to support the SW functions related to the physical machine control and mana-
gement and configuration provisioning.
In a shelf all the boards are connected to the ESC unit via the SPI bus. By means of the SPI bus, the proces-
sor of the ESC, can collect the control information of the boards (e.g.: alarms collection, remote inventory
and data EEPROM reading).
Equipment Controller function
The EC supports the Q3 agent and the VHM (Virtual Hardware Machine).
It provides the HW resources (physical interfaces) and the SW functionalities (protocol stack) required for
the communication between NE and Management system (OS, craft terminal, etc).
It performs as well all the SW functions related to the control and management activities of the ”virtual”
(logical) machine: info–model processing, event reporting and logging, equipment data base manage-
ment, SW downloading and management, etc.
Control bus
The SPI bus allows:

• connection between SC and boards for configuration data provisioning
• remote inventory data acquisition
• data collection ( alarms ) and commands handling (ex. loops)
The SC processor is master of this bus.
The IS–LINK (10 Mb/s) is used to realize the communication between the EC in the master shelf and the
SC in the expansion shelves.
The ISSB bus (not used in current release) connects the Shelf Controllers processor to the ASICs and
FPGAs of the different boards in the same shelf. It is used for OCh–OH management and to carry primi-
tives for OCC10 performance monitoring. It is terminated in the PSC.
The Intershelf Link (I–LINK) (10 Mb/s) is used in 1696MS_C system only allowing to connect the SPI
bus and the Card presence signals from the slave shelves to the ESC board, only provided in master shelf.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 162 / 390
390
External interfaces toward Craft Terminal, OS...
F interface : available from the EC function for connection to a local Craft Terminal; the electrical interface
and connector are provided by the ESC card.
The standard implementation of the physical layer for the F interface consists of an RS–232 UART port
accessible from the ESC card front panel.
QECC Interface: it is a TMN related communication interface based on the use of the Embedded Commu-
nication Channels available in the Optical Supervisory Channel (DCC). Through the QECC interface the
equipment can exchange management messages with a remote OS.
QAUX interface: it is provided as an additional TMN communication interface for message exchange be-
tween the NE and a Remote OS station based on the use of a 2 Mbit/s proprietary protocol.
Q3/TL1 interface: it is dedicated to an OS station connection. LAN_Q supports Q3 connection to a WAN
or LAN respectively. The physical interfaces are provided by the LAN_Q card.
RE / HK interface: this interface consists of parallel I/O signals used for remote alarms and for housekeep-
ing signals. The relevant electrical interfaces are placed on the HK card, and are controlled by the EC func-
tion through parallel I/O ports.
RA interface: it is dedicated to send commands toward the rack to light up the relevant lamps.
Flash backup and Smart Boot
The flash backup capability permits the management system to copy files back and forth using an ftp servi-
ce, between the flash card on the ESC in slot 1 and the ESC in slot 24 of the master shelf.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 163 / 390
390
Rack leds Remote/ OPERATION
Housekeeping SYSTEM
Alarms

RE/HK

RA Q3/TL1
EXTERNAL INTERFACES
RAI HK LAN_Q
Local
Craft Terminal SLAVE SHELF
FLASH
CARD
F
To all
EC IS–LINK SC SPI boards in
the shelf
To all SC ESC BOARD

SPI
QECC
boards
in the shelf
ESC BOARD
SPVM
MASTER SHELF UIC

EXTERNAL INTF
QAUX
REMOTE
OPERATION
SYSTEM
Figure 91. Controller sub–system

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 164 / 390
390
3.1.7.1 Example of control interfaces scheme
MASTER SHELF PDU/TRU

Power Supply A
ISPB (not used in current release)

PSC PSC Power Supply B
Local Craft
F INTERFACE
Terminal
O O E
Q3/TL1 (OPERATION SYSTEM)
M M S LAN
O 4 D D C LAN IS–LINK
O M
C M x X X HK HK/RE Remote / HK Alarms
S V EC
C C A / / RA Rack Leds
M A RAI
1 C N O O
C C E1/E2
0 Y A A S
QECC 2x2Mbps QAUX intf (REMOTE OS)
D D P U
SC F1
M M V I
C NU
M
SPI–A
SPI–B
SPV channel (optical)
EXPANSION SHELF Power Supply A

PSC PSC Power Supply B
O O
M M IS–LINK
LAN
O 4 D D
O M
C M x X X E
S V RA
C C A / / S RAI
M A
1 C N O O C
C C
0 Y A A
D D
M M
SPI–A
SPI–B
Figure 92. Example of control interfaces scheme in 1696MS

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 165 / 390
390
MASTER COMPACT SHELF PDU/TRU
Power Supply A
PSC/2 PSC/2 Power Supply B

Local Craft
F INTERFACE

Terminal
O O E
I Q3/TL1 (OPERATION SYSTEM)
M M S LAN
L D D C IS–LINK
O 4 LAN
I X X HK/RE Remote / HK Alarms
C M x HK
N / / EC
C C A RAI RA Rack Leds
K O O
1 C N
_ A A
0 Y QECC S Audio
M D D P
M M SC V
M
SPI–A
SPV channel (optical)
EXPANSION COMPACT SHELF Power Supply A

PSC2 PSC2 Power Supply B
I
L O 4
I C M x
N C C A
K 1 C N
_ 0 Y
S
SPI–A
Figure 93. Example of control interfaces scheme in 1696MS_C

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 166 / 390
390
3.1.8 Power supply sub–system
The powering architecture is distributed: two Power Supply Cards are in charge of feeding all the other
cards hosted in the shelf by selecting the highest voltage supplied by the two station batteries.
Power Supply Cards are fit in

– slot 25 and slot 48 in 1696MS
– slot 7 and 12 in 1696MS_C.
The main purposes are:
– Supply and distribute 48V filtered and protected voltage to all the boards housed in the shelf of the
1696MS/1696MS_C equipment
– Supply and distribute +3V service voltage dedicated to SPIDER circuitry in all the boards
– Supply and distribute +5V auxiliary voltage
– Make a bus termination
– Give alarms on fault battery and voltages loss.
The PSC boards work in ”1 + 1” protection; this means that (as concerning 48V) only one PSC may be
active at once. This circuit select the battery more charged and protect against reverse voltage applied.
Figure 94. on page 168 shows the equipment power supply scheme housed on the two PSC.
Input power stage

It provides adaptation to the customer central power bus by a main power block and supplies all the SPI-
DER FPGA by means of an on–board converter.
Main power block

It is used to select the input voltage of the system and to supply a surge protection.
It contains an EMI filter to permit the equipment to be reliable in presence of external EMI interferences
and to limit the internally generated EMI.
The voltages coming from the two station batteries, are applied to PSC A and to PSC B respectively by
means of the power connector located on the unit front panel ( ex. +BATT A –BATT A to PSC A and +BATT
B –BATT B to PSC B).
The +Batt can be connected to a mechanical ground through a strap setting.
Moreover each PSC receives from the back panel connector the –BATT voltage coming from the other
station battery (i.e. –BATT B to PSC A and –BATT A to PSC B).
Each PSC can therefore select which of the two station batteries provides the highest supply.
The selected voltages are ORed and sent to the equipment cards.
Protection Circuit
The protection circuit is present in the PSC and in all the boards where a DC/DC converter is required i.e.
input stage and distributed power stages. It is an interface between +BATT –BATT and the DC/DC converter.
It provides the following functions:
– it insulated the DC/DC converter in case of input short circuit. Fuses are fitted in order to prevent a
failed unit from shortening the input bus. In fact a input short circuit failure can cause severe fluctua-
tions on the input power of the other DC/DC converters
– it implements a start–up and an inrush current limiting system in order to provide controlled charge–
up for the input hold–up capacitor and therefore it prevents a current surge at the module input when
the board is plugged in
– it insulated the DC/DC converter in case of input voltage lower than 33 V.
On board power supply

A DC/DC converter generates a +3.3 V voltage used to power the SPIDER FPGA.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Distributed power stage

All the boards receive the +3.6 V and the 5.5 V voltage to power the FPGA device located on each card.
Moreover, some boards receive the +BATT –BATT voltages generated by the input stage of the PSC.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 167 / 390
390
Normal service range
The normal input voltage range of the power supply module is either:
– 40,5 V – 48 V – 57,0 V or
– 50,0 V – 60 V – 72,0 V.

Abnormal service range
The 1696MSPAN equipment operating at –48 V does not suffer any damage when subjected to the follow-
ing voltage range : 0 V to –40,5 V and –57 V to –60 V.
When the equipment operates at –60 V, the voltage range becomes: 0 V to –50 V and –72 V to –75 V.
Protection to the station power supply is provided by 16A circuit breakers at the top of the S9 rack.
The maximum power consumption of the main rack is about 400 Watts.
DC/DC Power supply units’ output voltages + 3.6 V 3%
– 5.5 V 3%
+ 2.5 V 3%
–Batt_A
GND
–Batt_B
+Batt_A
PSC A GND
+Batt +Batt_B
* protection * OR Batt PSC B
* pre–filter
* EMI/EMC –Batt
* fuse filter
+Batt
* OR Batt * protection
* EMI/EMC * pre–filter
–Batt
filter * fuse
3.6V * soft start

dual DC/DC * EMI/EMC
5.5V converter filter
* threshold
* soft start 3.6V
dual DC/DC
* EMI/EMC
filter converter 5.5V
* threshold
PRIMARY POWER STAGE
DISTRIBUTED POWER STAGE

GENERIC BOARD
* soft start 3.6V

5.5V
* EMI/EMC OBPS
filter 2.5V
* threshold
OR
OR auxilliary
power supply
SPIDER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
FPGA
Figure 94. 1696MSPAN – equipment power supply scheme
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 168 / 390
390
3.1.9 Protection sub–system
The protection type used is Optical SNCP (network protection).

In a ring network the Sub–Network Connection Protection (SNCP) at optical channel level can be provided
either in ”back–to–back” terminals or in OADM configuration.

The transponders (MCC/OCC10) are duplicated for each protected channel. At the transmit side, the sig-
nal is broadcasted on the two arms of the ring. At the receive side one of the two available signals is selec-
ted. When a failure occurs on the working path, the system switches on the signal of the protecting path.
Client end traffic
Receive side: Transmit side:

in case of a failure in one arm client signals are split
of the ring the system select and launched on the
the signal of the other one two arms of the ring
Back–to–back
terminal
Client Client
Add & drop OADM OADM Add & drop
traffic traffic
OADM
Client Add & drop traffic
Figure 95. Channel level protection in a ring network
The Optical SNCP (O–SNCP) is ensured for each client signal by 2 optical splitters, located between the
client interface and the transponder cards:
– At the transmit side, each client signal is split by a 50/50 optical splitter and sent to two transponder
cards. Then, one signal is broadcasted to one arm of the ring and the other signal is broadcasted to
the other arm.
– At the receive side, each WDM signal comes from one arm of the ring to one transponder card. At
the User Tx interface, one transponder card is in working mode (laser ON) and the other is in protect-
ing mode (laser OFF). When a fault is detected on the working path, the protection switching is per-
formed by turning off the working User Tx laser and by re–activating the protecting one.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 169 / 390
390
Client signals
Optical coupling Optical splitting
Working:

Protecting:
laser ON

laser OFF

User Tx User Rx User Tx User Rx
MCC/OCC10 MCC/OCC10
West East
WDM Rx WDM Tx WDM Rx WDM Tx
DMUX MUX
DWDM line DWDM line
(West) (East)
MUX DMUX
1696MSPAN
Figure 96. O–SNCP principle
In the following are shown the Optical SNCP types provided by the equipment. They are
– the MCC protection (alone and MCC + 4xANY), described on para. 3.1.9.1
– the OCC10 protection, described on para. 3.1.9.2.
– the 4xANY client signals protection, described on para. 3.1.9.3.
3.1.9.1 MCC protection
Table 14. MCC protection: switching criteria
Alarm Applicable to the following MCCs Default status

HWF All MCCs always enable
C_ABS All MCCs always enable
C_TYPE All MCCs always enable
ILOS_WDM All MCCs always enable
LOC_user / LOC_User_Tx MCC2, MCC3 always enable
When a MCC detects one of the above criteria, the transmitter is shut–down.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 170 / 390
390
3.1.9.1.1 MCC alone: MCC1, MCC2, MCC3
MCC West MCC East
Rx Rx
WDM Tx WDM Tx
8x8 8x8
Matrix Matrix
WDM Rx WDM Rx
Tx Tx
Figure 97. Optical SNCP with MCC units
The function is provided by two optical splitters. The selection is done by switching–off the user Tx corre-
sponding to the path in failure and re–activing the protecting one.
3.1.9.1.2 MCC + 4xANY
MCC MCC
WDM Rx WDM Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
Tx Rx Tx Rx
OPC
Tx Rx
4xANY
Rx Rx Rx Rx
Tx Tx Tx Tx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 98. Optical SNCP of the MCC associated with the 4xANY (MCC–4xANY)
The function is ensured by two optical splitters (one OPC card). The selection is done by switching–off the
MCC user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and re–activing the protecting one.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 171 / 390
390
3.1.9.2 OCC10 protection

OCC10 West OCC10 East
Rx Rx
WDM Tx WDM Tx
8x8 8x8
Matrix Matrix
WDM Rx WDM Rx
Tx Tx
Figure 99. Optical SNCP with OCC10 unit
The function is ensured by two optical splitters (one OPC card). The selection is done by switching–off the
user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and re–activing the protecting one.
Table 15. OCC10 protection: switching criteria
Alarm Managed Status

HWF X
C_ABS X
C_TYPE X
LOS_WDM_Rx (or LOC_OTN_WDM_Rx) X always enable
LOS_user_Tx X
LOF_OTN_WDM_Rx X
LOM_OTN_WDM_Rx X
When an OCC10 detects one of the above criteria then the transmitter is shut–down.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 172 / 390
390
3.1.9.3 Protection of the 4xANY client
Protection can be performed optically on the 4xANY units.

MCC MCC
WDM Rx WDM Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
Tx Rx Tx Rx
Tx Rx Tx Rx
4xANY LF Link 4xANY
Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx
Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx
OPC OPC OPC OPC
Figure 100. Optical SNCP of the MCC associated with the 4xANY (4xANY client protection)
The function is ensured by eight optical splitters (provided by four OPCs). The selection is done by switch-
ing–off the 4xANY user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and re–activing the protecting one.
The clients are individually protected: if one is protected, it is not necessary to protect the other ones.
In 1696MS, when two 4xANY are used in client protection configuration, the 4xANY on the right side al-
ways contains the MAIN/protected drawers, and the 4xANY on the left side, the SPARE/protecting draw-
ers.
In 1696MS_C, when two 4xANY are used in client protection configuration, the 4xANY above (slots 4 and
5) always contains the MAIN/protected drawers, and the 4xANY below (slots 2 and 3), the SPARE/protect-
ing drawers.
The slot allocation of the OPC according to the drawers in protection of the 4xANY clients is fixed as de-
scribed in Figure 101.
N.B. In some configuration, the OPC slot cannot be provided by an OPC board because this is already
allocated by other boards. This concerns LAN, HK and RAI boards. This can limit the number of
protected clients.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 173 / 390
390
DRAWER #3
DRAWER #3
DRAWER #2
DRAWER #2

DRAWER #4
DRAWER #4
DRAWER #1
DRAWER #1
OPC #2
OPC #1
OPC #3
OPC #4
Figure 101. Correspondance between OPC slots allocation and 4xANY drawers in protection
OPC location for drawers protection

– drawer 1: 31, 35, 39, 43
– drawer 2: 30, 34, 38, 42
– drawer 3: 28, 32, 40, 44
– drawer 4: 29, 33, 41, 45.
The 4xANY boards in slot 2–3 and 22–23 cannot be protected.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
ESC
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L O O O O O O O O H R O O O O O O O O U U P
S A P P P P P P P P K A P P P P P P P P I I S
C N C C C C C C C C I C C C C C C C C C
49
FANS
Table 16. 4xANY client protection: switching criteria per each drawer
Alarm Managed Status
HWF X
Link_Failure_DRW_U X
C_ABS X
C_ABS_DRW_U X always enable
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
C_TYPE_DRW_U X
SSF_U X
Pk_AIS_U X
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 174 / 390
390
3.1.10 Performance Monitoring sub–system
The 1696MSPAN is able to monitor the performance of the optical signal transmission. It is an SDH type
Performance Monitoring, based on B1 counter and performed at the RX accesses (for SDH or SONET
frames at system inputs only).

This function is available for MCC, OCC10 and 4xANY boards (on the received aggregate signal
only, as regards 4xANY).
These boards monitor the B1 byte.
The performance monitoring is available:
– at the User Rx access in order to monitor the client incoming signal,
– at the WDM Rx access in order to monitor the client incoming signal and its transmission through the
WDM network.
It is possible to manage up to 32 PM per NE.
PM at WDM Rx side
PM on client signal
User WDM WDM User

RX TX RX TX
ADM 1696MSPAN WDM 1696MSPAN ADM

User WDM WDM User
TX RX TX RX
Figure 102. Two possible monitored sections by the MCC
What does the system monitor?
Performance monitoring are SDH type. The system monitors:
– performance primitive
• 1 CV (Count of Violations). 8 errors by SDH or SONET frame can be detected
• Defect Seconds (DS): second during which one of the LOS (Loss Of Signal), LOF (Loss Of
Frame (SDH) or LOC (Loss Of Clock) events occurred.
N.B. In SDH ADM devices, the number of EB (Erroneous Blocks) is accumulated, what is no more
true here (we perform the count of B1 violations: CV). But we make the approximation that CV
= EB for low BER.
– performance events
• ES (Erroneous Second): second containing one or more erroneous bits
• SES (Severely Erroneous Second): second containing at least 30% of erroneous blocks or at
least one defect (LOS, LOF or LOC)
• BBE (Background Blocks Errors): number of B1 erroneous bits outside an SES.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 175 / 390
390
How does the system store the performance data?
Two counters are provided to store the Performance Monitoring data:

– 15 minutes counter:

The current measurement and measurements of the 4 previous hours (15–minute periods) are

stored in the NE data base. Measurements of several days are stored in SH base.
– 24 hours counter:
The current measurement and the one of the day before are stored in the NE data base. Measure-
ments on several months are stored in SH base.
For both periods, 15 minutes and 24 hours, an adjustable threshold alarm (TCA) on each ES, SES and
BBE is provided to the operator. A TCA alarm (QoS alarm) is raised when one of these thresholds is
reached (all the counter values are available).
Individual PM threshold management. It is provided the ability
– to set the threshold level on a per entity basis for 15 min or 24 hours on the user side or WDM side
of each transponder and on the STM–16 signal of each 4xANY board
– to define user default threshold level on per type of board basis for 15 min or 24 hours.
Table 17. Default thresholds for QoS alarms
SET/RESET thresholds
QoS_24 BBE ES SES Implicite RESET after 24 hours
alarm
36000 150 15
SET thresholds RESET thresholds
QoS_15 BBE ES SES BBE ES SES
alarm
24000 50 10 200 5 0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 176 / 390
390
3.2 System Configuration
3.2.1 Configuration criteria

The basic configuration of the relies on the following criteria:
– the traffic demand defines the number of channels (1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 16, 24 or 32 channels)
– the network architecture and the position of the equipment in the network defines the NE type (line
terminal, OADM, back–to–back terminal, repeater or CPE).
– the optical power budget determines the need of optical amplification in the line terminal and OADM
NEs or the need of repeater NEs.
Once the basic configuration is defined, secondary criteria will be determinant to define the optional featu-
res:
– TDM concentrator (4ANY)

Up to 4 client signals may be multiplexed on a single STM16. The concentration of 4 client signals
on a unique transponder access, requires a 4ANY board but saves 3 MCC board and the corre-
sponding optical channels.
– Optical Sub–Network Connection Protection (O–SNCP)

In ring networks, both channels and each client signals can be individually protected:
– the protection of a channel/wavelenght requires an OPC board and two transponders (MCC/OCC10)
– the protection of the client signal(s) requires up to four OPCs, two 4xANY and two MCC boards.
– Supervision function and User interface

The supervision feature requires an SPVM (SPVM2; SPVM_H) board. The 2 Mbit/s user interface
feature requires in addition an UIC board. These two features also require the OSC insertion MUX
and the OSC extraction DMUX implemented in all OADM boards, the OMDX8100_M_L1_XS and
in the OAC boards. If the use of one of these features is foreseen, not at the beginning but in the fu-
ture, the early choice of a board with the OSC MUX and DMUX will allow a further implementation,
without interruption of the traffic.
– Expansion MUX/DEMUX
The 2:1 expansion MUX and DEMUX (OMDX8100_M_L1_X and OMDX8100_M_L1_XS boards)
are necessary to reach NE configurations with more than 16 optical channels. An NE can be up-
graded up to a 32 channel NE without traffic interruption if the expansion MUX and DMUX are already
installed.
– Remote NE
The type of Remote NE is defined when few channels are needed for the user to reach from a ring
a distant NE or to create a point to point link with CPE using.
N.B. Boards are generally 1696MS shelf and 1696MS_C shelf compatible except boards explicitly
denominated as ”strictly for 1696MS” or ”strictly for Compact shelf”.
When a CPE is used in office version, the customer must provide an appropriate ground.
CPE metallic housing should be connected to the ground,

0 V_DC of the External power feeding must be also connected to this ground.
Consequently the ground connection of the positive Battery 48 Vdc should be directly con-
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
nected on the ground (PSC side) of the power cable.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 177 / 390
390
Let consider the example of Figure 103.
4 added and dropped
client signals

8 client Line 4 pass–through Line 8 client
signals channels signals
Terminal Terminal
OADM
Figure 103. Example of starting configuration
One 8 channel MUX/DMUX card is sufficient to build this configuration. The Table 18. gives three possibili-
ties and their characteristics.
Table 18. Configuration criteria
MUX/DMUX board Cost Power Upgradability Supervision

budget channel
OMDX8100_M_L2 or minimum maximum 12 or 16 channels without No

OMDX8100_M_S2 or traffic interruption.
OMDX8100_M_S1 24 or 32 channels with traffic
interruption.
OADM8100_M_##_S intermediate intermediate 12 or 16 channels without Yes

traffic interruption.
24 or 32 channels with traffic
interruption.
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS maximum minimum Up to 32 channels without Yes

traffic interruption.
N.B. In the OMDX and OADM board name, the characters of the fourth part if any, have the following
meaning:
S: board with supervision channel extract and insert functions.
X: board with expansion MUX.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 178 / 390
390
3.2.2 1696MS (main shelf) configurations examples
3.2.2.1 Typical configurations

– Terminals
• 1 channel terminal
• 2 channels terminal
• 4 channels terminal with two 4ANY boards
• 8 channels terminal with supervision and user interface
• 16 channels terminal with expansion and supervision
• 24 channels terminal with expansion and supervision
• 32 channels terminal with two stages amplification
It is also possible to use 12 and 24 channels terminal.
– Back–to–back terminals / OADM

• 1 channel OADM
• 2 channels OADM
• 4 channels OADM
• 8 channels OADM
• 8 channels west and 4 channels east b–t–b terminal / OADM
• 12 channels b–t–b terminal / OADM
• 32 channels b–t–b terminal
– Repeaters:
• Without supervision
• With supervision.
Some of these configurations are described hereafter.
Examples of configurations with MVAC is also provided.
In protected configuration, the OPCs have to be plugged under the MAIN transponder (see the
examples shown in the following figures).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 179 / 390
390
3.2.2.2 Line Terminals (one sided multiplexer / demultiplexer)
3.2.2.2.1 4 channels terminal

4 channels terminal can be designed with 4 channels OADM board. In this case the ”pass–through” link

is not connected (Mux/Demux extra–input).
the 4xANY board can be used only with MCCs. The 4–channels terminal configuration can be applied also
to OCC10, but with the 9.953Gbps (STM–64/OC–192/10GBE WAN) client signal.
OADM4100_M_chx–y_S
user MCC
interfaces or
OCC10 1
M 4 channels
Transponder
U
Transponder
X
Transponder
Client 4 x ANY 4
OSC in
Signals
MCC 1 D
4 x ANY M 4 channels
U
X
4 OSC out
2Mbps
order wire
UIC SPVM
Figure 104. 4 channels OADM board used as a terminal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
See note
SPV managenement (opt)
*
Equipment Shelf Controller
Transponder ch. 4
Transponder ch. 3
Transponder ch. 1
OADM 4 channels
Transponder ch. 2
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L H R U U P
S A K A I I S
C N I C C C
49
FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 105. 4 channels terminal configuration
* The ESC board is designed in order to support, in the same board, both Equipment and Shelf Controller
facilities. The ESC unit has two microprocessors, one dedicated for each task.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 180 / 390
390
3.2.2.2.2 8 channels terminal with expansion, supervision and user interface
Whatever the implementation, all the boards can be placed in a single shelf.
Only L1 band is supported, provided by the OMDX8100_M_L1_XS board.

When OMDX boards are used to design 8 channels terminals, only one set of channels (L1) can be pro-
vided with SPV. If an upgrading up to 32 channels is required, OMDX8 board can perform it.
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
1 (30)
M 8 channels
8x U
8 client X
MCC / OSC in
signals 8 (38)
OCC10
1 (30)
D
M 8 channels
U
X
8 (38) OSC out
2Mbps
order wire
UIC SPVM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
Transponder ch 30
Transponder ch 31
Transponder ch 32
Transponder ch 33
Transponder ch 35
Transponder ch 36
Transponder ch 37
Transponder ch 38
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L H R U U P
S A K A I I S
C N I C C C
49
FANS
Figure 106. Example of 8 channels line terminal with expansion and supervision
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 181 / 390
390
3.2.2.2.3 8 channels terminal with supervision and user interface and without expansion

Four set of channels are supported : L1, L2, S1, S2.

By using OADM boards in terminals, SPV is available for each set of channels. However, if an upgrading
up to 32 channels is required, using OADM8 boards is not sufficient (need for expansion).
1
M 8 channels
8x U
8 client X
MCC / OSC in
signals 8
OCC10
1
D
M 8 channels
U
X
8 OSC out
2Mbps
order wire
UIC SPVM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 SPV managenement (opt)

OADM8100_M_xx_S
Transponder ch 8
Transponder ch 7
Transponder ch 6
Transponder ch 5
Transponder ch 4
Transponder ch 3
Transponder ch 2
Transponder ch 1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L H R U U P
S A K A I I S
C N I C C C
49
FANS
Figure 107. Example of 8 channels line terminal with supervision (no expansion)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 182 / 390
390
3.2.2.2.4 16 channels terminal with expansion and supervision
In order to upgrade a 8 channel terminal to a 16 channel one, or to design 16 channel terminals with SPV,
one 8 channel OADM and one 8 channel OMDX boards can be used.
OMDX8100_M_L2
20
8x M
8 client U
MCC/ X
signals 28
OCC10
20
D
M
U OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
X
28
UNIT 2 30 OSC in
M LB
U
X
38 SB
16 channels
8x unused
8 client
MCC/ 30 D
signals M LB
OCC10 U
X SB
38 16 channels
unused
OSC out
UNIT 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
OMDX8100_M_L2
Transponder ch 28
Transponder ch 38
Transponder ch 27
Transponder ch 37
Transponder ch 26
Transponder ch 36
Transponder ch 25
Transponder ch 35
Transponder ch 23
Transponder ch 33
Transponder ch 22
Transponder ch 32
Transponder ch 21
Transponder ch 31
Transponder ch 20
Transponder ch 30
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L H U U P
S A K I I S
C N C C C
49
FANS
Figure 108. Example of a 16 channels terminal with expansion and SPV upgradability
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 183 / 390
390
3.2.2.2.5 32 channels terminal + supervision with two stages amplification
2 shelves are needed for this configuration.

OMDX8100_M_L2

20
M
8 client 8 U
signals MCC / X
28
OCC10
20
D
M
U OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
X OAC OAC
28
UNIT 3 30 OSC in
EXP
M LB
U M
8 client 8 X U OFA OFA
38 SB X
signals MCC /
OCC10 32 channels
LB D
30 D M OFA OFA
M SB U
U X
X
38
OSC out
42 UNIT 1
M
8 client 8 U
50 X
signals MCC /
OCC10
42
D
M
UNIT 4 50 U
X
52
OMDX8100_M_S2
M
8 client 8 U
X
signals MCC / 60 UNIT 2
OCC10
52
D
M
U
X
60
OMDX8100_M_S1
Figure 109. Example of a 32 channels terminal + SPV + two stages OAC

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 184 / 390
390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
1
1
S
P
C
25
S
P
C
Equipment Shelf Controller (SC) Equipment Shelf Controller
2
L
2
A
N
26
L
3
A
N
3
L
A
N
49
49
OMDX8100_M_S2 OMDX8100_M_L2
4
4
Transponder ch 50 Transponder ch 28
5
5
6
6
7 8
7 8
OAC
K AI
I
H R
A
R
OAC
FANS
FANS
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
OMDX8100_M_S1 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
I I
C C
U U
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Figure 110. 32 channels terminal + SPV + 2 stages OAC configuration

S
P
C
S
P
C
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
185 / 390
3.2.2.3 OADM and Back–to–Back Terminals
In the following configurations we can plug MVAC boards in slots 4 to 11 and/or 14 to 21. Each
MVAC is used to replace a transponder in the case of a channel loop or to adjust pass–through

port losses.

3.2.2.3.1 4 channels OADM
4 client signals 4 client signals

OADM4100_M_chy–z_S OADM4100_M_chy–z_S
OSC out OSC in

D M
M U
U X
X
4x 4x
MCC / MCC /
OCC10 OCC10
M D
M
U U
X X
OSC in OSC out
WEST 2.66 Gb/s back–panel EAST

electrical links (MCC only)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 1W
Transponder ch 4W
Transponder ch 4E
Transponder ch 3E
Transponder ch 2E
Transponder ch 1E
OADM 4 ch. East

OADM 4 ch. West
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L O O O O H P
S A P P P P K S
C N C C C C C
49
FANS
Figure 111. 4 channels back–to–back terminal / OADM

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Every combination of east and west sets of channels are possible.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 186 / 390
390
3.2.2.3.2 8 channels OADM
The 8–channels configuration can be proposed with or without the expansion and the supervision capabili-
ties.
With optical protection of each channel (neither SPV nor EXP)
8 add & drop protected

client signals
OMDX8100_M_x OPCs OMDX8100_M_y

Mx/DMx 8 ch.
(n–8) channels
n channels D M n channels
M U
U X
X
8x 8x
MCC / MCC /
OCC10 OCC10
n channels D
M M n channels
U U
X X
(n–8) channels
WEST EAST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OMDX8100_M_x West
OMDX8100_M_y East
Transponder ch 8W
Transponder ch 7W
Transponder ch 6W
Transponder ch 5W
Transponder ch 4W
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 1W
Transponder ch 8E
Transponder ch 7E
Transponder ch 6E
Transponder ch 5E
Transponder ch 4E
Transponder ch 3E
Transponder ch 2E
Transponder ch 1E
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L O O O O O O O O P
P P P P H P P
S A K P P S
C N C C C C C C C C C
49
FANS
In protected configuration, the OPCs have to be plugged under the MAIN transponder.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 112. 8 OADM protected channels
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 187 / 390
390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
OSC out
OSC in
25
S
P
C
SB
L
2
A
N
LB
SB
49
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
P
C
O
Transponder ch 38
WEST
X
U
D
M
X
U
5
M
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
Transponder ch 38
P
C
O
Transponder ch 37
Transponder ch 37
P
7 8
C
O
Transponder ch 36
Transponder ch 36
P
C
O
8x
Transponder ch 35
MCC /
Only symmetrical configuration can be provided.
OCC10
client signals
8 add&drop
Transponder ch 35
K
H
FANS
With expansion and supervision upgrade capabilities
P
C
O
Transponder ch 33
8x
MCC /
OCC10
Transponder ch 33
P
C
O
Transponder ch 32
client signals
8 add&drop
Transponder ch 32
P
C
O
Transponder ch 31
Transponder ch 31
X
X
U
D
U
M
M
P
C
O
Transponder ch 30
390
Transponder ch 30
3AL 95278 AA AA
EAST
Figure 113. 8 channels OADM with EXP and SPV capabilities

OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
LB
SB
SPV managenement
SB
S
P
C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
OSC in
OSC out
188 / 390
With supervision and without expansion upgrade capabilities
Four set of channels are supported : L1, L2, S1, S2.

xx stands for the band used: L1, L2, S1, S2.

OADM8100_M_xx_S 8 add&drop 8 add&drop OADM8100_M_xx_S

client signals client signals
OSC out
OSC in
D M
M U
U X
X
8x 8x
MCC / MCC /
OCC10 OCC10
D
M M
U U
X X
OSC in OSC out
WEST EAST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OADM8100_M_xx_S West
OADM8100_M_xx_S East
SPV managenement
Transponder ch 8W
Transponder ch 7W
Transponder ch 6W
Transponder ch 5W
Transponder ch 4W
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 1W
Transponder ch 8E
Transponder ch 7E
Transponder ch 6E
Transponder ch 5E
Transponder ch 4E
Transponder ch 3E
Transponder ch 2E
Transponder ch 1E
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L O O O O R O O O O U U P
H A I I
S A P P P P K I P P P P S
C N C C C C C C C C C C C
49
FANS
Figure 114. 8 channels OADM with supervision upgrade capability

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 189 / 390
390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
WEST
01
8 channels
8 channels
25
S
P
C
L
2
A
N
OSC in
OSC out
49
OADM8100_M_xx_S West
4
Transponder ch 8W
5
6
Transponder ch 7W
OADM8100_M_x_S
8
1
1
8
8 client signals
7 8
Transponder ch 6W
8x
MCC /
OCC10
Transponder ch 5W
3.2.2.3.3 8 channels west and 4 channels east
K
H
4x
MCC /
FANS
OCC10
P
C
O
Transponder ch 4W
1
4
Transponder ch 4E
1
P
C
O
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 3E
P
C
O
Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 2E
Figure 115. 8 West / 4 East channels OADM

4 client signals
P
C
O
Transponder ch 1W
390
OSC in
OSC out
Transponder ch 1E
3AL 95278 AA AA
OADM4100_M_chy–z_S East
OADM4100_M_chy–z_S
SPV managenement
S
P
C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
EAST
4 channels
4 channels
190 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
1
1
S
P
C
25
S
P
C
2
L
2
A
N
26
L
3
A
N
3
49
49
27
OMDX8100_M_xx West OADM 4 channels West
A P
4
N C
P
L O
C
4
O
Transponder ch 8W Transponder ch 4W
5
5
Transponder ch 8E Transponder ch 4E
P
6
C
P
6
O
C
O
P
C
P
O
C
O
7 8
7 8
xx stands for the band used: L2, S1, S2.
P
C
P
O
C
O
K AI
H R
FANS
FANS
A P
I C
R O
Transponder ch 4W
Transponder ch 4E
P
C
O
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 3E
P
C
O
Transponder ch 2W
For the OMDX boards, three set of channels are supported : L2, S1, S2.
Transponder ch 2E
3.2.2.3.4 12 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion
P
C
O
Transponder ch 1W
390
Transponder ch 1E
3AL 95278 AA AA
OMDX8100_M_xx East OADM 4 channels East
I I
C C
U U
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Figure 116. 12 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion

S
P
C
S
P
C
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
191 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
1
1
S
P
C
25
S
P
C
2
L
2
A
N
26
L
3
A
N
3
49
49
27
OMDX8100_M_yy_West OADM8100_M_xx_S West
A P
N C
4
L O
P
C
O
yy has to be different from xx.
5
5
P
6
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
7 8
P
7 8
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
xx and yy stands for the band used: L2, S1, S2.
Three set of channels are supported : L2, S1, S2.
H R
FANS
FANS
A P
I C
R O
K AI P
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
3.2.2.3.5 16 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion
P
C
O
P
C
O
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
C
OMDX8100_M_yy_East OADM8100_M_xx_S East

I I
C
U U
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Figure 117. 16 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion

S
P
C
S
P
C
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
192 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
1
1
S
P
C
25
S
P
C
2
L
2
A
N
26
L
3
A
N
3
49
49
27
OMDX8100_M_xx–East OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
A P
N C
4
L O
P
C
yy can be different from xx.
O
Transponder ch 8W Transponder ch 38
5
5
Transponder ch 8E Transponder ch 38
P
6
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
7 8
P
7 8
C
O
yy stands for the band used: L2, S1, S2.
xx stands for the band used: L2, S1, S2.
P
C
O
P
C
O
H R
FANS
FANS
A P
I C
R O
K AI P
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
3.2.2.3.6 16 channels OADM with supervision and expansion
P
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
C
OMDX8100_M_yy_East OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
Figure 118. 16 channels OADM with supervision and expansion

I I
C
U U
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
S
P
C
S
P
C
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
48
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
193 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ESC (SC) Equipment Shelf Controller
ED
49
49
OMDX8100_M_L2 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
S A A P
S A A P
C N N C
C N N C
P L L O
P L L O
side.
P
P
C
C
O
O
01
P
P
C
C
O
O
P
P
C
C
O
O
OAC
H R
FANS
FANS
OAC
A P
P
I C
K AI C
R O
O
P
C
O
P
C
O
P
P
C
C
O
O
P
P
C
C
O
O
4 shelves are needed for this configuration.
OMDX8100_M_L2 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
I I S
U U P
I I S
U U P
C C C
C C C
25 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 3435 36 3738 39 40 414243 44 4546 47 48

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314 15 16 171819 20 2122 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 3435 36 3738 39 40 414243 44 4546 47 48
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314 15 16 171819 20 2122 23 24
ESC (SC) ESC (SC)

3.2.2.3.7 32 channels OADM/back–to–back terminals
OMDX8100_M_S1 OMDX8100_M_S2
49
49
S A A P
S A A P
C N N C
C N N C
P L L O
P L L O
P
P
C
C
O
O
P
P
C
C
O
O
P
P
C
C
O
O
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
FANS
FANS
A P
A P
I C
I C
R O
R O
In protected configuration, the OPCs have to be plugged under the MAIN transponder
P
P
C
C
O
O
P
P
C
C
O
O
Figure 119. 32 protected channels back–to–back with supervision and one OAC per side
P
P
C
C
O
O
supervision and amplification. In this configuration is there one OAC on west side and one OAC on east
Herebelow is shown a 32 channels back–to–back configuration with the optical protection of each channel,
OMDX8100_M_S1 OMDX8100_M_S2
194 / 390
I I S
U U P
I I S
U U P
C C C
C C C
25 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 3435 36 3738 39 40 414243 44 4546 47 48

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 16 171819 20 2122 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 3435 36 3738 39 40 414243 44 4546 47 48
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 16 171819 20 2122 23 24

3.2.2.4 Repeater with supervision
OAC1 OAC2
OSC OSC
VOA Attenuator
Preamp or DCU Booster
DWDM DWDM
OSC OSC
Line extraction Line
insertion
Attenuator
Booster or DCU Preamp VOA
OSC SPVM OSC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

OAC
OAC
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
P L H R P
S A K AI S
C N C
49
FANS
Figure 120. Repeater with supervision

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 195 / 390
390
3.2.2.5 Configurations with MVAC
MVAC boards can be used for three main applications:

– channel loop power adjustement

– band pass–through power adjustement
• extra–loop
• expansion–loop
– power adjustment of external colored wavelengths.
MVAC card can also be used for post emphsys of MCC2, MCC3.
The default configuration depends on the configuration.
Please refer to the installation handboook for card location in the shelf, according to the application.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 196 / 390
390
3.2.2.6 4 x ANY node configuration
Without drawers protection

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
ESC
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L L H R U U P
S A A K AI I I S
C N N C
49
FANS
Figure 121. 4 x ANY node without drawers protection configuration
With drawers protection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
ESC
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L O O O O O O O O H R O O O O O O O O U U P
S A P P P P P P P P K A P P P P P P P P I I S
C N C C C C C C C C I C C C C C C C C C
49
FANS
Figure 122. 4 x ANY node with drawers protection configuration
OPC location for drawers protection

– drawer 1: 31, 35, 39, 43
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– drawer 2: 30, 34, 38, 42

– drawer 3: 28, 32, 40, 44
– drawer 4: 29, 33, 41, 45.
4xANY boards can be partially protected (drawers 3 & 4 for the 1st couple, drawers 1 & 2 for the 2nd couple).
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 197 / 390
390
3.2.3 1696 MS_C (Compact Shelf) configurations examples
The 1696MS_C must be able to set many different configurations

– Terminals

• up to 12 unprotected channels Line terminal (with/without supervision)
• up to 8 channels Line terminal with OAC (with/without supervision)
– Back–to–back terminals or OADM with/without protection

• up to 4 channels back–to–back terminal or OADM
• asymmetrical configurations are allowed (i.e. 2 channels west and 1 channel east)
– CPE (Customer Premises Equipment) configurations
These configurations are preferably exploited with a 1696MS_C but they can be implemented
in a 1696MS, too.
• Remote 4xAny (unprotected)

• Remote 4xAny + Protection MCC on 1310 nm or 1550 nm
• Remote MCC or MCC+4xANY
• OADM 1 channel with or without protection
• Remote 4xANY + MCC
• One protected transponder (one signal on 2 channels)
• Back–to–back 4xANY
• SPV manager (used to connect a SH Manager to supervise the ring).
• 2–channel terminal: MCC + 4xANY with drawers protection
– 1696MS or 1696MS_C configured to connect a CPE or a 1696MS_C in a small ring

• 1696MS or1696MS_C receiving/emitting a supervised black–and–white signal
• 1696MS or 1696MS_C receiving/emitting a supervised colored signal
• 1696MS or 1696MS connected to a 1696MS_C located in a small ring
• 1696MS as a remotization
– Two 1696MS or 1696MS_C rings connected together

• With supervision through optical link (DCC)
• With supervision through electrical link (LAN_Q)
Some of these configurations are described hereafter.
N.B. All configurations using a 4 x ANY board are also available with the 4 x ANY_S and 4 x ANY_P.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 198 / 390
390
3.2.3.1 Examples of Line Terminal configurations
3.2.3.1.1 8–channel terminal with SPV and OAC

OMDX8100_M_L1_XS OAC OAC

UNUSED L2
30 OSC in
EXP
M LB
U M
X U OFA OFA
38 SB X
8 client 8
UNUSED 8 channels
signals MCC / UNUSED L2 LB D
30 D M OFA OFA
OCC10 M SB U
U X
X UNUSED
38
OSC out
6 PSC2 12
5 Transponder ch 8 11
F A N _C
13 1 I–Link_S PSC2 7
6 PSC2 12
F A N _C
6 I–Link_M PSC(2) 12
5 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS HK 11
F A N _C
4 SPVM RAI 10
3 OAC / OAC_L (optional) 9
2 OAC / OAC_L (optional) LAN_Q 8
13 1 ESC PSC(2) 7
Figure 123. 8–channel terminal with SPV and OAC

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 199 / 390
390
3.2.3.1.2 12 unprotected channels terminal without SPV
OADM4100_M_chx–y_S

1

M
U
X
4 4
4 client MCC /
signals OCC10 1
D
M
U OADM8100_L1_X OAC OAC
X
4
30 OSC in
EXP
M LB
U M
X U OFA OFA
8 38 SB X
8 client UNUSED 12 channels
signals MCC / LB D
OCC10 30 D M OFA OFA
M U
SB X
U
X UNUSED
38
OSC out
6 OADM4100_M_chx–y_S PSC2 12
F A N _C
6 OADM8100_L1_X PSC2 12
F A N _C
5 Transponder ch 33 HK 11
F A N _C
4 Transponder ch 32 RAI 10
2 Transponder ch 30 LAN_Q 8
13 1 ESC PSC(2) 7
Figure 124. 12–channel terminal without SPV

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 200 / 390
390
3.2.3.2 OADM 4 channels protected back–to–back with supervision and OAC
4 add & drop protected client signals

OPC OPC OPC OPC
OAC OADM4100_M_chx–y_S OADM4100_M_chx–y_S OAC

OSC out Mx/DMx 4ch Mx/DMx 4ch OSC in
n–4 ch
D M
OFA M U OFA
U X
X
4x 4x
n channels MCC / MCC / n channels
OCC10 OCC10
D
M M
OFA U U OFA
X X
OSC in
n–4 channels OSC out
WEST EAST
6 PSC2 12
5 Transponder ch 4 W 11
F A N _C
4 Transponder ch 4 E OPC 10
6 OADM4100_M_chx–y_S PSC2 12
F A N _C
5 OADM4100_M_chx–y_S HK 11
F A N _C
4 SPVM RAI 10
3 OAC / OAC_L (opt) 9
2 OAC / OAC_L (opt) LAN_Q 8
13 1 ESC PSC(2) 7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 125. OADM 4 channels protected back–to–back with supervision and OAC
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 201 / 390
390
3.2.3.3 CPE (Customer Premises Equipment) configurations
3.2.3.3.1 Remote 4xANY

In this case, OADM is not needed since the data signal is carried by a ”Black & white” 1310 nm wavelength.

The OSC is extracted to/from the 1310 nm data signal on a special 1310/1510 filter SPV_F_C card. OSC
is managed by the SPVM board.
1550 nm
MCC MCC
1310 nm
SPVF SPVM
1696MS SPVM
UI
SPVF
SPVM 1310 nm 1310 nm

OSC
4xANY to/from 1510 nm
4xANY
1696MSPAN SPVM
1696MS_C
1310 nm
UI
SPV_F_C
1310
CPE UI
SPVM PSC
HK
4xANY
F A N _C
RAI
SPV_F_C
LAN_Q
Equipment Shelf Controller PSC
Figure 126. Remote 4xANY
N.B. All configurations using a 4 x ANY board are also available with the 4 x ANY_S and 4 x ANY_P.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 202 / 390
390
3.2.3.3.2 Remote MCC or MCC+4xANY wihtout protection
The situation is the same with or without the 4xANY board : the signal transmitted from the CPE to the
1696MS in a core ring or in a point–to–point configuration is colored and carries a 1510 nm OSC.
The Remote MCC is connected to the Metro ring via one MCC or directly from the WDM path. This configu-
ration allows a greater Span Budget.
1550 nm
MCC MCC
1310 nm
SPVF SPVM
1696MS SPVM
SPVF
SPVM 1550 nm
UI
MCC
1696MS_C 1310 nm OSC
4xANY 1510 nm
4xANY
MCC
Colored signal SPVM
UI
SPV_F–C
1550 UI
CPE
SPVM PSC
HK
4xANY
F A N _C
RAI
SPV_F_C
MCC LAN_Q
Figure 127. Remote MCC or MCC+4xANY

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 203 / 390
390
3.2.3.3.3 Remote 4xANY plus MCC
In this configuration, the CPE supports 2 data channels, one from the 4xANY board (B&W), and one from
the MCC (colored). The SPV_F_1310_1550 enables to insert/extract them with an OSC. Thus the fiber

carries 3 wavelengths : 1510 (OSC), 15xx (MCC) and 1310 (4xANY).

MCC+4xANY
MCC
SPV_F
SPVM
1310_1550
UI
1550 nm + 1310 nm + OSC CPE
4xANY
SPV_F
1310+1550
OSC
SPVM 1310 nm 1550 nm
4xANY MCC
1696MS_C UI
UI UI
SPVM PSC
SPV_F_1310_1550 HK
F A N _C
MCC RAI
4xANY LAN_Q
Figure 128. Unprotected remote MCC or MCC+4xANY

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 204 / 390
390
3.2.3.3.4 One protected transponder
In this configuration OPC card is used to protect transponder cards. The same signal is launched into the
fiber on two different wavelengths. This configuration is used in a point–to–point link.
One protected transponder on the same fiber (2 wavelengths) with OADM 2–channel
MCC/OCC10
User
OPC interface
To/from CPE
SPVM
Not from 1696 ring
MCC/OCC10
OPC
User
interface
CPE
SPVM
1696MS_C
OADM1
MCC/OCC10 MCC/OCC10
OPC
User
PSC
OADM1100_M_xx_S HK
F A N _C
SPVM RAI
MCC /OCC10 spare OPC
MCC/OCC10 main LAN_Q
SPVM must be set in slot 4 of the master shelf when it is linked to OADM board
Figure 129. One protected transponderon the same fiber (2 channel wavelengths)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
In this case an OADM is needed to multiplex the main signal and the spare in one fiber if only one fiber
is used. When two fibers are available, the main and spare signals do not need to be launched in the same
fiber, and they also do not need to have different wavelengths.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 205 / 390
390
3.2.3.3.5 Back–to–back 4xANY
This configuration is designed to drop/(insert) some of the 4 services carried by the 4XANY functionality.
The others are by–passed to a second 4XANY board to be launched to their destination. In the following

figure, 2 services are dropped (inserted) and 2 are passed–through.

N.B. Less than 4 services can be carried.
4xANY 4xANY
UI
SPV_F_C
4xANY
4xANY
SPVM
SPVM
SPV_F_C
UI
CPE
SPVM PSC
HK
4xANY
F A N _C
SPV_F_C
SPV_F_C
4xANY
LAN_Q
Figure 130. Back–to–back 4XANY intended to drop some of the carried services and by–pass the oth-
ers.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 206 / 390
390
3.2.3.3.6 Remote unprotected MCC
1550 nm 1696MS Transp

Transp
Transp
OADM
Transp 4 ch East
OADM SPVF
4 ch West
SPVM
SPVM
1550 nm + OSC
SPVF
OSC
SPVM
Transponder
ch.2E
1696MS_C
SPVM PSC
HK
F A N _C
RAI
SPV_F_C
Transponder ch 2E LAN_Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Transponder ch 4W
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 1W
OADM 4 ch. East

Transponder ch 4E
Transponder ch 3E
Transponder ch 1E
OADM 4 ch. West
SPVM
SPVM
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L R S P
H A P U U S
S A K I V I I
C N C
49
FANS 45:
SPV Filter
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 131. Remote unprotected MCC
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 207 / 390
390
3.2.3.3.7 1 protected channel OADM
1696MS_C

SPVM
1550 nm OADM1
OADM1
Transponder Transponder
1310 nm
OPC
User
OADM1ch+OSC W PSC
OADM1ch+OSC E RAI
F A N _C
SPVM HK
Transponder W OPC
Transponder E LAN_Q
ESC PSC
Figure 132. OADM 1 channel protected
3.2.3.3.8 Remote 4xANY+ Protected MCC
The remote 4xANY + protected MCC is the combination with the 2 MCC protected at each other with an
OPC on different NE, and use of the 4xANY on the User side.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 208 / 390
390
1696MS 1696MS 1550 nm
1550 nm
MCC MCC MCC

OADM OADM OADM OADM

SPVF SPVF
SPVM SPVM
SPVM SPVM
SPVF SPVF
SPVM 1310 nm on WDM side
MCC MCC
1310 nm
OPC
4xANY
1696MS_C
UI
Figure 133. Remote Spur 4xANY + protected MCC on 1310 nm
1696MS 1550 nm OADM

1550 nm
MCC
OADM
OADM OADM
SPVF SPVF
SPVM SPVM
SPVM SPVM
1696MS
1550 nm + OSC
1550 nm + OSC
SPVF SPVF
OSC
SPVM 1550 on WDM side
MCC MCC
1310 nm
OPC
4xANY
1696MS_C UI
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 134. Remote Spur 4xANY + protected MCC on 1550 nm
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 209 / 390
390
3.2.3.3.9 2–channel Line Terminal
The line Terminal 2 Channels use OADM 2 in order to deliver 2 different channels.

OADM2
OSC
SPVM λ1 λ2
MCC/OCC10 MCC/OCC10
1696MS_C
UI UI
PSC
OADM1ch+OSC E
F A N _C
SPVM
Transponder W
Transponder E LAN_Q
ESC PSC
Figure 135. 2 channels Line Terminal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 210 / 390
390
3.2.3.3.10 Remote CPE, 2–channel terminal: MCC + 4xANY with drawers protection
Rx
OADM2100_M_chx–y_S SPVM
Tx #1 OSC in
ch1
Tx
Rx
#2
Tx MCC M
4xANY U
OPC Rx ch1
#3 ch2 X
Rx
#1 Tx
Rx
Tx #4
OPC
#2
2 channels
OPC
#3 Rx
Tx #1
ch1 D
Tx
Rx
OPC Tx #2 MCC M
#4 4xANY U
Rx
#3 ch2 ch2 X
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx #4
OSC out
6 PSC2 12
5 OPC #4 11
F A N _C
4 4xANY OPC #3 10
3 OPC #1 9
4xANY
2 OPC #2 8
5 OADM2100_M_chx–y_S HK 11
F A N _C
4 SPVM RAI 10
3 MCC ch2 9
2 MCC ch1 LAN_Q 8
13 1 ESC PSC(2) 7
Figure 136. Remote CPE, 2–channel terminal: MCC + 4xANY with drawers protection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 211 / 390
390
3.2.3.3.11 SPV manager
The SPV manager is used only when the customer want to connect a SH Manager to supervise the ring.

SPVM
1550 nm + OSC 1550 nm + OSC
SPV_F_C SPV_F_C
OADM OADM
LAN_Q
1696MS_C
SH
PSC
F A N _C
SPVM SPV_F_C
SPV_F_C
LAN_Q
ESC PSC
N.B. In this configuration two OADM boards must be provisionned by the software even if
they are not needed for the Hardware function. Then the associated alarm (RUM) will
raise on the craft Equiment even if the working is normal.
Figure 137. SPV Manager

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 212 / 390
390
3.2.4 1696MS configured to connect a CPE
In this paragraph, we describe the configuration of 1696MS in a core ring, host of a link to a distant CPE.
In current release two data signals plus OSC can be managed as such a one fiber link (1310 nm, 1550
nm or 1310+1550 nm).
3.2.4.1 1696MS receiving/emitting a supervised B&W signal
This situation is the same as a customer signal arriving on a B&W port of 1696MS, except that the incoming
signal carries the OSC which has to be extracted/inserted in the 1696MS.
OMDX or OADM OMDX or OADM
Transponder
Transponder
To 1696 To 1696 WDM
WDM ring SPVM ring
SPVM
OPC
1310 nm 1310 nm
SPVM
1696MS SPV_F
Black & White signal
To/From
CPE
In this configuration the 1696MS node has to support 3 Optical Supervisory Channels (2 x SPVM boards
needed).
Figure 138. 1696MS connected to a CPE through a supervised black–and–white signal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 213 / 390
390
3.2.4.2 1696MS receiving a supervised colored signal
In this configuration, the signal coming from the CPE is plugged on the User Interfaced of the 1696MS.
In this case the signal from the 1696MS to the CPE is carried by a 1310 nm wavelength, and the contrapro-

pagative signal is carried by a 1550 nm wavelength.

The optical budget is then limited by the Black and White span optical budget.
3.2.4.2.1 Protected signal in the ring
The signal coming from the CPE is launched in both directions in the 1696MS ring (East and West).
In this case, the 1696MS node has to support 3 Optical Supervisory Channels (2 SPVM boards are need-
ed).
Transponder
Transponder
To 1696 To 1696 WDM
WDM ring SPVM ring
SPVM
OPC
1550 nm 1310 nm
SPVM
1696MS
SPV_F_1550
To/From CPE
and protected in the ring
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 214 / 390
390
3.2.4.2.2 Unprotected signal in the ring
In this case the signal coming from the CPE is launched only on one side of the ring.
In this configuration the 1696MS node has to support 3 Optical Supervisory Channels (2 SPVM boards
needed).
Transponder
To 1696 To 1696 WDM
WDM ring SPVM ring
SPVM
1550 nm
SPVM
1310 nm
or 1310 nm
To/From
1696MS
CPE
and unprotected in the ring
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 215 / 390
390
3.2.4.3 1696MS as a ”remotization”
In this configuration one channel is demultiplexed and the other one is sent directly to the CPE without
MCC using.

3.2.4.3.1 Without OSC
To 1696 To 1696 WDM

WDM ring SPVM ring
SPVM
1696MS To/From CPE
Figure 141. Optical channel optically passed through the NE without being regenerated.
3.2.4.3.2 With OSC
To 1696
To 1696 WDM
WDM ring SPVM
SPVM ring
SPVM
1696MS SPV_F SPV_F

To/From CPE
Figure 142. Optical channel optically passed through the NE without being regenerated and with OSC
insertion.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
When the optical budget is available, this configuration can be used to reach a CPE. In this case, the
1696MS node has to support 3 OSC channels and then 2 SPVM boards are needed.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 216 / 390
390
3.2.5 Two 1696MS or 1696MS_C rings connected together
It is possible to make two 1696MS rings (made up of 1696MS and/or 1696MS_C) communicate. It is not
necessary that both communicating nodes are located on the same spot. User interfaces are intercon-
nected (data transmission), and the OSC is launched on one 1310 nm black and white signal from one
ring to the other through two SPV_F_C boards (one on each ring).
PSC
OADM1 RAI
F A N _C
SPVM OPC
Transponder SPV_F_C (1550 nm)
Transponder ch. 3E LAN_Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Transponder ch 4W
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 1W
Transponder ch 4E
Transponder ch 2E
Transponder ch 1E
Half SPVM Board

OADM 4 ch. West
OADM 4 ch. East
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P L S R
P H A U U P
S A V K I I I S
C N C
49
28: SPV Filter FANS
Figure 143. Interconnection of two rings with a 1696MS and a 1696MS_C

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 217 / 390
390
Supervision through optical link (DCC)
It is possible to make two 1696MS Rings communicate (made up of 1696MS and/or 1696MS_C). Both
the communicating nodes are not necessary to be located on the same spot. User interfaces are intercon-

nected (data transmission), and the OSC is launched on one 1310 nm black–and–white signal from one

ring to the other through two SPV_F_C boards (one on each ring).
Protection is provided for remote MCC Boards of both rings with OPC boards.
This protection type allows two failures at a time, one in each ring.
OMDX or OADM 1ch OMDX or OADM 1ch
MCC/OCC10
MCC/OCC10
To 1696 To 1696 WDM
WDM ring SPVM ring
SPVM
OPC SPVM
1696MS
SPVM
SPV_F_C
User interfaces
User interfaces
SPV_F_C
SPVM
OPC
OADM 1 channel +OSC OADM 1 channel +OSC
MCC/OCC10
MCC/OCC10
To 1696 To 1696 WDM

WDM ring SPVM SPVM
ring
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Pass–Through 1696MS_C
Figure 144. Two 1696MS rings connected together through user interfaces.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 218 / 390
390
Supervision through electrical link (LAN_Q)
The supervision is transmitted from one ring to the other through the LAN_Q boards. This avoid to have
one SPVM in the 1696MS shelf and one in the MS_C shelf.
OMDX or OADM 1ch OMDX or OADM 1ch
MCC/OCC10
MCC/OCC10
To 1696 To 1696 WDM
WDM ring SPVM ring
SPVM
SPVM
User interfaces
LAN_Q
1696MS
User interfaces LAN_Q
OADM 1 channel +OSC OADM 1 channel +OSC

MCC/OCC10
MCC/OCC10
To 1696 To 1696 WDM

WDM ring SPVM ring
SPVM
1696MS_C Pass–Through
Figure 145. Two 1696MS rings connected together through user interfaces.
The transponders shown in the figure are not protecting each other, but only transmitting the signal they
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
receive. In this configuration both NEs located in the same spot are necessary because of the electrical
link length.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 219 / 390
390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
220 / 390
4 UNITS DESCRIPTION
This chapter describes the cards and units of the 1696 Metro Span for this release. It gives for each card
a functional diagram, description and interfaces definition.
4.1 Tributaries
4.1.1 Multirate Channel Card I (MCC1)
2.5 – 2.66 Gb/s back–panel electrical links

to/from
to/from corresponding to/from
future matrix transponder future matrix
copy 0 copy 1
Client User Rx
input
(optional)
User Tx Client
(optional) output
B1
non intrusive
monitoring
WDM Tx WDM
output
WDM
input WDM Rx 8 x 8 MATRIX
Alarm & Control

unit to/from
corresponding
transponder
Figure 146. Block diagram of the MCC1 boards

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 221 / 390
390
4.1.1.1 Description
The MCC1 unit is a bidirectional multi–clock interface. The block–diagram is shown on Figure 146.

The receivers (WDM and user) are 2R. Two multi bit–rate clock–selectable CDR (Clock and Data Recov-

ery) units are used so that the MCC is globally 3R for some bit-rates between 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s
(155Mbit/s - 622Mbit/s - 1.06Gbit/s - 1.25Gbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s).
The electrical matrix gives some flexibility and additives features:
• drop / Insert with or without Optical–SNCP

• electrical pass–through
• internal (local) loop–back
• line (remote) loop–back
• line (remote) loop–back drop–insert
• user loop–back
• user loop–back pass–through
• possibility to broadcast either the user or the WDM signal to the B1 monitoring unit
The alarm and control unit ensures the following functions:

• matrix management interface
• Clock and Data Recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, pass–through,...)
• alarms collection and interface to the craft terminal via the shelf controller
• Optical Channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit) if Optical–SNCP
(O–SNCP): user Tx ON/OFF control
• safety procedure management (ALS_WDM).
In OCh protection scheme, each MCC transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one (the MCC
just beside) via parallel back–panel links in order that each one is able to select the unfailed signal.
Each MCC unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength (2 wavelengths are selectable so
that one shall be chosen before being able to perform a mismatch).
On the MCC, the set of channels are written on the card support.
Two EEPROM contain both the remote inventory data (construction date, code number, maker number,
board identification...) and the set of channels the card support. These information are sent to the ESC
board by means of the SPI bus.
4.1.1.2 Optical characteristics
See para. 5.3.1.1 on page 331.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 222 / 390
390
4.1.1.3 Optical safety
Alcatel recommends the customers to preset:

– the “APSD enable” mode for all the transponders in terminating nodes
– the “APSD disable” mode for all the transponders in regeneration.
Optical safety, fault localization and protection criteria are based on the LOS alarm only.
How does it work?
– ILOS at user Rx input implies a consecutive LOC at WDM or user Tx input and the SD of the WDM
Tx.
– ILOS at WDM Rx input implies the shutdown of the WDM Tx and the start of the ALS mechanism (if
available). A consecutive LOC will appear at user Tx input and this interface will be shut down. To
restart, the WDM Tx will send restart pulses.
Shutdown time is defined to be less than (or equal to) 10 ms.
4.1.1.4 MCC cross–connection configurations
On the following schemes, are presented the two adjacent MCCs and the MCC matrix configurations. The
HF back–panel links shown in the following drawings are those between the slots 4&5, 6&7, 8&9, 10&11,
14&15, 16&17, 18&19, 20&21.
4.1.1.4.1 Default configuration
By default, both optical transmitters are OFF, the 8x8 matrix has no connection.
After software configuration, the way of working will be one of the following.
back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8
Matrix 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 147. MCC in default configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 223 / 390
390
4.1.1.4.2 Drop / Insert without optical channel protection
The MCC can accept this configuration in terminals, back–to–back terminals, and OADM nodes.
The two adjacent boards have an independent configuration (one can be in drop–insert, the other one can

be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loop–back mode).

back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8
Matrix 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 148. Drop / Insert without Optical–SNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration)
Table 19. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC
alarms consecutive action
WDM Rx user Tx user Rx WDM Tx
ILOS (LOC)* – SD of the WDM Tx
ILOS (LOC)* – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board)

and beginning of the ALS_WDM procedure (if
ALS enabled)
– shutdown of the user Tx
(LOC)* concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one in when the bit–rate is managed by the
CDR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 224 / 390
390
4.1.1.4.3 Drop / Insert with Optical channel protection
The MCC can accept this configuration in terminals, back–to–back terminals, and OADM nodes.
The two adjacent boards have the same matrix configuration and must be placed in the two adjacent slots
4&5, 6&7, 8&9, 10&11, 14&15, 16&17, 18&19 or 20&21 because of Low Frequency links used to pass
information between them.
MCC West MCC East
Rx Rx
WDM Tx WDM Tx
8x8 8x8
Matrix Matrix
WDM Rx WDM Rx
Tx Tx
Figure 149. Drop / Insert with Optical–SNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration)
ILOS (LOC)* – shutdown of the WDM Tx
ILOS (LOC)* – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board)

ALS enabled)
– shutdown of the user Tx
– protection action: activation of the protecting
user Tx laser
(LOC)* concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one when the bit–rate is managed by the
CDR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 225 / 390
390
4.1.1.4.4 Electrical pass–through
The MCC can accept this configuration in back–to–back terminals or OADM nodes for flexibility and/or
to enable a regeneration of the signal. The user interfaces are not used and this board do not manage the

protection.

back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx optional
interfaces
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 150. Pass–Through
inhibited inhibited LOC* – no action
ILOS inhibited inhibited (LOC)* – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board)
ALS enable)
– ShutDown of the WDM Tx on the adjacent
board
CDR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 226 / 390
390
4.1.1.4.4.1 Master board
The board is refered to as master because its user interfaces are those used and it is this board that man-
ages the protection.
ILOS (LOC)** – SD of the WDM Tx
ILOS (LOC)** – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board)

and begining of the ALS_WDM procedure (if
ALS enable)
– protection action
LOC* for the bit–rates managed by the CDR

(LOC)** concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one in when the bit–rate is managed by the
CDR
4.1.1.4.4.2 Slave board
The user interfaces are not used and this board does not manage the protection.
ILOS inhibited inhibited – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board)

ALS enable)
– transmission of the alarm to the master board
(for protection control)

CDR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 227 / 390
390
4.1.1.5 Loop–back
4.1.1.5.1 Local loop–back

This configuration is used for tests only.

back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 151. Local Loop–Back
The two adjacent board have an independant configuration (one can be in local loop–back, the other one
can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loop–back mode).
As this configuration is used for tests, the alarm management is controlled by the operator (he should look
at all the alarms and activate or inhibit the ALS_WDM procedure).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 228 / 390
390
4.1.1.5.2 Remote loop–back drop–insert

back–panel
connections
MCC ”loop–in” MCC ”loop–out”
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 152. Remote Loop–Back in ring application (back–to–back or OADM)
The two adjacent boards are linked and have a different configuration so that the operator must set the
MCC to work in ”loop–in” or ”loop–out” mode.
4.1.1.5.3 User loop–back
back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 153. User Loop–Back
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 229 / 390
390

4.1.1.5.4 User loop–back & pass–through
back–panel
connections
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 154. User Loop–Back & pass–through
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 230 / 390
390
4.1.1.5.5 Remote loop–back

back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 231 / 390
390
4.1.1.6 Protection management
In Optical SNCP, if the master MCC (master for protection control) is in failure (Hardware failure, board
absent,...), the selected path is automatically the protecting one. By this way, when the board in failure is

retrieved, there is no impact on the traffic.

At the creation of the protection function, the operator define one main and one spare channel.
The switch criteria and ways of control are the followings:

– software locked protection on the main channel
– software forced selection of the spare channel
– ILOS at WDM Rx access on the current working channel and no alarm on the protecting one nor Hard-
Ware Failure on the board.
The software forcing has the highest priority level. The manual switch has a lower priority level than the
alarms on the signals.
A clear function allows, via software, to re–initialize the protection board (clear all the switches com-
mands), and a lockout of protection function gives the possibility to block the switch in the main position
(whatever the status of the signals). The priority order for the switch criteria is the following (from the high-
est to the lowest):
– lockout of protection
– software forcing
– automatic switching
Total switching time < 50 ms.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 232 / 390
390
4.1.2 Multirate Channel Card II (MCC2)

to/from
corresponding
transponder
to/from to/from
future matrix future matrix
copy 0 copy 1
Client User Rx
input 8 x 8 MATRIX
(optional)
User Tx Client
(optional) output
OPL
B1 OOPV
non intrusive
monitoring
Optical
Receiver
VOA
WDM Tx WDM
WDM output
input WDM Rx
Alarm & Control

unit to/from
corresponding
transponder
Figure 156. Block diagram of the MCC2 unit

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 233 / 390
390
4.1.2.1 Description
The MCC2 transponder unit is a bidirectional multi–clock interface. The block–diagram is shown on
Figure 156.

All the signals are 3R.
The board is configured for application with optical amplifiers.
In the Craft Terminal, the operator can select bit rate by :

– selecting it in a list
– entering its exact value
A Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) is inserted after the WDM Tx. The operator monitors the VOA by
choosing a VOA value.
In addition to the optical interfaces (user Rx and Tx, WDM Rx and Tx), an electrical matrix, a B1 perfor-
mance monitoring unit and an alarm and control unit are present on the board.
The B1 performance monitoring unit enables the operator to achieve PM on B1 in a non intrusive way on
SDH/SONET signals either at user Rx side, or at WDM Rx side (selection made by software provisioning).

This matrix is managed by the craft terminal via the SPI interface and the alarm and control unit.
The alarm and control unit ensures a few functions:

• Clock and Data Recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, pass–through,...
• B1 device management
• Optical Channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit)
– if optical–SNCP: user Tx ON/OFF control
• safety procedure management (ALS_WDM, ...)
In OCh protection scheme, each transponder transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one
(the transponder just beside) via parallel back–panel links in order that each one is able to select the un-
failed signal.
Each transponder unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength (2 wavelengths are selectable
so that one shall be chosen before being able to perform a mismatch).
Two EEPROMs contain both the remote inventory data (construction date, code number, maker number,
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 234 / 390
390


Two types of alarms are available for optical safety / fault localization / protection criteria:
– LOC: Loss Of Clock. Alarm detected by the CDR modules, before Tx inputs for all bit rates between
100 Mbit/s and 2.66 Gbit/s.
– ILOS: Input Loss Of signal. Alarm detected by the Rx modules as a low power.
Way of working 1st case :
Tx.
– LOC at WDM Tx input (signal coming either from the user Rx or the WDM Rx) implies the SD of the
WDM Tx.
available & enable). A consecutive LOC will appear at user Tx input and this interface will be shut-
down. To restart, the WDM Tx will send restart pulses.
– LOC at user Tx input (signal coming from WDM world) implies shutdown of the user Tx laser and
protection mechanism (if available).
N.B. During the switch on and the switch off time, the output power remains between λ ITU ± 500 pm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 235 / 390
390
4.1.2.4 MCC2 configurations
On the following schemes, are presented the two adjacent transponders and the transponder matrix con-
figurations. The HF back–panel links shown in the following drawings are those between the slots 4&5,

6&7, 8&9, 10&11, 14&15, 16&17, 18&19, 20&21.

The board is on APSD disable state.
back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8
Matrix 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 157. MCC2 in default configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 236 / 390
390
The transponder can accept this configuration in terminals, back–to–back terminals, and OADM nodes.

back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8
Matrix 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
ILOS (LOC)** – ShutDown of the WDM Tx

and beginning of the ALS_WDM procedure if
ALS enable
– ShutDown of the user Tx
– activation of the protecting user Tx laser if
protection activated
LOC* – shutdown of the user Tx laser

LOC* – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser

(LOC)** concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. If WDM Tx is Forced ON, shut–down of the WDM Tx does not occur.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 237 / 390
390
4.1.2.4.3 Drop / Insert with optical channel protection


MCC West MCC East
Rx Rx
WDM Tx WDM Tx
8x8 8x8
Matrix Matrix
WDM Rx WDM Rx
Tx Tx
ILOS (LOC)** – ShutDown of the WDM Tx

and beginning of the ALS_WDM procedure if
ALS enable
– ShutDown of the user Tx
LOC* – shutdown of the user Tx laser

LOC* – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

(LOC)** concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 238 / 390
390
4.1.2.4.4 Electrical Pass–through (regeneration configuration)
The MCC2 can accept this configuration in back–to–back terminals or OADM nodes for flexibility and/or
to enable a regeneration of the signal. The user interfaces are not used and this board do not manage the
protection.
back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx optional
interfaces
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 160. Pass–through (regeneration configuration)
ILOS inhibited inhibited (LOC)* – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board)
ALS enable)
– ShutDown of the WDM Tx on the adjacent
board
CDR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 239 / 390
390
4.1.2.4.4.1 Master board
The board is refered to as master because its user interfaces are those used and it is this board that man-
ages the protection.

ILOS (LOC)** – SD of the WDM Tx

ALS enable)
– protection action

CDR
4.1.2.4.4.2 Slave board
The user interfaces are not used and this board does not manage the protection.
ILOS inhibited inhibited – shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board)

ALS enable)
– transmission of the alarm to the master board
(for protection control)

CDR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 240 / 390
390
4.1.2.5 Loop–back


back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 161. Local Loop–Back
4.1.2.5.2 Remote loop–back drop–insert
back–panel
connections
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 241 / 390
390

4.1.2.5.3 User loop–back
back–panel
connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 163. User Loop–Back
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 242 / 390
390
4.1.2.5.4 User loop–back & pass–through

back–panel
connections
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 164. User Loop–Back & pass–through
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 243 / 390
390

back–panel

connections
MCC West MCC East
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 244 / 390
390
4.1.2.6 Laser and VOA status
The next table gives the default state of the lasers and VOA according to the configuration of the MCC3.
The default configuration is APSD_Disable.
Table 29. MCC2 default Lasers and VOA states
MCC3 configuration WDM Tx laser VOA WDM Tx User Tx laser

Plugged not declared OFF 20 dB OFF
Declared but no cross–connection OFF 20 dB OFF
Cross–conn declared but no signal OFF 20 dB OFF
Cross–connection + signal according to configuration according to configuration
In Optical SNCP, if the master MCC (master for protection control) is in failure (Hardware failure, Card ab-
sent,...), the selected path is automatically the protecting one. By this way, when the board in failure is re-
trieved, there is no impact on the traffic.
At the creation of the protection function, the operator defines one main and one spare channel.

– software locked protection on main channel
– software forced selection of spare channel
– ILOS (on WDM Rx) or LOC (on user Tx for the available bit–rates) on the current working channel
and no alarm on the protecting one
– software manual selection of spare channel (forced selection only if no degradation of this spare sig-
nal)
The software forcing is highest priority. The manual switch is less priority than the alarms on the signals.
The priority order for the switch criteria is the following (from the highest to the lowest):
When a software command (lockout or software forcing) is released (clear function), the switch remains
in its current position to avoid the useless switches.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 245 / 390
390
4.1.3 Multirate Channel Card III (MCC3)

Client Client

input output
STM–1, STM–4,
STM–16, GBE, FC,
USER Rx
USER Tx
CWDM SFP module
FPGA
WDM
input WDM Rx
2x2
to/from
WDM VOA corresponding
output WDM Tx transponder
2x2
Pin
amp
OOPV to/from
Alarm &
Control adjacent
Unit board
N.B. links from Control Unit to components have been greyed for clarity)
Figure 166. Block diagram of the MCC3 unit

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 246 / 390
390
4.1.3.1 Description
The MCC3 transponder unit is a bidirectional multi–clock interface. The block–diagram is shown in
Figure 166.
MCC3 is built on the model of the MCC2 board. It is a MCC2 with a SFP Pluggable module in place of
Rx–Tx USER Interface. This feature permits to have S–16.1, I–16.1, CWDM ... type optical interfaces. It
also enables to have Bitrate specific optical Interfaces (Gigabit Ethernet, ...).
Small Formfactor Pluggable modules are optical transceivers enabling the building of a transponder board
with a client oriented User Interface.
The following SFP modules are supported by the MCC3 board (the complete list is shown in Table 8. on
page 76 and in Figure 47. on page 118):
– CWDM Silver/Bronze: 8 CWDM colored modules with APD detector (bitrates = 125 Mb/s 2.7 Gb/s)
– I–16.1 / S–16.1 / : STM–16 Inter–office reach / Short reach at 1310 nm
– MS–16.1: S–16.1 multi–rate up to 2.66Gb/s at 1310 nm
– S–4.1 / S–1.1: STM–4 / STM–1 short reach at 1310 nm
– GbE–SX / Gbe–LX: Gigabit Ethernet at 850 nm / 1310 nm
– 2FC / FC–S / FC–L: 2 Fiber Channel (2.125 GHz) / Fiber Channel at 850 nm / 1310 nm
In the Craft Terminal, the operator can select the bit rate by
– selecting it in a list
– entering its exact value
Concerning WDM optics, the MCC3 board is equipped with a 3200 ps/nm WDM Tx.
The WDM Rx supports 19 dB OSNR at EOL.
A Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) is inserted after the WDM Tx. The operator monitors the VOA by
choosing a VOA value.
In addition to the optical interfaces an electrical matrix, an alarm and control unit and a FPGA devoted to
B1–based performance monitoring and G.709 optical layer management are present on the board.
The FPGA / PM block enables the operator to achieve PM based on B1 in a non intrusive way on SDH/SO-
NET signals either at user Rx side, or at WDM Rx side (selection made by software provisioning). User
signal is monitored after the 8x8 electrical matrix whereas the line signal is monitored before the matrix.
• Drop / Insert with or without Optical–SNCP

• Electrical pass–through
This matrix is managed by the craft terminal via the SPI interface and the alarm and control unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 247 / 390
390
The alarm and control unit ensures a few functions:
• Clock and Data Recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, pass–through,...
• B1 device management

•

alarms collection and interface to the craft terminal via the shelf controller

• Optical Channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit)
– if optical–SNCP: user Tx ON/OFF control
• safety procedure management (ALS_WDM, ...)
In OCh protection scheme, each transponder transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one
(the transponder just beside) via parallel back–panel links in order that each one is able to select the un-
failed signal.
Each transponder unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength (2 wavelengths are selectable
so that one shall be chosen before being able to perform a mismatch).
Two EEPROMs contain both the remote inventory data (construction date, code number, maker number,
Two types of alarms are available for optical safety / fault localization / protection criteria:
– LOC: Loss Of Clock. Alarm detected by the CDR modules, before Tx inputs for all bit rates between
100 Mbit/s and 2.66 Gbit/s.
– ILOS: Input Loss Of signal. Alarm detected by the Rx modules as a low power.
Way of working 1st case :
Tx.
– LOC at WDM Tx input (signal coming either from the user Rx or the WDM Rx) implies the SD of the
WDM Tx.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 248 / 390
390
4.1.3.4 MCC3 configurations
Refer to para. 4.1.2.4 on page 236

4.1.3.4.1 Default configuration (no cross–connection)

Refer to para. 4.1.2.4.1 on page 236.
4.1.3.4.2 Drop / Insert (with and without optical channel protection)
Refer to para 4.1.2.4.2 on page 237 and para. 4.1.2.4.3 on page 238.
4.1.3.4.3 Electrical pass–through, with/without SPF client interface (regeneration config)
Refer to para 4.1.2.4.4 on page 239.
When two transponders are configured in pass–through, there is no need of User Interfaces, hence the
user interface (SFP modules) in MCC3 can be equipped or not.
In case it is not equipped, neither alarms nor measurements should be shown to the operator.
4.1.3.4.4 Loop–backs
Refer to para. 4.1.2.5 on page 241 where are described the following loop–backs:
– local loop–back
– remote loop–back and drop/insert
– user loop–back
– user loop–back and pass–through
– remote loop–back.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 249 / 390
390
Refer to para. 4.1.2.6 on page 245.


In Optical SNCP, if the master MCC (master for protection control) is in failure (Hardware failure, Card ab-
sent,...), the selected path is automatically the protecting one. By this way, when the board in failure is re-
trieved, there is no impact on the traffic.

– ILOS (on WDM Rx) or LOC (on user Tx for the available bit–rates) on the current working channel
and no alarm on the protecting one
nal)
– SFP removed (missing)
The software forcing is highest priority. The manual switch is less priority than the alarms on the signals.
in its current position to avoid the useless switches.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 250 / 390
390
4.1.4 MCC_RGN
The MCC_RGN board is the same physical board as the MCC2 one without the client optical interfaces
(no B&W optics).
It is used in pair in pass–through mode only to form a regenerator.
It is managed on the Q3 interface as a MCC2 and provides the same features (refer to para. 4.1.2), except
for the client interfaces.
Due to the missing client optical interfaces, no add–drop configuration is possible, no user nor local loop-
backs, no protection...
This board is a legacy card strictly dedicated to pass–through configurations.
The same functionality is provided with two MCC3 without SFP client interfaces and used in pass–through
configuration. When the pass–through configuration is required, MCC3 should be used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 251 / 390
390
4.1.5 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card (OCC10)
Client input Client Client output

9.95328 Gbps

10.3125 Gbps
User User
Rx Tx
CDR CDR
to/from front panel connectors
Back panel
10 Gbps input 8 x 8 MATRIX to/from Matrix 1
10 Gbps output
G.709, some functionalities G.709,

can be short–cut
FEC, PM FEC, PM
WDM WDM
Tx Rx
Photo–diode
VOA VOA
Photo–diode
10.709 Gbps
11.096 Gbps
WDM output WDM WDM input
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 167. OCC10 unit block diagram
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 252 / 390
390
4.1.5.1 Description
The OCC10 unit transponder is a bidirectional multi–clock interface for 10 Gbps native signals. It is hard-
ware compliant with ITU–T G.709 Rec.
This transponder can be provisioned to accept any digital signal at the nominal bit rate of
– 9.953 Gbps (STM–64/OC–192/10 GBE WAN)
– 10.3125 (GBE LAN).
Two Variable Optical Attenuators (VOAs) are present on the board: one is inserted after the WDM Tx and
the other one is placed before the WDM Rx in order to maintain the power constant at the Rx input.
By O.S. (CT, 1353SH) the operator can set (and monitor) the WDM Tx VOA value.
In addition to the optical interfaces (user Rx and Tx, WDM Rx and Tx), an electrical matrix and an alarm
and control unit are present on the board.
The B1 performance monitoring unit enables the operator to achieve PM on B1 in a non intrusive way on
SDH/SONET signals at user Rx side and at WDM Rx side simultaneously.
The electrical matrix is managed by the craft terminal via the SPI bus and the Alarm and control unit; it
gives some flexibility and additives features:
The alarm and control unit performs the following functions:

• Clock and Data recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, pass–through..)
• optical channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit)
– if Optical SNCP: user Tx ON/OFF control
• safety procedure management (ALS).
In OCh protection scheme, each transponder transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one (the
transponder just beside) via parallel back–panel links in order that each one is able to select the unfailed signal.
Each transponder unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength.
The channel/wavelength is written on the card support.
The card mismatch is managed via information (ECID) contained in an EEPROM present on the board.
The Remote Inventory of the module is available via the SPI bus.
The EEPROM containing specific data of the board is accessed via the SPI bus.
The O/E/O regeneration for OCC10 is
– supported by connecting the client interfaces (general). Mandatory with a 2.5 Gbps backpanel
– supported via 10 Gbps backpanel links (requires 3AL96270AA–– CO shelf).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
On the front panel of the OCC10 are located four electrical connectors allowing pass–through configura-
tion even with back panel not 10 Gbps compatible (for future rel.).
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 253 / 390
390
4.1.5.2 OCC10 optical characteristics


In case of upstream error (fiber break, transponder failure,...) a mechanism that enables to propagate a
kind of FDI along the trail is proposed (allowing for optical safety / fault localization / protection criteria):
– LOC: Loss Of Clock. Alarm detected by the CDR modules, before Tx inputs for the 9953.28 Gbps
bit rate.
– LOS: Loss Of Signal. Alarm detected by the Rx modules as a low power.
– generic AIS detection.
If the protection is activated, only the shut–down mode is authorized.

This mechanism is independant from safety procedure. The next table sums up different OCC10 beha-
viour according to safety + LOS + LOC + generic AIS propagation command.
Table 30. OCC10 Shut down mode
Behaviour
Node Type OCC10 state
Alarm Consecutive action
APSD enable – –
LOS on User Rx SD of WDM Tx
LOS on WDM Rx SD of User Tx
APSD disable
LOC on User Tx SD of User Tx
a) Line Terminal
b) Add & Drop in LOC on WDM Tx SD of WDM Tx
OADM or WDM Tx always ON
back–to–back APSD disable LOS on WDM Rx SD of User Tx
node forced ON
WDM Tx always OFF
APSD disable LOS on WDM Rx SD of User Tx
forced OFF
Example of way of working for ADD & DROP with APSD Disable:
– ILOS at user Rx input implies the SD of WDM Tx

– LOC at WDM Tx input (signal coming either from user Rx or WDM Rx) implies SD of WDM Tx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 254 / 390
390
4.1.5.4 OCC10 configurations
On the following schemes, are presented the two adjacent transponders and the transponder matrix con-
figurations. The HF back–panel links shown in the following drawings are those between the slots 4&5,
6&7, 8&9, 10&11, 14&15, 16&17, 18&19, 20&21.

Table 31. OCC10 configurations
Configuration type UNI NNI
Client bit rate (Gbps) 9.95328 / 10.3125 10.709 / 11.096
Drop–insert YES Future rel.
Optical SNCP YES Future rel.
Pass–through Not Applicable YES
Remote loopback pass–through (IN and OUT) Not Applicable YES
Remote loopback drop/insert YES Future rel.
Remote loopback Not Applicable YES
Local loopback YES Future rel.
User loopback YES Future rel.
In the following tables the alarms which are not shown or not applicable are alarms with potentially conse-
quent actions but not displayed to the craft user.
Notice that “_User” is used for B&W link or back panel link.
The switch criteria are described in the protection para. 3.1.9 on page 169.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 255 / 390
390

back–panel
connections
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8
Matrix 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
For User to Network Interface (UNI) both ODU and OTU are terminated at the WDM interfaces.
9953.28 Gbps
ODU
OTU
B&W B&W
O/E O/E
FEC DEFEC
WDM
ODU
OTU
OTU
O/E
10.709 Gbps 8x8

DEFEC FEC
Matrix
WDM
ODU
OTU
OTU
O/E
Figure 169. Drop–insert (UNI)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 256 / 390
390
4.1.5.4.3 Drop / Insert with optical channel protection
Rx Rx
WDM Tx WDM Tx
8x8 8x8
Matrix Matrix
WDM Rx WDM Rx
Tx Tx
4.1.5.4.4 Electrical pass–through
The transponder can accept this configuration in back–to–back terminals or OADM nodes for flexibility
and/or to enable a regeneration of the signal. The user interfaces are not used and this board do not man-
age the protection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 257 / 390
390
front panel (future rel.)
Rx Tx

WDM Tx OR OR WDM Rx
8x8 10 Gbps 8x8

back–panel
WDM Rx WDM Tx
OR OR
Tx Rx
Figure 171. Pass–through (NNI)
For the regeneration configuration, OTU is terminated at the WDM interfaces and ODU is bypassed. A
dummy OTU is sent through the matrix
ODU
OTU Dummy OTU OTU
Front Panel (future rel.)
FEC DEFEC DEFEC FEC

WDM OR OR WDM
ODU
ODU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
O/E O/E
10 Gbps BP
10.709 Gbps 8x8 8x8 10.709 Gbps

Matrix Matrix
DEFEC FEC FEC DEFEC
WDM WDM
ODU
ODU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
O/E O/E
OR OR
Board 1 Front Panel (future rel.) Board 2
Figure 172. Regeneration (two pass–through linked by 10G backpanel)
The Dummy OTU does not correspond to a real transmission section: it is used to monitor the matrices
connections.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 258 / 390
390
When the board is configured in loopback the RXA and TXA LEDs, located on its front plate, are
always turned OFF.
4.1.5.4.5.1 Pass–through remote loop–back
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 10 Gbps 8x8

back–panel
WDM Rx WDM Tx
OR OR
Tx Rx
Table 32. Remote Loop–Back pass–through (NNI) in ring application (back–to–back or OADM)
OCC10 to work in loop–in or loop–out mode.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 259 / 390
390
4.1.5.4.5.2 Drop–insert remote loop–back
back–panel
connections

Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 173. Drop–insert remote loop–back (UNI) in ring application (back–to–back or OADM)
This configuration is used for tests only. The two adjacent boards have an independent configuration (one can
be in loop–back, the other one can be unequipped, in drop–insert configuration or in local loop–back mode).
4.1.5.4.5.3 Remote loop–back
back–panel
connections
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Table 33. Remote loop–back (NNI) in ring application (back–to–back or OADM)
be in loop–back, the other one can be unequipped, in drop–insert configuration or in local loop–back mode).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 260 / 390
390
4.1.5.4.6.1 Local loop–back

back–panel
connections
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 174. Local Loop–Back (UNI)

be in local loop–back, the other one can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loop–back
mode).
4.1.5.4.7 User loop–back (UNI): foreseen for Hardware and Software.
back–panel
connections
Rx Tx
WDM Tx WDM Rx
8x8 8x8
WDM Rx WDM Tx
Tx Rx
Figure 175. User Loop–Back (UNI)
This configuration is used for tests only. The two adjacent boards have an independent configuration (one
can be in local loop–back, the other one can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loop–
back mode).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 261 / 390
390
The next table gives the default state of the lasers and VOA according to the configuration of the OCC10.
The default configuration is APSD_Disable and LOS_mode_SD.

Table 34. OCC10 default Lasers and VOA states
OCC10 configuration WDM Tx laser VOA WDM Tx User Tx laser

Plugged not declared OFF 20 dB OFF
Declared but no cross–connection OFF 20 dB OFF
Cross–conn declared but no signal OFF 20 dB OFF
Cross–connection + signal according to configuration according to configuration
In Optical SNCP, as for MCC, if the master OCC (master for protection control) is in failure (Hardware fail-
ure, Card absent,...), the selected path is automatically the protecting one. By this way, when the board
in failure is retrieved, there is no impact on the traffic.

– ILOS (on WDM Rx) or LOC (on user Tx) on the current working channel and no alarm on the protect-
ing one
nal)
The software lockout of protection is the highest priority.
in its current position to avoid useless switches.
An example of optical protection is given in Figure 170. on page 257.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 262 / 390
390
4.1.6 4xANY, 4xANY_S and 4xANY_P cards
4.1.6.1 Description
TDM concentrators are able to multiplex in the time domain up to 4 ”low bit–rate” (”client”) signals into a
2.5 Gbps B&W WDM signal. The multiplexed client signals are listed below:
• 4 x Fast Ethernet
• 4 x FDDI
• 4 x ESCON
• 4 x Digital Video
• 4 x STM1
• 3 x STM4
• 2 x Gigabit Ethernet
• 2 x Fiber Channel or FICON
• some mixes are also possible:
– 3 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x STM4
– 2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 2 x STM4
– 2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x (FC or GbEth or FICON)
– 1 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x STM4 +1 x (FC or GbEth or FICON)
– 2 x (FC or GbEth or FICON).
The following type of boards are provided:
– the 4xANY board with an I–16.1 optical port for the 2.5 Gbit/s, is available from release 1.1. It allows
to cover a 2 Km distance approx
– the 4xANY_S board with a S–16.1 optical port for the 2.5 Gbit/s, is available from release 1.3. It al-
lows to cover a 15 Km distance approx. This functionality enables to use a 4XANY board without the
need of a transponder to have the necessary optical budget to launch the 1310 nm signal on the fiber.
It is then possible to use a 4XANY_S board alone in a 1696MS_C (for example) thus emitting only
one 1310 nm wavelength.
– the 4xANY_P board with a pluggable 2.5 Gbit/s optical module, hosting a I–16.1 B&W or S–16.1 B&W
or CWDM (Bronze/Silver) transceiver (transmitter + receiver) has been introduced in R.2.0. The
transceiver is included into a SFP module. The CWDM wavelenght range is 1470 1610 nm and
only one wavelength per module is accessible.
The architecture of the TDM concentrator board is based on the concept of virtual concatenation, and on
the mapping of SDH on OTN:
• the data traffic is packet into VC–4 structures virtually concatenated. Virtually concatenated
means that any VC–4 can follow an indpendent path crossing any SDH/SONET network (in-
cluded legacy ADM). Each VC4 is then concatenated again in the remote 4xANY.
• the VC–4s are groomed into a STM–16 structure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 263 / 390
390
In Figure 176. on page 265 is shown the block diagram.
The board is divided into:

• one mother board

• one daughter board

• 1 to 4 (client) drawers plugged on the mother or daughter board (2 on each one).
• a 1310 nm B&W transceiver for 4xAny and 4xANY_S
• a 1310 nm B&W or CWDM pluggable transceiver for 4xANY_P only.
The board consists essentially in:

• 4 slots for bi–directional client optical interfaces
• One 2.5 Gbit/s transceiver
The 4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P unit interfaces with the MCC board via the 2.5 Gbit/s transceiver.
Receivers and transmitters can be locked either on the received clock or the local clock:
• Default configuration : Tx locked to local clock and Rx locked to the received clock.
• Loop–back configuration. LoopBack and Continue managed.
From R.2.2 the B1 performance monitoring is enabled consisting in monitoring the B1 byte of the aggre-
gate signal received (WDM Rx).
It is also provided the 4xANY 1+1 protection consisting in protecting each client individually.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 264 / 390
390
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Rx CDR
Client
signal drawer #1
Tx
CDR E/O
Rx STM–16
STM–16 Regenerator
Client
drawer #3
CONCENTRATOR
STM–16 mapper
signal Tx
corresponding
Tx
transponder
2.5 Gb/s
to/from
CDR
Client
Rx
Rx
signal drawer #2 SFP pluggable module
Tx for 4xANY_P
Client Rx CDR
signal drawer #4
Tx
Alarm & Control
unit
CardÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
2
presence
Figure 176. 4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 265 / 390
390
Configuration
Client side, three different kinds of drawers are provided:

• high frequency 1310 nm optical interfaces drawers (Gigabit Ethernet, Fiber Channel), which

can be plugged only on the ports #3 et #4 (HF_1310_DRAWER).

• STM1/4 drawers, which can be plugged on any slots. But, STM_4 Bit rate can only be set for
ports #3 and #4 (SDH–SONET_1310_DRAWER).
Particular Case: For the 3 x STM4 configuration, the slot #1 is exceptionnally occupied by a
STM4 bit rate.
• Low frequency drawers (Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, Digital Video) with 1310 nm optical inter-
faces, which can be plugged in any slots (LF_1310_DRAWER).
• Low frequency drawers equipped with 1310 nm detector and laser. The optical interfaces are
have better jitter figures. The rules followed for the position of these drawers are only imposed
by the low frequency nature of the drawer (LF_1310_2_DRAWER).
• High frequency drawers equipped with 850 nm detector and laser. The rules followed for the
position of these drawers are only imposed by the high frequency nature of the drawer
(HF_850_DRAWER).
• Low frequency drawers equipped with 850 nm detector and laser. The rules followed for the
position of these drawers are only imposed by the low frequency nature of the drawer
(LF_850_DRAWER).
Furthermore, a limited number of configurations of drawers can be provided. Rules must be followed :
• If High Frequency drawer in ports #3, the port #1 must be non provisioned
• If High Frequency drawer in ports #4, the port #2 must be non provisioned
The following table lists the allowed configurations.
Table 35. Allowed drawers association
Drawer #1 Drawer #3 Drawer #2 Drawer #4
Not provisioned High Frequency Not provisioned High Frequency
Low Frequency / STM1 Low Frequency / STM1 Low Frequency / STM1 Low Frequency / STM1
/ STM4 / STM4
Not provisioned High Frequency / Low Low Frequency / STM1 Low Frequency / STM1
Frequency / STM1 / / STM4
STM4
Low Frequency / STM1 Low Frequency / STM1 Not provisioned High Frequency / Low
/ STM4 Frequency / STM1 /
STM4
STM4 STM4 Not provisioned STM4
Any couple (DRW#1 ; DRW#3) can be associated to any couple (DRW#2 ; DRW#4) except for the last
line (3 x STM–4 configuration is fixed for the 4 drawers).

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 266 / 390
390
4.1.7 Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) optical modules
The SFP optical modules are the optical physical access for the
– client (B&W) side of the MCC3
– aggregate (STM–16) side of the 4xANY_P.

Various type of optical modules are used (also refer to Table 8. on page 76)
– Silver (APD) and Bronze (PIN) CWDM
– STM–1 SFP : S–1.1, FE, FDDI, 100BaseLX
– STM–1 SFP L–1.1 and L–1.2
– STM–4 SFP : S–4.1, ESCON
– STM–4 SFP L–4.1 and L–4.2
– 1.25GBE SFP : Gbe1000LX/LH, 1 FiberChannel 1300nm stop gap
– 1.25GBE SFP : Gbe 1000 SX, 1 Fiber Channel 850 nm stop gap
– 1.25GBE SFP Gbe 1000 ZX
– SFP 1FC, 2FC 850 / 1310 nm
– STM–16 SFP : S–16.1, 2FC stop gap
– STM–16 SFP I–16.1
– STM–16 SFP S–16.1 multirate/multiformat
– STM–16 SFP L–16.1 and L–16.2.
Each module contains on transmitter side an automatic optical output power control circuit, a laser driver
and a laser diode module.
The transmitter is based on an uncooled DFB laser.
The laser safety class for the complete integrated module is CLASS 1 according to IEC 60825 2001 Edition.
It can manage command for TX disable and provides TX Fault alarm.
Depending on the SFP type, the optical access is compatible with
– a single mode fiber (9/125 µm) or
– multi mode fiber (50/125 µm or 9/125 µm)
with standard LC optical connector.
TX Fault indicates a laser fault of some kind. The Transmitter is not disabled when TX Fault signal is active.
Tx Disable is an input that is used to shut down the transmitter optical output.
On receiver side each module contains a PIN or APD photodetector for light to electrical current conver-
sion and a limiting amplifier.
The photo detected current is amplified by a an electrical circuit which delivers two complementary data
signals.
The module provides LOS alarm (Loss of input Power Signal alarm). This output signal indicates the re-
ceived optical power is below the worst–case receiver sensitivity (as defined by the standard in use).
Depending on the SFP type, the optical access is compatible with
– a single mode fiber (9/125 µm) or
– multi mode fiber (50/125 µm or 9/125 µm)
with standard LC optical connector.
The Transceiver has an EEPROM inside to provide Remote Inventory, containing information about trans-
ceiver’s capabilities, standard interfaces, manufacturer, and others. The serial interface uses the 2–wire
serial CMOS EEPROM protocol defined for the ATMEL AT24C01A/02/04 family of components.
Digital diagnostic monitoring (DDM) of analog parameters is supported.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 267 / 390
390
To board to/from
(MCC3 or 4xANY_P) MCC3 client or
processing 4xANY_P client

TRANSMITTER

LC
PIN Laser
diode Optical output
DATA+
LASER
Electrical DATA DRIVER
DATA–
APC TX Fault
TX Disable
EEPROM
Remote Inventory / DDM

µP
RECEIVER
DATA+ LC
Main PRE PIN*
Electrical DATA Amplifier Optical input
DATA–
LOS
SFP Optical Module
* PIN or APD, according to the SFP type
Figure 177. SFP modules general block diagram (with PIN photodetector)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 268 / 390
390
4.1.8 Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC)
4.1.8.1 Description
The board contains 2 x VOAs (Variable Optical Attenuators). It can be located between the demux and
the mux of an OADM / OMDX. A VOA can be placed between the two stages of an amplifier, too.
Purpose of MVAC is to manually adjust the channel emphasis in order to optimize the transmission.
Coupled with the OSMC board it allows an automatic emphasis (automatic power adjustment).
From: – OADM/OMDX demux
– 1st stage OAC
In1
In2
Alarm &
VOAs Photo- Control
diodes Unit
To: – OADM/OMDX mux
– 2st stage OAC
Out1
– a MCC
Out2
Card presence
2
Front panel PC
Electrical interface
PC Electrical Link
Figure 178. MVAC unit block diagram
In Figure 179. on page 270, some examples of system configuration is given, where MVAC is connected:
– between demux and mux of a multiplexer card (OADM/OMDX)
– at the input of a MCC2 (dropped channel)
– between the first and the second stage of the optical amplifier(s).
MVAC Can be used for any type of equipment connections: looped/expansion/extra/external channel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
4.1.8.2 MVAC optical characteristics
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 269 / 390
390
Bundle pass–through
In1 1 Out1
MVAC

Out2 2 In2

In1 1 Out1
MVAC
Out2 2 In2
Single Channel
In1 1 Out1
MUX MVAC MUX
Out2 2 In2
In1
2 In2
VOA in MVAC
Post Emphasis
1
MVAC
Out2
Out1
VOA in MCC2
MCC2 MCC2
In1 1 Out1 M
EXTERNAL
SIGNAL
MVAC U
Out2 2 In2 X
1st stage 2nd stage
VOA in OAC Optical Amplifier

In1 1 Out1
2
MVAC
Optical Amplifier VOA in OAC
Out2 2 In2
1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
2nd stage 1st stage
Figure 179. Example of MVAC location in the system
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 270 / 390
390
4.2 Multiplexers
4.2.1 OMDX unit

The following Mux/Demux (OMDX) boards are used

– the Mux/Demux with the LB/SB combiner/splitter and the SPV couplers : OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
– the Mux/Demux with the LB/SB combiner/splitter : OMDX8100_M_L1_X
– the upgrade Mux/Demux: OMDX8100_M_L2 , OMDX8100_M_S1 and OMDX8100_M_S2
4.2.1.1 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
SPV Tx in
OPL
OOPV Monitor Tx out
Optical
Extra Tx in Receiver
ch 30
ch 31
ch 32 MUX
WDM ch 33 WDM
Tx in ch 35 9:1 Line Tx out
ch 36
ch 37 LB/SB
combiner
ch 38
SB Tx in
SB Rx out
ch 30
ch 31
ch 32
Line Rx in WDM ch 33 WDM
1:9 ch 35 Rx out
DEMUX
LB/SB ch 36
splitter ch 37
ch 38
Extra Rx out
Monitor
Rx out SPV Rx out
Optical IPL
Receiver IOPV
N.B. Monitoring Access: Optical power level at monitoring access is around 20 dB less the mean opti-
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
cal power of the line.
Figure 180. OMDX8100_M_L1_XS: block diagram
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 271 / 390
390
4.2.1.1.1 Description
a ) MUX side
The wavelength multiplexer component collects the 8 optical signals (corresponding to the first part of the

Long Band) and the signal coming from the extra–input (multiplexed signal corresponding to the second

part of the Long Band) and multiplexes them into one optical signal. The following LB/SB combiner multi-
plexes the Long Band and the Short Band.
b ) DEMUX side
At the receive side, a coupler is used to monitor the input signal (power presence and monitoring connec-
tor). Then, a WDM coupler is used to extract the supervisory channel. Then, the Long Band and the Short
Band are separated via the LB/SB splitter. The long Band signal is demultiplexed into 8 channels plus one
that corresponds to the multiplexed 8 other channels of the LB.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 272 / 390
390
4.2.1.3 OMDX8100_M_L1_X
OPL
OOPV
Optical
Receiver Monitor Tx out

Extra Tx in
ch 30
ch 31
ch 32
WDM
Tx in ch 33 WDM
ch 35 9:1 MUX Line Tx out
ch 36
ch 37 LB/SB
combiner
ch 38
SB Tx in
SB Rx out
ch 30
ch 31
SPV filter ch 32
Line Rx in WDM ch 33 WDM
1:9 ch 35 Rx out
DEMUX
LB/SB ch 36
splitter ch 37
ch 38
Extra Rx out
Monitor Rx out
Optical IPL
Receiver IOPV
Figure 181. OMDX8100_M_L1_X: block diagram
a ) MUX side
The wavelength multiplexer component collects the 8 optical signals (corresponding to the first part of the
Long Band) and the signal coming from the extra–input (multiplexed signal corresponding to the second
part of the Long Band) and multiplexes them into one optical signal. The following LB/SB combiner multi-
plexes the Long Band and the Short Band.
b ) DEMUX side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
At the receive side, the Long Band and the Short Band are separated via the LB/SB splitter. The long band
signal is demultiplexed into 8 channels plus one that corresponds to the multiplexed 8 other LB channels.
The optical characteristics are described in para. 5.3.2 on page 344.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 273 / 390
390
4.2.1.4 OMDX8100_M_L2 , OMDX8100_M_S1 , OMDX8100_M_S2
WDM Tx in

L2 S2 S1

ch 20 42 52
ch 21 43 53
ch 22 44 54
ch 23 45 55
ch 25
OR
47
OR
57
MUX Line Tx out
ch 26 48 58
ch 27 49 59
ch 28 50 60
Extra Tx in
WDM Rx out
L2 S2 S1
ch 20 42 52
ch 21 43 53
ch 22 44 54
Line Rx in DEMUX ch 23
ch 25
OR
45
47
OR
55
57
ch 26 48 58
ch 27 49 59
ch 28 50 60
Extra Rx out
Figure 182. OMDX8100_M_L2 , OMDX8100_M_S1 , OMDX8100_M_S2 : block diagram
MUX side
The wavelength multiplexer component collects the 8 optical signals and the signal coming form the extra–
input and multiplexes them into one optical signal, ready to be launched on the WDM line.
DEMUX side
The wavelength demultiplexer component receives the WDM line signal and demultiplexes it into 8 chan-
nel plus one possible extra aggregate signal.
OADM application
Connecting the Extra Rx out access to the Extra Rx in access allows to pass–through the channels that
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
are not dropped and added. The board works in OADM configuration.
These boards are supplied in power by the PSC.
The optical characteristics are described in para. 5.3.2.2 on page 346.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 274 / 390
390
4.2.2 OADM units
4.2.2.1 8 channels OADM unit

The components, MUX and DEMUX used in the OADM boards are the same than those used in the OMDX
boards. Thus, 4 OADM boards are defined:

– OADM8100_M_S2_S, the dropped and added channels are the channels 42 to 50
– OADM8100_M_S1_S, the dropped and added channels are the channels 52 to 60
– OADM8100_M_L1_S, the dropped and added channels are the channels 30 to 38
– OADM8100_M_L2_S, the dropped and added channels are the channels 20 to 28
1510 nm
filter Optical IPL
Receiver IOPV
Monitor Rx out
SPV Rx out
ch #1
dropped channels
DEMUX ch #2
WDM Rx out
ch #3
ch #4
Line Rx in WDM
1–>8 ch #5
1510 nm ch #6
filter
ch #7
ch #8
Extra Rx out
Extra Tx in
ch #1
ch #2
added channels
ch #3
WDM Tx in
ch #4 WDM
8 –> 1 Line Tx out
ch #5
MUX
ch #6
ch #7
ch #8
Optical
OLOS Receiver
OOPV Monitor Tx out
Optical
Receiver
SPV Tx in
OPL
OOPV
Figure 183. OADM8: block–diagram
The OADM8 unit is used on the west or east side.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The 8 channels are dropped when all the other channels (pass–through) are sent on the extra–output port.
On the transmit side, the 8 concerned channels are added to the pass–through channels via the multiple-
xer and thus, the SPV (coming from the SPVM unit) is inserted using a WDM coupler.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 275 / 390
390
The function of the OADM4_x units is to extract and insert 4 channels between the 32 available.

Optical

IPL
Receiver IOPV
1510 nm
filter
Monitor Rx out
SPV Rx out
DEMUX
dropped channels
WDM Rx out
ch #1
Line Rx in WDM ch #2
1–>4 ch #3
ch #4
Extra Rx out
Extra Tx in
added channels
ch #1
WDM Tx in
ch #2 WDM
4–>1
ch #3 Line Tx out
ch #4
MUX
OLOS Optical
OOPV Receiver
SPV Tx in
Monitor Tx out
OPL Optical
OOPV Receiver
Figure 184. OADM4: block–diagram
The SPV channel is extracted and the signal is sent on a front panel connector. The 4 channels are
dropped and sent on a front panel connector. The aggregate of all the other channels (pass–through) is
also sent to a front panel connector to be connected to the multiplex.
On the transmit side, the 4 concerned channels are added to the pass–through channels via the multiple-
xer and thus, the SPV (coming from the SPVM unit). The output signal is monitored (detection of ILOS,
OOPV) and an external optical access is given to the operator for monitoring purpose too.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

The different possible sets of channels are the following: 20 to 23 – 25 to 28 – 30 to 33 – 35 to 38 – 42
to 45 – 47 to 50 – 52 to 55 – and 57 to 60.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 276 / 390
390
The function of the OADM2100_M_XX_S is to extract and insert 2 channels between the 32 available.
IPL
OOPV
SPV IN Optical
Receiver
OLOS Monitor
OOPV
extra–
input Optical
Receiver
MUX
ch #1
Output
ch #2
extra–
output
ch #2
SPV filter
Input
ch #1
DEMUX
Monitor
Optical
Receiver
SPV OUT
IPL
IOPV
Figure 185. Block diagram of the OADM2100_M_xx_S unit
The SPV channel is extracted and the signal is sent on a front panel connector. The two channels are
dropped while all the other channels are sent to a front–panel connector (extra–output).
On the transmit side, the concerned channel is added to the other channels (pass–through or just multipled
in an other board) via the multiplexer and thus, the SPV (coming from the SPVM unit) is inserted using
a coupler. The output signal is monitored (detection of ILOS, OOPV) and an external optical access is giv-
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
en to the operator for monitoring purpose too.

Available couple of channels per each OADM2 board: 30-31; 32–33; 35–36; 37–38; 47–48.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 277 / 390
390
4.2.2.4 1 channel OADM unit
The function of the OADM1100_M_XX_S units is to extract and insert 1 channel between the 32 available.

SPV IN
OPL OLOS Monitor

OOPV OOPV
Optical
Optical
Receiver
Receiver
MUX
extra–
input
Output
Add Ch
extra–
output
SPV filter
Monitor
Input DEMUX
Drop Ch
SPV OUT
Optical IPL
Receiver IOPV
Figure 186. OADM1100: block diagram
The SPV channel is extracted and the signal is sent on a front panel connector. The channel is dropped
while all the other channels are sent to a front–panel connector.
On the transmit side, the concerned channel is added to the other channels (pass–through or just multipled
in an other board) via the multiplexer and thus, the SPV (coming from the SPVM unit) is inserted using
coupler. The output signal is monitored (detection of ILOS, OOPV) and an external optical access is given
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
to the operator for monitoring purpose too.

The available channels are 25, 30, 31, 32, 33, 35, 36, 37, 38 in Long Band and 47, 48, 57 in Short Band.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 278 / 390
390
4.2.3 SPV_F_1310_1550
The function of the SPV_F_1310_1550 unit is used to multiplex / demultiplex one 1310 nm channel (for
instance coming from a 4xANY, one 1550 nm multiplexed signal and the SPV channel.
SPV IN
OPL OLOS Monitor

OOPVOOPV
Optical
Optical
Receiver
Receiver
COUPLER
1310
Output
1550
1310
SPV filter
Input
SPLITTER 1550
Monitor
Optical IPL
Receiver IOPV
SPV OUT
Figure 187. Block diagram of the SPV_F_1310_1550 unit
4.2.3.1 Description
At demux side, the SPV channel is extracted by a filter while at the mux side, a 95/5 coupler is used.
this board should moreover be able to accomodate whatever channel in the C–Band (and not only a chan-
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
nel at 1550 nm).

A 95/5 coupler is used to monitor the signal (power presence and monitoring connector) in both directions.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 279 / 390
390
4.2.4 SPV_F_C
This board is able to insert/extract the OSC channel to/from one 1310 nm channel or one 1550 nm chan-
nel.

Common SPV Filter
Extra
In Out
SPLITTER 10dB
SPV
Out
Optical
Receiver
Optical Input LOS IPL
Power Detection
SPV Coupler Common

Extra
In Out
COUPLER
SPV
In
Optical
10dB Receiver
Optical Output LOS OPL
Power Detection
N.B. For Input power and Output power alarm detection, the optical receiver is calibrated at 1550 nm.
Figure 188. Block diagram of the SPV_F_C unit
4.2.4.1 Description
The board allows to perform both mux and demux function of two signals which are either C–band WDM
signal or Second window’s signal (B&W or 1310 nm) by extra ports and Supervisory channel (1510 nm)
by SPV ports. The single channel can be extracted or inserted to the multiplexed signal.
2 different channel filterings are available:
– 1310 / 1510 nm
– 1510 / 1550 nm
This compact board can be plugged in slots 28-35 or 38-45 on a 1696MSPAN shelf and in a slots 9–10
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
or 11 in the 1696MS_C shelf and sub–shelf.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 280 / 390
390
4.2.4.2 Board location in the system
This board has to take place in both the – 1696MSPAN and 1696MS_C shelves. The basic configuration
may be with one wavelength among predefined WDM range or B&W user signal, however it could be set
with a multiplexed signal.

Transponder unit
Transponder unit
SPV_M Transmission Line SPV_M
SPV_F unit SPV_F unit

West Side East Side
Figure 189. Position of SPV_F_C unit in a transmission line

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 281 / 390
390
4.3 Optical Amplifier (OAC)
4.3.1 Description

The Optical Amplifiers are designed to amplify the C band’s wavelengths in WDM transmission system.
This functionality is necessary to extend the transmission capacity of the optical fiber’s network.
They can perform optical amplification through the optical line as a booster, in line, OADM repeater and
pre–amplifier.
The Optical Amplifiers provide up to +17 dBm output power (for 32 wavelengths) in C Band without exter-
nal pump module.
A tunable attenuator (VOA) allows a good gain flatness.
This unit contains two independent stages : a pre–amplifier and a booster.
The board receives electrical data from the Equipment Controller and from the Craft Terminal. It receives
optical data from SPV and from the OADM/OMDX or another optical amplifier.
The aim of this boards is to allow an output Power Per Channel (P/ch) of
– 2 dBm for 32 channels max loading
and to allow a correct behaviour whatever the number of channels and whatever the variation of the loss
at the input of the pre–amplifier.
There are four types of optical amplifiers
• OAC1 (OFA 22/9), introduced in R.1.1, used for short spans transmission (metro amplifier)
• OAC1_L (OFA 28/9), introduced in R.2.0, used for long spans transmission (regional amplifier).
• OAC2 (OFA 22/9), introduced in R.2.2, used for short spans transmission (metro amplifier)
• OAC2_L (OFA 28/9), introduced in R.2.2, used for long spans transmission (regional amplifier).
OAC2 and OAC2_L, the new boards introduced in R.2.2, compared to OAC1 and OAC1_L are designed to
– decrease power consumption.
In the 1696MS_C shelf, only OAC2 and OAC2_L can be used.
Table 36. sums up the main differences between OAC1, OAC1_L, OAC2 and OAC2_L
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 282 / 390
390
Table 36. Main differences between OAC1, OAC1_L, OAC2 and OAC2_L optical amplifiers
Feature Values
Optical amplifier OAC1 OAC1_L OAC2 OAC2_L

Introduced in re-
R.1.1 R.2.0 R.2.2 R.2.2
lease
Gain block 22/9 28/9 22/9 28/9
Example of Span – 1 span x 21 dB – 1 span x 27 dB – 1 span x 21 dB – 1 span x 27 dB
performance (32 – 1 span x 28 dB – 1 span x 29 dB – 1 span x 28 dB – 1 span x 29 dB
channels x (with double (with double (with double (with double
10Gbps or 2.5
stage amplifier stage amplifier stage amplifier stage amplifier
Gbps)
at IN and OUT at IN and OUT at IN and OUT at IN and OUT
of the node of the node of the node of the node
– up to 7 spans – up to 4 spans x – up to 7 spans – up to 4 spans x
x19 dB 22dB x19 dB 22dB
Pre–amplifier Cooler Cooler
Booster @ 1480 nm @ 980 nm
VOA tuning fail
Managed from R.2.2
alarm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 283 / 390
390
Block diagram description (see Figure 190. on page 285)
The optical part consists of

• two optical gain block modules, 22/9 for OAC1/OAC2 and 28/9 for OAC1_L/OAC2_L (1st

and 2nd stage; they can be a preamplifier and a booster
• an optical attenuator (VOA) allowing to fix the attenuation before the first stage of the amplifier
and to compensate the variation of the span attenuation. The VOA input and output are accessi-
ble to the operator via front panel connectors.
• four 99/1 couplers for the 1st and 2nd stage signal monitoring (input and output)
• a DEMUX 1550/1510 (SPV filter) for the extraction of the supervisory channel (SPV OUT). It
separates data and supervisory channel
• a 95/5 coupler for the insertion of the supervisory channel (SPV IN). It couples data and super-
visory channel
• monitoring photodiodes (optical recevers).
The electrical part consists of
• two optical gain block modules for regulations, performing
– output optical power regulation : a comparaison is made between the measured optical
output power OOPV and the needed optical output power OPAV which is either calculated
by the FPGA (control unit) or fixed by the user
– temperature regulation: in each gain block a thermistance allows to evaluate the tempera-
ture inside the gain block. Thereafter a comparison is done between a reference voltage
and the thermistance’s voltage to determine the control current
• alarm generation
• card presence indicator
• Remote Inventory
• power supply interface with alarms generation. The board is supplied by –48V voltage from
batteries via backpanel, and by +3.6V voltage from the PSC card. On the board, 3 different vo-
latges are used: +5.5V; –5.5V; +3.6V.
• visual system alarming by means of 5 leds located on front panel (PW, OOS, ABN, APSD,
HW).
The card mismatch is managed via information (ECID) stored in an EEPROM.

As the maximum power is +17 dBm, the amplifiers operates in safety class 1M.
In the interconnection stage (between the 1st stage output and the 2nd stage input) can be located a DCU
and/or an OADM/OMDX and/or a MVAC board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 284 / 390
390
285 / 390
VOA IN Variable Optical
Attenuator VOA OUT
1st stage
99/1 coupler 99/1 coupler
OUT
2nd
stage IN
Monitor
ILOS1 ILOS2
3AL 95278 AA AA
Optical Optical Monitor
390
Receiver IOPV1 Receiver IOPV2
Figure 190. Amplifier boards block–diagram

SPV filter
99/1 coupler
1st stage 2nd stage 99/1 coupler
1550 nm
2nd stage
OUT
1
1
2
1st stage 95/5 coupler
1510 nm
IN
Pump Optical OLOS1 Pump Optical OLOS2
laser 1 IOPV1 laser 2 IOPV2
Receiver Receiver
Monitor
Optical
Monitor
EPOPV Receiver
SPV IN
SPV OUT
EXTRA
Alarm & PUMP IN
Control
Restart Button Unit
2
01
Card
presence
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
4.3.2 Way of working
The way of working is described in the next figure.

P1 P2
INPUT 1 OUTPUT
VOA 1 2
DCU
OADM
DCU
OUTPUT 2 1 INPUT
VOA
P2 P1
Figure 191. Optical amplifiers configuration
In order to use the amplifier with its optimum performances, the output power per channel must be constant
whatever the number of channels and whatever the variation of loss of the previous span.
In order to achieve such a requirement, two tuning mechanisms are foreseen:
– Variation of the span loss, for a given number of channels
– Variation of the number of channels, for a given span loss.
4.3.2.1 Variation of the span loss, for a given number of channels
The VOA attenuation is adjusted manually or semi–automatically according to the previous span attenua-
tion in order to match with the EOL span losses. At the amplifier installation, the VOA is set in order to match
with the foreseen EOL span losses. Then, when the span changes, the VOA is tuned in order to always
match with that EOL span losses.
EOL span losses
P1
Current span losses
VOA 1
1
P2
Local Board
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 192. Span variation compensation
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 286 / 390
390
For a given number of channels, when the previous span loss increases (ie. when the total input power
decreases), the total output powers of the 1st and 2nd stage have a tendency to follow the corresponding
linear curve. As a consequence, when the span loss variation becomes greater than 1 dB, the VOA attenu-
ation must be tuned in order to keep the total losses constant.
The range of variation of the interstage attenuation is included between 1 and 15 dB.
Two VOA tuning functions are foreseen:
– manual setting: the operator enters the value of the VOA (VOA_OP).
– semi–automatic setting: the value of the VOA is calculated by the NE via parameters entered by the
operator. This action is not automatic: the operator must command it.
4.3.2.2 Variation of the number of channels, for a given span loss
Refer to Figure 193. on page 288.
Two pump tuning functions are foreseen:
– manual setting: the output powers of the 1st and 2nd stages are fixed and set by the operator (inde-
pendently from the input power)
– automatic setting:
• 1st stage: for a given EOL previous span loss, when the number of channels changes, the 1st
stage output power is tuned without operator intervention
• 2st stage: for a given interstage (IT) attenuation, when the number of channels changes, the
2st stage output power is tuned without operator intervention
The output power of the 1st and 2nd stage is adjusted automatically according to the input power of the
corresponding stage:
– 1st stage pump: it is enslaved on the 1st stage output power, which value is given as a function of
the input power and the previous EOL span losses.
For a given EOL previous span loss and for a given IT (interstage) attenuation, when the number of
channels changes (ie. when the total input power changes), the total output power follows the corre-
sponding linear curve. The full arrows correspond to a number of channels increasing. The dashed
arrows correspond to a number of channels decreasing. When the number of channels is less than
4, the output power of the 1st & 2nd stage remains constant.
– 2nd stage: it is enslaved on the 2nd stage output power, which value is given as a function of the input
power of the second stage and the interstage attenuation.
For a given IT attenuation, when the number of channels changes (ie. when the total input power
changes), the total output power of the 2nd stage follows the corresponding linear curve. The full ar-
rows correspond to a number of channels increasing. The dashed arrows correspond to a number
of channels decreasing. When the number of channels is less than 4, the output power of the 1st &
2nd stage remains constant.
The nominal operating configuration of the optical amplifiers (Pout = +17dBm) is associated with a 32
channels loading. Consequently, when 32 channels are loaded, the output power per channel is about
2 dBm.
For a given EOL span losses or IT, the range of variation of the total input and output powers is 9 dB (from
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
32 to 4 channels).
When the number of channels is less than 4, the output power of the 1st & 2nd stage remains constant.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 287 / 390
390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
+8
+3
+17
+12
Pout 2
Pout 1
01
(dBm)
(dBm)
–12
–23
–9
–20
–6 –3
IT = 15dB SPAN = 31dB
0
first stage tuning pump
–17 –14 –11 –8
3
second stage tuning pump

–5
6
–2
9
390
SPAN = 16dB
3AL 95278 AA AA
2 4
SPAN = 13dB
Figure 193. Amplifier tuning for number of channels changes (previous span loss constant)
Pin 2 (dBm)
Pin 1 (dBm)
288 / 390
4.3.3 Optical characteristics
See para. 5.3.6 on page 354.

4.3.4 Optical safety
“IEC 60825–2, Ed.03: Safety of Laser ptroducts – Part 2: Safety of optical fibre commu-
nication system”: in restricted areas no APSD scheme is required below +21.3 dBm out-
put power (see para. 3.6, 4.5.1, table D.1).
Amplified or not amplified equipment is always well below this limit.

Alcatel recommend the “APSD disable” mode (default mode).
The next table describes the way of working of the optical amplifiers. The boards may be in
– APSD disable state
– APSD disable forced ON or OFF state
– APSD enable state (not available).
The following tables sum up the way of working for each APSD state.
a) APSD disable state
Table 37. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD disable
alarms
consecutive action
1st stage Input 2nd stage Input
ILOS1 – ShutDown of the 1st stage
ILOS2 – ShutDown of the 2nd stage
b) APSD disable forced ON or OFF state
Table 38. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD disable forced ON/OFF
alarms
consecutive action
ILOS1 – 1st stage forced ON / OFF. No action.

ILOS2 – 2nd stage forced ON / OFF. No action.
c) APSD enable state (not available)
N.B. In current Release OAC APSD is always disabled.
Table 39. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD enable
alarms
consecutive action
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ILOS1 – Shutdown of the 1st stage and 2nd stage of the same
board.
ILOS2 – Shutdown of the 2nd stage.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 289 / 390
390
4.4 Controller
4.4.1 ESC board

The ESC (Equipment and Shelf Controller) board is the hardware platform designed to support the Equip-
ment Controller (EC) functions and the Shelf Controller (SC) functions for the 1696 MSPAN and
1696MS_C equipment from the release 1.3.
The EC functions has in charge of the processing activities concerning the “Virtual Equipment Control Ele-
ment” (VECE) function:
– Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF)

– Message Communication Function (MCF)
The SC function of ESC has in charge of the processing activities concerning the “Physical Equipment
Control Element” (PECE) function:
– Physical Machine Management Function (PMMF)

– Basic Process Control Function (BPCF)
It provides the resources to support the SW functions related to the physical machine control and manage-
ment and configuration provisioning.
In an Expansion Shelf, the ESC board needs only to provide a SC functionality. It is the same board, and
its identification is made through ”shelf id” and ”slot id” numbers.
The ESC consists in a double processor board. It is mainly composed of :

– A ESC mother board,
– A daughter board achieving the EC function,
– A daughter board achieving the SC function,
– A non volatile mass storage device PCMCIA 2.1 compatible.
Each of these functions (EC and SC) are realized using a PQSCC daughter board. They are plugged on
the ESC mother board. The PQSCC module is developed in order to provide a common HW (and SW)
platform for different applications requiring a Shelf Controller (SC) function. The processors used are
members of Motorola MPC860 family.
Various kinds of serial communication channels and parallel I/O ports for alarm & status signals are pro-
vided by the ESC card.
Thanks to the ESC board, it is no more necessary to plug a LAN_Q card in each shelf since the ESC is
now able to manage the SPI bus. One only needs to plug a LAN_Q card in the master shelf if one needs
the LAN supervision functionality.
The flash backup capability permits the management system to copy files back and forth using an ftp
service, between the flash card on the ESC in slot 1 and the ESC in slot 24 of the master shelf.
4.4.1.1 EQUICO to ESC Upgrade procedure information
When the system software is upgraded from version 1.1, both EQUICO boards (SC+EC) should be re-
placed by one ESC board in the master shelf, and one ESC board in expansion shelves in slot 1. The up-
grade procedure is perform with the Craft terminal Equipment or OS (1353SH) and for this:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– Refer to 3AL 86602 ABAA–PGZZA document.
N.B. The procedure of NE software management is detailled on the Operator Handbook.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 290 / 390
390
4.4.2 Supervision units (SPVM2, SPVM_H)
The ”SPV–M” cards are used for the management of the 1696 supervision and service channels.
The set of service channels managed by the supervision unit is a subset of the section overhead of STM1
frame, as defined in ITU Recommendation G70X (March 1994); the unit will be able to multiplex/demulti-
plex the optical service channels in 2048 kb/s or 4864 kb/s proprietary supervision frames.
In case of a 4864 kb/s supervision data channels, the SPV–M will multiplex/demultiplex them in two 2048
kb/s frames, only one of these contains the supervision information, the other is an extra traffic frames.
Furthermore, others four bi–directional 2048 kb/s user auxiliary data channels are provided for extra traffic
needs. A matrix is used to interconnect these channels.
The supervision units types availabale are: SPVM2 and SPVM_H.
The supervision unit (SPVM) is composed of

– one optical part (SPV channel receiver and transmitter)
– two main electrical blocks:
• a matrix to route the 2 Mbit/s inputs
• an FPGA dedicated to the supervision frames management.
From Rel. 1.3, is available the SPVM + OW (SPVM2) board, able to drop the 2 Mb/s extra channels and
the audio channel.
In Rel. 2.0, has been introduced the SPVM_H board; it provides all the features of the SPVM2 board but
manages only one Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC).
In the following is briefly described the block scheme (see Figure 194. on page 292)
The unit is composed of a main board, implementing the larger part of the functionalities, and two daughter
boards (TX–SPV–M) devoted to optical transmitter. The board can be split in three main parts:
– 2/4 Mbps MUX/DEMUX (gate array). It multiplexes/demultiplexes a 4864 kb/s stream into two 2048
kb/s channels. It extracts and inserts from/to these streams three auxiliary service channels.
– Supervision Manager (FPGA); it can be divided in the cited major functions:

• Matrix function between the four users channels at 2048 kb/s, the streams of the supervison
channels processed by the OSC MUXs and two internal streams reserved to the mux/demux
of the service channels contained in the supervision channels. In case of a 2048kb/s supervi-
sion frame it can by–pass the OSC MUXs
• Supervision frames and service channel management extract/insert the slots containing F1, E1,
E2, from the supervision frames. The F1, E1, E2 service channels and those coming from the
OSC MUXs, which is supervision information coming from both sides (EST and WEST), are re–
routed to the ESC board
• OSC MUX configuration: this block function gives the access to the configuration and alarm pins
of the two OSC MUXs via internal registers
• SPI interface which assumes the software interface. Through this interface, the register of the
Supervision Manager is accessible in read and write sequences. It permits the application soft-
ware to configure the SPV–M.
– TX–SPV–M is a daughter board containing the optical unit (transmitter), having in charge of transmit-
ting the SPVM frame on an optical fiber support in both sides (east and west), if required. This function
is realized with two LASERS at 1510 nm wavelenght. The LASERS are supported by two identical
daugter boards (TX–SPV–M), managed by SPV–M.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The Remote Inventory of the board is available via the SPI bus.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 291 / 390
390
AGGREGATE AGGREGATE AGGREGATE AGGREGATE
SIGNAL (32 CH) OSC (32 CH + OSC) OAC OAC (32 CH + OSC) OSC SIGNAL (32 CH)
ADD/DROP ADD/DROP
1550 NM FROM/TO LINE FROM/TO LINE 1550 NM

1510 nm 4Mb: OSC (D1–D3; D4–D12) + UDC
1510 nm 4Mb: OSC (D1–D3; D4–D12) + UDC

FRONT PANEL BACK PANEL
TELEPHONE
HANDSET (J1) TO UIC2 TO UIC1 TO ESC
UDC (2 x 2 Mbps)
EOW (E2 at 64K)
Voice Channel
TDM1 (2M)
TDM2 (2M)
TX–SPVM TX–SPVM
OPTICAL OPTICAL
INTERFACE INTERFACE
2Mbps 2Mbps
FRONT FRONT
PANEL OSC OSC PANEL
4Mbps 2/4Mb 2/4Mb 4Mbps
λ/E MUX/ MUX/ E/λ
OSC+UDC DEMUX 2Mbps 2Mbps DEMUX OSC+UDC
UDC UDC
SUPERVISION MANAGER
SPI INTERFACE
Figure 194. SPVM2 block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 292 / 390
390
4.4.2.1 Description of the supported functionalities
The following functionalities are supported:

1) Management of one or two bidirectional supervision streams at 2 048 Kbit/s, one for Line termi-
nal applications and one for each side of the link in back–to–back or OADM applications.
2) Management of Data Communication Channels DCCm and DCCr; four data streams are made
available to the Equipment Controller (EC) via a backpanel bus, and are used for network mana-
gement.
3) Management of K1/K2 data stream at 128 Kbit/s; this data stream (terminated in the unit) is
made available to the equipment controller.
4) Management of E2 audio channel: The default configuration enables to drop the audio channel.
It is possible to call a specific NE or to make a conference call. The phone number of the NE
is set with the two front panel coding wheels. dial #00 for a conference call and #XX (with XX
strictly greater than 10 for a specific call).
The Line Terminal or back–to–back terminals and OADM configurations are done by software.
4.4.2.1.1 Functional Description of the configurations
As described on two following figures the data of OSC channel at 1510 nm are sent to the matrix into a
2 Mbit/s signal to the supervision frame management functional block. This block generates one/or two
TDM signals according to the NE configuration.
(daughter board)
Tx1 optical
transmitter
MCC
OMDX,
OSC OADM
WDM Rx
1510 nm
or OAC
Matrix board
Rx1 optical
receiver
Supervision frame
management
SPVM
TDM1
ESC board
Figure 195. SPVM board in a Line Terminal configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 293 / 390
390
West East
(daughter board) (daughter board)
Tx2 optical Tx1 optical
transmitter transmitter

OMDX, MCC MCC OMDX,

OADM
OSC 2
WDM Rx
OSC 1 OADM
1510 nm 1510 nm
or OAC or OAC
Matrix board
board Rx2 optical Rx1 optical
receiver receiver
Supervision frame
management
SPVM TDM2 TDM1
ESC board
Figure 196. SPVM board in an OADM or Back–To–Back configuration
N.B. When the network comprises NEs connected in a ring, at least one NE must be configured with
the SPVM board in ”Local Clock” configuration (to avoid clock loop). SPVM board for the others
NE can be configured in ”Remote Clock” configuration.
User channels
The 2Mbps and 64Kbps channels exchanged with UIC, are drop–insert connected by default.
4.4.2.3 Management of two SPVM boards
From the Release 1.3 and in a configuration where a CPE is linked to a 1696MS in a ring, the 1696MS
is able to manage the first SPVM board (East and West of the Ring), plus one SPVM managing the OSC
to/from CPE(s).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 294 / 390
390
4.4.3 Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card (OSMC)
The Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card (OSMC) is used along with the MVAC board as a key element of
the automatic equalization process into the 1696MS system, providing the ITU–T entire C–band monito-
ring function in terms of channel power and wavelength (no OSNR).

up to 8
monitored
points)
MP1
1x8
fiber– Optical Alarm&
optic Channel Control
switch Monitoring Unit
MP8
electrical interfaces
Front panel PC
card presence
2
PC Electrical Link
OSMC
Figure 197. OMSC block diagram
The purpose of this board is to measure the power per channel at several points of a node.
This board receives its optical input signals from any point of the tranmission path and it measures the
power of each channel.
Up to 8 locations (4 per direction) are possible on monitoring or direct ports (see Figure 198. on page 295)
– before and after first and second stage of an amplifier
– before a demultiplexer
– after a multiplexer.
Rx Tx
1 2
Rx Tx
OSMC
Tx Rx
2 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Tx Rx
Figure 198. OSMC connection (measured points)
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 295 / 390
390
The front panel PC electrical interface is used to send the data directly to a PC.
For the absolute channels power measurement, an offset (called calibration factor) must be available in
order to consider the loss of the monitoring splitter. Each power is given before the monitoring splitter.

Functional Description

The 8 x input ports are connected to a 1 x 8 electro mechanical latching fiber optic switch: when the system
wants to select a specific port, it sends an order thru the SPI bus that in turns make the Control Unit to
properly bias the switch command pins by making it switching to the selected position. As soon as the new
position is raised the switch will rest in that position until a new stimuli occurs.
The output WDM signal is then forwarded to the OCM module through a 90/10 TAP coupler, the 10%
branch being devoted to a broadband photo–detection, performed by a PIN photodiode followed by a loga-
ritmic amplification in order to provide system calibration.
The OCM goal is to perform a spectral analisys of the C–band, from 192 THz (ch#20) to 196 THz (ch#60),
every 100 GHz, as regards channel power and wavelength.
The Alarms and Control unit provides a digital interface between peripheral components (OCM, Optical
switch..) the NE needs to get access to and the SPIDER local interface it is connected to. Main functions are
– channel power calibration and board calibration
– OCM interfacing, data post–processing and alarms generation
– optical switch control and monitoring
– photo detection and board temperature digital processing
– OOS led control
The SPI interface terminates the SPI bus used for control and monitoring between OSMC (slave) and ESC.
The two EEPROMs provides Remote Inventory data and board specific parameters (ECID).
The power supply module performs incoming –48V rails filtering, over–voltage and current protections,
board feeding generating the needed voltages (+3.3V, +5V..), alarms monitoring.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 296 / 390
390
4.4.4 1696MS_C Master Intershelf Link (I–LINK_M)
This board is dedicated to the 1696MS_C shelf and allows to manage up to three shelves (one master
shelf and two slave shelves) by using only one ESC board (cost–saving solution).
The I–LINK_M board is located in the master compact shelf; it has to be used in conjunction with the I–
LINK_S board (slave board) located in each slave shelf, to which it has to be linked to be able to stack up
to three subracks. Hence
– the ESC board has to be plugged in slot 1 of the master shelf
– the I–LINK_M board has to be plugged in slot 6 of the master shelf
– the I–LINK_S board has to be plugged in slot 1 of each slave shelf.
The I–LINK_M is mainly dedicated to connect the SPI bus (and the card presence signals) from the ESC
to the slave shelves, where no ESC unit is provided.
The connection between I–LINK_M and each I–LINK_S is done by using dedicated cables.
After having provisioned it, swapping cables is not possible.
When the connection between I–LINK_M and other I–LINK_S is removed, a Card Absent alarm is raised
on every board of the expansion shelves.
BACK FRONT
+5V
I–Link_M
PANEL PANEL
M1 + +3.3V
Power
48Vdc – +2.5V
supply
VBatt HWF
+3.6V
card pres
sLAVE SHELF 1
RS485 CONNECTOR
Transceiver SPI
M2 M7
SPI Card Presence
Power Interface
Supplies SLOT ID Card Presence
(Spider)
Bus SLAVE 1 sLAVE SHELF 2
BOARD CONNECTOR
REMOTE
DATA
INVENTORY SPI
(ECID)
EEPROM EEPROM M8
Card Presence
Card Presence
Bus SLAVE 2 sLAVE SHELF 3
CONNECTOR
(NOT USED)
SPI
M5
Card Presence Bus M9
Card Card Presence
Presence FPGA RS485
Transceivers Card Presence
Bus SLAVE 3
Figure 199. I–Link_M block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 297 / 390
390
4.4.5 1696MS_C Slave Intershelf Link (I–LINK_S)
This board is dedicated to the 1696MS_C slave shelf giving the possibility to add up to two 1696MS_C
slave shelves to the master shelf.

Using the I–Link_S unit allows to save the cost of the reuse of an ESC unit giving the possibility to link the

SPI bus and the Card Presence signal of each slave shelf to the master shelf, thus connecting these sig-
nals to the ESC boards, only provided in Master shelf.
The I–LINK_S board has to be plugged in each slave compact shelf; it has to be used in conjunction with
the I–LINK_M board (master board) located in master shelf, to which it has to be linked to be able to stack
up to three subracks (1 master shelf and two slave shelves). Hence
– the I–LINK_S board has to be plugged in slot 1 of each slave shelf.
– the I–LINK_M board has to be plugged in slot 6 of the master shelf
The connection between I–LINK_M and each I–LINK_S is done by using dedicated cables.
After having provisioned it, swapping cables is not possible.
When the connection between I–LINK_M and other I–LINK_S is removed, a Card Absent alarm is raised
on every board of the expansion shelves.
The I–Link_S unit includes

– SPIDER, Remote Inventory and Data EEPROM (ECID)
– 1 connector for the master shelf.
BACK FRONT
I–Link_S
PANEL +5V PANEL
M1 + +3.3V
Power
48Vdc – supply +2.5V
VBatt HWF
+3.6V
card pres
RS485
Transceiver
M2
SPI
Power Interface
Supplies SLOT ID (Spider)
BOARD
REMOTE sLAVE SHELF
DATA
INVENTORY CONNECTOR
(ECID)
EEPROM EEPROM SPI
M10
Card Presence
Card Presence Bus
M5
Card Presence Bus
Card
Presence FPGA RS485
Transceivers
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 200. I–Link_S block diagram
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 298 / 390
390
4.5 General user interfaces
Two main functions are supported by the various small units: provide the power supply to the other units
and provide the electrical interfaces to the operators.
The various functions are divided into small boards plugged in the bottom of the shelf (cf. Figure 201. ).
Each of these boards supports a SPI Bus interface and some card presence wires.
LAN
access

OMDX + EXP + SPV
QB
Matrix Slot
Matrix Slot
OMDX
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
ESC
Power supply B
Power supply A
User Interface
User Interface
L
P A H R U U P
S optical protection units K A optical protection units I I S
N I C C C
C C
FANC
House Keeping
Rack alarms
Figure 201. Electrical access, slot description

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 299 / 390
390
4.5.1 LAN board
IE–LAN INPUT TP – RJ45

ETHERNET

INTERFACE

IE–LAN OUT ADAPTER
COAX TRANSC
hex rotary switches

EQTYPE
SHELF–ID
N.B. If a wire is plugged on J45, BNC is un-
available.
Figure 202. Block diagram of control LAN board
4.5.1.1 Lan board purposes
The purposes of the LAN board are the following:
– to provide the physical layer for the QB interface between the Equipment shelf (ESC board) and an
external supervisor (e.g. 1353SH),.
– to provide the 4 bits Equipment type Codification, necessary to give to the application stored in the
Equuipment Controller.
– to provide the 8 bits Shelf IDentification number (i.e.: MAC address), necessary to build up the IP
address of the shelf where the LAN board is installed.
4.5.1.2 Lan board description
The LAN board has to be plugged in the slot 26 for the Maser shelf (LAN_Q) or slot #8 of 1696MS_C shelf.
It is linked to the ESC board by backpanel link.
A second LAN (LAN_I) in the slot 27 is used to link to the Slave shelf with a LAN board on the slot 27.
The link to an external supervision equipment is ensured by 2 BNC connectors or by one RJ 45 connector.
The Equipment Type Codification is ensured by the hexadecimal rotary switch CW3.
The Shelf IDentification is ensured by the two hexadecimal rotary switches CW1 and CW2.
N.B. The LAN_I functionality is not foreseen in a 1696MS_C shelf.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 300 / 390
390
4.5.1.3 Lan board Hardware setting
Equipment Type Codification

The hexadecimal rotary switch CW3 is in charge of setting up the equipment type. The CW3 factory
setting is the value ’5’, for the 1696MSPAN. It must not be changed.
Shelf Identification number
The hexadecimal rotary switches CW1 and CW2 are in charge of setting up the shelf Identification
number. The CW1 factory setting is the value ’B’ and the CW2 factory setting is the value ’F’. These
default values are the identification number of the master shelf.
For the different shelves, the switches setting values are:
Shelf Slot Function Switch settings
CW1 CW2 CW3
Master 26 ELAN B F 5
Master 27 ILAN B F 5
Expansion 1 26 ELAN 7 F 5
Expansion 1 27 ILAN 7 F 5
Expansion 2 26 ELAN 3 F 5
Expansion 2 27 ILAN 3 F 5
Expansion 3 26 ELAN E F 5
Expansion 3 27 ILAN E F 5
A B C
CW 1 CW 2 CW 3
D E F
Front Panel Back Panel

Rotary Wheels 6 pins host for jumper
Figure 203. LAN board settings
It is not necessary to configure expansion shelves in this order, but it is necessary to give the corresponding
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
expansion number to the craft Terminal.

For example if only one drop shelf is present, its LAN baord can be configured (3, F, 5) but then to be de-
fined as ”Expansion 2”.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 301 / 390
390
Jumper configuration
For operation with the ESC, 1696 MS R1.3 and later, the jumper setting equipment for all LAN cards is
the same regardless of which slot they are installed in. Only the following jumper settings are permitted:

• No jumper
• Jumper between pins A–D
N.B. During NE upgrade from R1.1, the jumper settings of all installed LAN cards should be checked
and modified as necessary to comply with the above.
For a Compact NE (1696MS_C), the switches setting values are mandatory (B, F, 5).
4.5.2 HouseKeeping board (HK)
8 house–keeping accesses are provided in both direction (8 inputs and 8 outputs).
The HK board is plugged in the slot 36 of the master shelf.
Connector: sub–D 25 pins (see section 2.4.2.1, page 111).
4.5.3 Rack Alarm Interface (RAI)
The RAI board monitors the rack alarms. Each shelf (master and expansion shelf) is equipped with this
card in the slot 37in 1696MSPAN and in slot 9 or 10 in master shelf of 1696MS_C.
1696 MSPAN alarms are analysed either by the Equipment Shelf Controller or directly by the Rack Alarm
Interface board. In function of the importance of these alarms, the ESC generates signals to turn on LEDs
on PDU or TRU card and so to alert the user.
2 ways of working are available:
– for the Interfacing with the PDU

The RAI cards in the same rack are linked to each other as shown on Figure 204. And the RAI
card in the master shelf is linked with the PDU.
– for the Interfacing with the TRU

The same way of working can be proposed, but also a direct link between each shelf and the
TRU (cf. Figure 204. ).
The RAI card inputs are alarms coming from the FAN card, from the PSC, from the shelf just below (if any)
and from the Equipment Controller (for the RAI card in the master shelf). Taking the various inputs into
account the rack lamps are lit on or off.
Rack lamps are different in ETSI and ANSI worlds. The RAI card is made to interface with both standards.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 302 / 390
390
Rack Alarms
It is used to connect the rack lamps. These lamps differ from the ETSI rack to the ANSI one.
Table 40. PDU Front Panel LED Markings
Marking LED Color DESCRIPTION
CRI red Critical: critical alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
MAJ red Major: major alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
MIN yellow Major: minor alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
RACK red Rack Alarm: alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack or in
the PDU
Table 41. TRU Front Panel LED Markings
Marking LED Color DESCRIPTION
URG red Urgent: major alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
NURG yellow Non urgent: minor alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
ATTD red Attended: aknowledged URG or NURG alarm
SIG PRSC green signal presence (power on)
Connectors: (see section 2.4.2.2, page 111).

– SUB–D 9 pins female
– RJ11 6pins female.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 303 / 390
390
OPTINEX RACK
NEBS 2000 RACK

Top rack unit

Power Distribution Unit
Air deflector Air deflector
Slot 37
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 204. Electrical links between RAI cards (slot 37) and TRU & PDU
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 304 / 390
390
4.5.4 User Interfaces Card (UIC)
4.5.4.1 Description
Some user information are carried by the SPV channel: they are extracted from the SPV frame by the
SPVM board and access via dedicated electrical connectors on the User Interfaces cards.
Those small boards have to be plugged under the corresponding SPVM board and in the slot beside.
SPVM
AUXA2
AUXA1
AUXB2
AUXB1
SPI SPI
NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ

G703 G703 G703 G703
AUX1, AUX2 AUX1, AUX2
UIC UIC
2Mbps USER ACCESS 2Mbps USER ACCESS
Figure 205. 2 Mbit/s back–panel links between UIC Cards and the SPVM unit
The E2 analogic voice channel is available through a jack in the front panel of the SPVM board.
Auxiliary Channels Interfaces:

– up to two 2 Mb/s bi–directional links (user 2 Mb/s) – G 703
– one analogic link.
N.B. In default configuration the E2 channel is configured in ”drop/insert” configuration.

In a CPE configuation, auxiliary channels are in a hardware configuration (fixed).
N.B. The UIC possibility is provided for 1696MS and not for 1696MS_C Equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 305 / 390
390
4.6 Switching Protection (OPC)
4.6.1 Single and Multi Mode Optical Protection Cards

4.6.1.1 Description
See Figure 206. on page 307. The purpose of this protection unit is to perform passive OCh protection
(linear configuration), OSNC Protection (ring configuration).
There are five types of Optical Protection Card (OPC), listed in the following:
• Single Mode OPC with jumpers (SM OPC)
• Multi Mode OPC with jumpers (MM OPC)
• Single Mode OPC with connectors (SM OPC FCP)
• Multi Mode OPC with connectors (MM OPC FCP)
• Multi Mode OPC with connectors 850 nm (MM OPC 850)
Only OPC cards with connectors can be used with all interface cards (MCC, OCC10, 4xANY).
The main difference between the Single Mode OPC and the Multi Mode OPC (with connectors and with
jumpers) boards is the 50/50 Rx optical splitter:
• the SM OPCs have a single mode splitter
• the MM OPCs have a multi mode splitter and a higher optical loss.
The OPC board can be connected to

– two transponders (protected channel / protecting channel)
– two drawers of two different 4xANY (_S, _P) boards.
It can be placed in slots 28 to 35 and in slots 38 to 45, just below the two transponders/4xANY.
As an example,
– if the two transponders are plugged in slots 4 and 5, to perform the channel protection the OPC is
plugged in slot 28 or 29
– if the two 4xANY_P are plugged in slots 4,5 and 6,7 to perform the channel protection the up to four
OPCs (MM OPC 850) are plugged in slots 28, 29, 30, 31.
The signal coming from the client is connected on RX input and crosses the board through a 3 dB splitter.
By means of the RX 1&2 OUT OPC cables/connectors, it is then sent to the two transponders (RX user
inputs), placed in the slots just above in the double shelf.
The signal coming from the WDM world is transmitted by the two adjacent transponders (user Tx outputs)
to the inputs of the other splitter of the OCh protection unit (TX1IN and TX2IN). The selected signal is sent
to the client via the Tx OUT port.
On each board are located

– two broadband (1310 nm and 1550 nm) 3 dB splitters/couplers for SM/MM OPC and SM/MM OPC FCP
– two 850 nm 3 dB splitters/couplers for MM OPC 850
Depending on the configuration, are available:
• a single mode splitter on RX line of the SM OPC
• a multi mode splitter on RX line of the MM OPC
• a single mode coupler on TX line of both the SM and MM OPCs.
LOS detection and power measurement are provided on the following input signals
• Rx IN, coming from the client
• Tx 1 IN and Tx 2 IN, coming from the main and spare transponders / 4xANY_P
by means of three 95/5 couplers (one per monitored signal) which extract the 5% of the received optical
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
signals and send each of them to a photodiode (optical receiver) performing LOS detection and measure-
ments. The LOS alarm is sent to the Alarm Interface and then to:
• the two transponders / 4xANY_P via backpanel connections
• the ESC board via the SPI bus.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 306 / 390
390
The selection of the signal is made by the transponders.
The Remote Inventory data are available via the SPI bus.
Two external voltages are supplied by the PSC units. On–board fuse protection and hardware failure con-
trol are available.
to transponders/4xANY_P drawers
3dB optical RX OUT
from client
splitter Channel1
MMF or SMF*
RX IN 95/5 50/50 MMF or SMF*
RX OUT
Channel2
Optical LOS
from transponders/4xANY_P drawers
Receiver**
3dB optical
TX IN 95/5 coupler
to client
Channel1 SMF
SMF 50/50 TX
TX IN OUT
95/5
Channel2
towards transponders
Backplane connector
Optical LOS1
Receiver**
Optical LOS2
Receiver**
Alarm
Interface**
2
Card
presence
N.B. * on Multi Mode OPC boards, the RX line is MMF type

on Single Mode OPC boards, the RX line is SMF type.
The TX line is always SMF.
N.B. ** The optical receivers and the alarm interface are not available on SM OPC without connectors board.
Figure 206. OPC block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 307 / 390
390
4.7 Power Supply Card (PSC/PSC3)
Two power supply units are used: working and protecting.

They are located at each side of the shelf, in the slots 25 and 48.

For the block diagram, refer to Figure 207. on page 308.

The Power Supply Cards are monitored via the SPI bus.
PSCs provide some +3.6 V and 5.5 V for service use to all units and a 48 V power supply when needed.
The input voltage range of the Power Supply Cards is –36 / –72 V.
Front panel Connector: sub–D 3 poles (see section 2.4.3, page 111).
LEDs signification
Table 42. PSC and PSC3 LEDs signification

HardWare Failure:
GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
RED when one of the On Board Power Supply (OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms)
4.8 Power Supply Card (PSC2)
This board is the same as PSC and PSC3 but needs to supply less power, because it has been designed
for 1696MS_C, hosting only 13 slots.
PSC2 are used in main and slave compact shelves.
Two power supply units are used: working and protecting. They are located at each side of the shelf, in
the slots 7 and 12, and they are monitored via the SPI bus.
These boards are with the 0V isolation.
PSCs provide some +3.6 V and 5.5 V for service use to all units and a 48 V power supply when needed.
The current limit is 6A.
The input voltage range of the Power Supply Cards is –36 / –72 V.
Front panel Connector: sub–D 3 poles (see section 2.4.3, page 111).
The LEDs signification is shown in Table 42.
PSC2
–Batt_A
+Batt
* protection * OR Batt
GND * pre–filter
* EMI/EMC –Batt
+Batt_A * fuse
filter
3.6V * soft start

dual DC/DC * EMI/EMC
5.5V converter filter
* threshold
TO GENERIC BOARD TO GENERIC BOARD
Figure 207. PSC2 block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 308 / 390
390
4.9 Power Management Unit (PMU)
The PMU is strictly dedicated to the 1696MS_C.

It is an external shelf able to feed the compact shelf providing the –48 Vdc to the power supply cards.
Hence the 1696MS_C can be fed

– by the classical –48Vdc provided by the telecom rack

– by the –48Vdc provided by the PMU, able to deliver this powering from any alternative voltage source.
The PMU is an external shelf of the same size that the 1696MS_C, which can be installed in 19“, 21“ and
23“ racks. This additional shelf is 1U high (1U = 44.45mm).
The PMU works in a worldwide environment, which applies to the following requirements:
– US requirements : NEBS compliant (115V/ 60Hz),
– Japan requirements (100V/ 50/60Hz),
– Europe requirements (230V/ 50Hz).
PSC boards are connected to the rectifiers of the PMU which provide the power.
PMU Control unit is connected to the FAN_C board and the tw0 PSC/PSC2 to provide alarms to the Net-
work Element since this unit in not managed by the software.
6 12 PSC(2)
–48Vdc (power supply)

5 11
F A N _C
4 10
3 9
2 8
13 1 7 PSC(2)
PMU alarms
in1 in2
CONTROL
RECTIFIER 1 RECTIFIER 2 UNIT
PMU
–48Vdc
from any alternative voltage source (100Vac, 115Vac, 230Vac) from back–up batteries (optional)
Figure 208. PMU cabling scheme
Description
Refer to Figure 209. on page 310. The PMU architecture is made up of:
– 2 VAC inputs
– 2 VDC outputs without fuses
– 1 battery connection
– one cintrol unit
– 2 rectifiers modules
On DC voltage outputs, no fuses are required because the 1696MS_C has on his PSC unit fuses on inputs.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The outputs are connected together, so they can protect each all the DC outputs.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 309 / 390
390
Two rectifiers modules are present in one PMU. Each modules is able to supply with power up to 4 stacked
1696MS_C.
One module enables to supply the 4 stacked shelves. If one module fails, the other one can still supply
the 4 shelves.

The Control Unit must be able to provide the following functions
– deliver 2 outputs 48VDC
– transmit alarms to the host (FAN_C board)
– manage the battery
– manage Status Leds.
DC output 1
M1
AC input 1 –
+ M2
M5
DC output 2
AC input 2 –
M6
+
+ Batt
M3
Discarge
– Batt
Protect
To Batt
AC in1 presence
AC in2 presence Control

Unit M4
Batt presence
Alarms
Figure 209. PMU block diagram
4.9.1 Batteries for PMU
Batteries are optional units used with the PMU in order to supply the –48V to the 1696MS_C in case of
power outage of the alternative power source (100V/115V/220V supply).
Battery units are linked to the Control unit of the PMU by cascading the units.
The first battery gives a temperature measurement of the unit to the PMU so as to generate an alarm when
out of the range.
It is possible to add up to three optional batteries. This depends of the current consumption of the shelves
(150W per battery).
Performance.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The battery must be charged in a maximum of 15 hours with 1 PMU and 1 shelf.
The battery must be charged in a maximum of 60 hours with 1 PMU and 4 shelves.
The Battery duration for 150W must be of 3 hours.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 310 / 390
390
Mechanical dimension of each battery: W = 446.02 mm; L = 284 mm; H = 133.35 mm.
Batteries can be inserted in a 19“, 21“ (ETSI) and 23“ (ANSI) rack or put on table.
In Rack Version, the batteries are located below the PMU.

6 12 PSC(2)
F A N _C
5 11
4 10
–48Vdc
3 9
2 8
13 1 7 PSC(2)
in1 in2
CONTROL
PMU RECTIFIER 1 RECTIFIER 2
UNIT
–48Vdc
Battery with
captor of
temperature
Optional
Figure 210. Minimum configuration of the batteries in 1696MS_C Rel. 2.2, rack version
In table version, batteries are located and stacked besides the PMU and 1696MS_C shelves; only this
configuration is supported since a battery is not likely to hold the full stack of batteries, PMU and shelves.
6 12 PSC(2)
F A N _C
5 11
4 10
3 9 –48Vdc
2 8 Optional Battery
13 1 7 PSC(2)
6 12 PSC(2)
F A N _C
5 11
4 10
3 9 –48Vdc
–48Vdc
2 8 Optional Battery
13 1 7 PSC(2)
6 12 PSC(2)
F A N _C
5 11
4 10
3 9 –48Vdc
2 8 Battery with
13 1 7 PSC(2) captor of
temperature
in1 in2 Optional
RECTIFIER 1 RECTIFIER 2 CONTROL
UNIT
PMU
Figure 211. Maximum configuration of the batteries in 1696MS_C Rel. 2.2, table version
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 311 / 390
390
4.10 FANS unit
4.10.1 FANC unit for 1696MS shelf

As the power consumption of the transponder is high enough (about 20–25 W / unit), fans are necessary
to dissipate the heat.
The fans are located at the bottom of the shelf. The use of fans requires to put an air filter just below. This
is shown on Figure 212.

OMDX + EXP + SPV
OAC (OPTIONAL)
OAC (OPTIONAL)
TRSNAPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRSNAPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
OMDX
ESC
FANS
Air filter
Figure 212. Fan shelf description and Rack partitioning
One FAN module is placed at the bottom of the shelf, in the slot 49.
The FANS are monitored via SPI bus and some direct wires are sent to the House Keeping/Remote Alarms
module to monitor a possible failure of the cooling system.
Max Power dissipation per shelf: 400 W.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 312 / 390
390
4.10.2 FAN_C unit for 1696MS_C shelf
On the 1696MS_C shelf, FAN unit is located on the left side of the compact shelf. The use of fans requires
to put an air filter just below.
Air filter
OOADM1ch+OSCE PSC(2)
OOADM1ch+OSCW Hk
FAN_C
SPV managenement RAI
TRNSPONDER OPC
TRNSPONDER Lan_Q
ESC PSC(2)
Figure 213. FAN_C description and Rack partitioning
FAN_C unit takes place in the left slot of 1696MS_C shelf and is equipped with two fans with speedometer
sensor to dissipate the heat coming from Transponder and 4xANY boards essentially. FAN_C board is
mandatory provided.
FAN_C board enables the link to the Power Management Unit (PMU) which is an external frame containing
the rectifier AC/DC to enable the plugging in the main supply).
The logical alarms generated by the PMU (PMU presence, Minor and Major) are sent to the FAN_C board’s
SPIDER where they are red by the shelf Controller (ESC).
This alarm is used by the software to inhibit or not both others. If the alarm is not raised, (PMU absent),
the MAJOR and MINOR alarms are inhibited.
MINOR (resp. MAJOR) alarm means that one (resp. two) rectifier is defective or out of the functioning
range.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 313 / 390
390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
314 / 390
5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.1 1696MSPAN System characteristics

5.1.1 Main system characteristics
General
Optical bit rate, client side the bit rates indicated with (*) are 3R, the others are 2R (MCC1 only)
– MCC2, MCC3 any bit rate between 100Mbps and 2.66Gbps (*)
– MCC1 100 Mbps : FDDI

125 Mbps : Fast Ethernet, FDDI
132.815 Mbps : FC (12-M6–LE–I)
155.520 Mbps : STM–1/OC–3 (*)
200.00 Mbps : ESCON
265.620 Mbps : FC (25-M6–LL–I)
270 Mbps : Digital Video (DTV) / HDTV
275.176 Mbps : DS4
400.352 Mbps : J5
466.560 Mbps : OC–9
531.250 Mbps : FC (50-M5–SL–I)
622.080 Mbps : STM–4/OC–12 (*)
933.120 Mbps : OC–18
1062.5 Mbps : Fiber Channel / FICON (*)
1244.160 Mbps : OC–24
1250 Mbps : Gigabit Ethernet (*)
1866.240 Mbps : OC–36
2125.00 Mbps : 2FC (*)
2488.320 Mbps : STM–16/OC–48 (*)
2500 Mbps : Infiniband
– 0CC10 9953.28 Mbps : STM–64/OC–192/10 GBE WAN (*)

10.3125 Gbps : 10 GBE LAN (*)
– 4xANY 125 Mbps : Fast Ethernet, FDDI (*)
155.520 Mbps : STM–1/OC–3 (*)
200.00 Mbps : ESCON (*)
270 Mbps : Digital Video (DTV) / HDTV (*)
622.080 Mbps : STM–4/OC–12 (*)
1062.5 Mbps : Fiber Channel / FICON (*)
Optical bit rate, WDM side
– MCC1/MCC2/MCC3/ MCC_RGN the same of all the clients bit rates, in the correspondent wavelength (λ)
– 4xANY 2488.320 Mbps : STM–16 / OC–48

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– OCC10 10.709 Gbps : STM–64/OC–192/10 GBE WAN + FEC

11.096 Gbps : 10 GBE LAN + FEC
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 315 / 390
390
Type of optical fiber According to ITU–T G.652, G.653, G.654, G.655
Central frequencies and wavelength see Table 43. on page 320

Application types Terminal Multiplexer (LT), back–to–back terminals (HUB), OADM in

protected and unprotected linear links and rings, In Line Amplifier,
CPE
Interfaces types Electrical interfaces: 2Mbps G.703, 64Kbps (user channels)
Optical interfaces: all the client and WDM interfaces above listed
Applied standards
ITU–T Recommendation G.681 Functional characteristics of interoffice and long–haul line systems
using optical amplifiers, including optical multiplexing
ITU–T Recommendation G.692 Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers
ITU–T Recommendation G.693 Optical interfaces for intra–office–systems
ITU–T Recommendation G.709 Network Node Interface for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
ITU–T Recommendation G.957 Optical interfaces for equipments and systems relating to the syn-
chronous digital hierarchy
ITU–T Recommendation G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for
use on optical fibre cables
ETS 300 232 A1 Transmission and multiplexing; Optical interfaces for equipments
and systems relating to the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
GR – 253 – CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Com-
mon Generic Criteria, issue 2C
IEEE G.802.3 Gigabit Ethernet specification
ANSI x 3.184 1993 standards FE and FDDI specification
ANSI x 3.320 standard (100–SM–LL–I) FC and FICON specification
IBM SA–0394–03 ESCON specification
ITU–T BT.656–4, BT1363–1, BT1367 Digital Video specification
SMPTE 292M–1998 Television – Bit Serial Digital Interface for High–Definition Television
Systems
IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)
access method and physical layer specifications
GR – 63 – CORE Network Equipment – Building System (NEBS) Requirements:
Physical Protection, issue 1
ITU–T Recommendation G.664 Optical Safety procedures and requirements for optical transport
systems
IEC 825 Safety of laser products
EN 60950 Safety of information technology equipment, including electrical
business equipment
GR – 1089 – CORE Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety – Generic Cri-
teria for Network Telecommunication equipment
pr ETS 300 386–1 Equipment Engineering ; Public telecommunication network equip-
pr ETS 300 386–2–2 ment. Electro–magnetic compatibility requirements:
Part 1 : Product family overview, compliance criteria and test levels
Part 2–2 : Product specific compliance criteria and operating condi-
tions – Transmission equipment, Version : 0.7, 1996.02.29
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ITU–T Recommendation G.825 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are
based on the synchronous digital hierarchy to be published
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 316 / 390
390
SMPTE RP184–1996 Specification of Jitter in Bit–Serial Digital Systems
T11/98 – 055 Fiber Channel – Methodologies for Jitter Specification
EN 55022 Limits and methods of measurement of radio interference charac-
teristics of information technology equipment

ETS 300 019–1–1 Equipment Engineering: Environmental conditions and environ-

ETS 300 019–1–2 mental tests for telecommunications equipment. Classification of
ETS 300 019–1–3 environmental conditions (storage/transportation/stationary use)
Add–Drop and Cross–Connect features

Connectivity Tributary to Mux/Demux wavelength assigment
Mux/Demux to Mux/Demux wavelength assigment
Tributary to tributary wavelength assigment
Loopbacks
Protections
Network protections Optical SNCP
Equipment optical protections 1+1 MCC1 / MCC2 / MCC3
1+1 MCC + 4xANY (only MCC is protected)
1+1 4xANY (each client/drawer can be protected)
1+1 (MCC2 / MCC3) + OAC
1+1 OCC10
1+1 OCC10 + OAC
Powering protections 1+1 Power Supply Card
Management interfaces
Functions provided – Q3 interf with PC (ECT/RECT), 1353SH and 1354RM NMS
(on terminal)
– Station alarms
– Equipment Alarm status (indicated by the front cover LEDs)
– Visual indications for card fail.
Management interfaces supported: – Q3/TL1 to connect a Local or Remote Equipment Craft Termi-
nal
– Ethernet (on LAN_Q board) to connect the OS 1353SH and
other ALCATEL NE’s with ETHERNET Interface
– QECC to connect other Q3 NEs
Local interface: Craft Interface (PC) RS232 SUB–D 9pin, PC compatible at 9600 bps
Remote interface: Craft Interface (PC) RS232 SUB–D 9pin, PC compatible at 9600 bps.
It handles up to 32 NEs via DCC (D1D3 and/or
D4D12)
Remote interface: Transmission Management ITU–T G.773 10 base–2 and 10 base–T
Network (TMN) interface
Protocol Stack/Informa- Q3/QECC or TL1
tion Model messages
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 317 / 390
390
Operation processes (management interfaces functions)
Configuration and provisioning Equipment, Units; Add–Drop; Cross–connection, Synchronization,
Protection, Alarms status, Maintenance memory for all the equip-

ment events

Software download It is made locally as well as remotely on non volatile memories with-
out traffic interruption
Performance monitoring (on B1 byte) According to ITU–T G.784, G.826, , G.821, M.2101.1
Remote Inventory At rack, subrack and board level
Unit and equipment acknowledgement Through Remote Inventory: Company id, Unit type, Unit part num-
ber, Software part number, CLEI code, Manufacturing Plant, Date
Identifier, Date of construction... For details, refer to the operator’s
handbook
Security Password, operator profile, back up for programs and data
Unit substitution characteristics
For transponders, optical amplifiers without traffic interruption in case of Optical SNCP
and Mux/Demux
For 4xANY without traffic interruption if all 4xANY drawers/clients are protected
Housekeeping (HK)
Number of housekeeping accesses 8 inputs and 8 outputs
Connector SUB–D 25 pins
Output HK signals–CPO (Remote By electronic relay contacts to be connected to the external negative
alarms used for remote control) voltage
– Max. guaranteed current with 50 mA

closed condition
– Max. allowed voltage with open –72 V
condition
– Voltage drop vs ground with –2 V ÷ 0 V
closed condition
Input housekeeping signals (CPI)
– Max. guaranteed current with 3 mA
closed condition
– Max. allowed voltage with open –72 V
condition
– Voltage drop vs ground with –2 V ÷ 0 V
closed condition
Rack Alarms (RAI)
Connector SUB–D 9 pins
Max. guaranteed current with closed 100 mA
condition Voltage difference between Common out and OUT < 2,5 Volts
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Resistance of the closed relay = 300 Mohm max

Max. allowed voltage with open condition –72 V
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 318 / 390
390
Automatic shutdown
According to IEC 825 and ITU–T Rec. G.958 regarding ALS
Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) characteristics

Digital signal
Nominal bit rate 4 864 kbit/s (default configuration) => 2Mb for LAPD + 2 Mb for User
Coding asynchr. scrambled (215–1) + synchronous scrambled (27–1) NRZ
SPV Optical Path
Attenuation range 9 ÷ 49 dB
Maximum dispersion 4000 ps/nm
Maximum reflectance 27 dB
Minimum ORL of cable plant at S, 24 dB
including any connector
SPV Receiver specification
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–9 –50 dBm ÷ –47 dBm
Overload @ BER = 10–9 –6 dBm
Maximum receiver reflectance –28 dBm
SPV Transmitter specification
Type of source DFB
Wavelength 151010 nm
Maximum –20 dB width 1 nm
Minimum side mode suppression ratio 33 dB
Optical Output power –1 dBm ÷ +4 dBm
Minimum Extinction Ratio 8.2 dB
Clock characteristics
Transponders support 3R regeneration. External clock is not required
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 319 / 390
390
Table 43. Nominal frequencies allocation plan in C–Band
Central frequency (GHz) Central wavelength (nm)
Band Channel Number

192,000 20 1561,42
192,100 21 1560,61
192,200 22 1559,79
192,300 23 1558,98
L2
192,500 25 1557,36
192,600 26 1556,55
192,700 27 1555,75
192,800 28 1554,94
BLUE
BAND
193,000 30 1553,33
193,100 31 1552,52
193,200 32 1551,72
193,300 33 1550,92
L1
193,500 35 1549,32
193,600 36 1548,51
193,700 37 1547,72
193,800 38 1546,92
194,200 42 1543,73
194,300 43 1542,94
194,400 44 1542,14
194,500 45 1541,35
S2
194,700 47 1539,77
194,800 48 1538,98
194,900 49 1538,19
195,000 50 1537,40
RED
BAND
195,200 52 1535,82
195,300 53 1535,04
195,400 54 1534,25
195,500 55 1533,47
S1
195,700 57 1531,90
195,800 58 1531,12
195,900 59 1530,33
196,000 60 1529,55
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The MCC transponders support two channels each. 16 different boards are able to cover the 32 ch.
The OCC10 transponders support one channel each. 32 different boards are needed to cover the 32 ch.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 320 / 390
390
Main Optical transmission levels
VOA* is used with MCC2 only

Client signals DWDM line

Up to 32 VOA* MUX Booster Line Tx

WDM Tx
User Rx
User Tx
Transponder Preamp Line Rx
DMUX
WDM Rx
Optical levels
User Rx (MCC):
• sensitivity (BER = 10–10) –18 dBm
• overload (BER = 10–10) 0 dBm
User Tx (MCC):
• output power (minimal): –5 dBm
• output power (maximal): 0 dBm
WDM Rx (MCC):
• sensitivity (BER = 10–10): –28 dBm
• overload (BER = 10–10): –8 dBm
MCC
WDM Tx (MCC):
• output power (minimal): 6 dBm
• output power (nominal): 6.5 dBm
(MCC2 and MCC3) with VOA using

• output power minimal: –14 dBm
(chip access)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 321 / 390
390
User Rx (OCC10), including transmission penalty:
• sensitivity (BER = 10–12) –13 dBm
• overload (BER = 10 )–12 0 dBm

User Tx (OCC10):
• output power (maximal): –1 dBm
WDM Rx (OCC10) after FEC, including transmission penalty:

OCC10 • sensitivity (BER = 10–12): –13 dBm
• overload (BER = 10–12) –5 dBm
WDM Tx (OCC10), VOA min:

• output power (maximal): +1.5 dBm
(OCC10) with VOA using

• output power minimal: –24 dBm
(chip access)
Line Rx without optical amplification:

• input power (minimal): –19 dBm
• input power (maximal): 15 dBm
Line Tx without optical amplification:
Line Rx with optical amplification:
• input power (minimal): –32 dBm
• input power (maximal): 17 dBm
Line Tx with optical amplification:
• output power (minimal): 2 dBm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 322 / 390
390
5.2 Safety requirements and mechanism
5.2.1 Electrical safety

The electrical and mechanical safety is compliant with the requirements of the EN 60 950 Standard [17]
and the NEBS Level 3 Bellcore GR–63 [19] and GR–1089 [20] Standard.
Electrical safety
Safety status of the connections with TNV (Telecommunication Network Voltage) for Remote alarms,
other equipment Housekeeping (CPO,CPI), Rack lamps (RM) and tributary connec-
tions if K20 protected.
SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) for all the other.
5.2.2 Optical safety
5.2.2.1 Hazard Level classification and standards
The HAZARD LEVEL of different ports of the system is widely treated in “UNIT DESCRIPTION” – of this
Technical Handbook (see paragraphs “Automatic shutdown” and “automatic shutdown” for each unit).
HAZARD LEVEL classification:
– HAZARD LEVEL 1M, according to IEC 60825–1 (1998) + Am. 2 (2001), IEC 60825–2 (2000) and
ITU–T Rec. G.664 standards or
– HAZARD LEVEL 3A, according to IEC 60825–1 (1998), IEC 60825–2 (2000)
can be assigned to all ports of the system with the exception of the 4xANY boards, classified as
HAZARD LEVEL 1 laser products.
G.664 standard defines two kinds of optical safety mechanisms :

– Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) : Procedure to automatically shutdown the output power of laser
transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
– Automatic Power ShutDown (APSD) : Procedure to automatically shutdown the output power of opti-
cal amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
In order to be clearer, in the following paragraphs,
– safety procedure for transponders is called ALS
– safety procedure for amplifiers is called APSD.
5.2.2.2 Equipment classification
The 1696MSPAN equipment is classified as hazard level 1M (optical power in the [10 ÷ 21.3] dBm range).
1696MS_C equipment is also classified as hazard level 1M.
N.B. The classification refers to the IEC 60825–1 and IEC 60825–2 Standards. The OSC alone is
classified as hazard level 1.
5.2.2.3 Location type

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The equipment shall be installed in “restricted location” (industrial and commercial premises) or controlled
locations (optical cable ducts and switching centers).
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 323 / 390
390
5.2.2.4 Labelling
The labeling of the optical sources is compliant with the requirements of the IEC 60825 Standard.

The labels reported below are put during factory settings. The labels are affixed on all front covers that

protect optical connectors located on the front side plate of all the units involved in optical transmission:
The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 1 the following explanatory label
The following label indicates the presence of a LASER beam. If the laser is a Hazard Level 1 or 1M product,
this label is not compulsory.
Example of EXPLANATORY label.
The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 1M according to IEC 60825–1 (2001), IEC 60825–2
(2000) and ITU–T Rec. G.664 standards and operate at 3rd window, carry the following explanatory label
The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 3A according to IEC 60825–1 (1998), IEC 60825–2
(2000) and operate at 3rd window, carry the following explanatory label
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 324 / 390
390
5.2.2.5 Engineering design features
In normal operating conditions, unless intentional manumission, the laser radiation is never accessible.
The laser beam is launched in optical fibre through an opposite connector that totally shuts up the laser
radiation.
In case of cable fibre break, to minimize exposure times, ALS procedure is implemented depending on
the location where the fibre break occurred.
ALS procedures are explained in 5.2.2.8, where shutdown and reactivation times are also reported.
5.2.2.6 Safety instructions
The safety instructions for proper assembly, maintenance and safe use including clear warning concerning
precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser radiation, are reported on:
– section 3.2.4 on page 26 thru 27, as far as this handbook is concerned
– the appropriate parts of the other handbooks envisaged for this equipment (see section 5.2.2.7).
5.2.2.7 Automatic power shutdown with amplifiers
The APSD procedure for the 1696MS amplifiers is not implemented in current release: according to the
IEC 60825 standard, APSD is not mandatory.
5.2.2.8 Automatic Laser Shutdown at WDM side (ALS_WDM) with transponders
The ALS procedure is compliant with ITU–T G.664 recommendation.
In the 1696MSPAN the ALS procedure is proposed by the transponder cards (MCC and OCC10). The
WDM receiver shuts down the WDM transmitter in the opposite direction when it detects an Input Loss
Of Signal (ILOS, i.e.: optical input power MCC1, MCC2 and OCC10 is too low) or a loss of clock (LOC)
for MCC2 and OCC10.
The shutdown of all the transponders on the affected link is carried within less than 3 s, as required by the
ITU–T Rec. G.664.
It is up to the user to enable or disable the ALS. The default configuration is ALS–disable.
The possible ALS mode are:
– ALS disable with laser ON
– ALS disable with laser OFF
– ALS disable (default configuration)
– ALS enable.
During the ALS procedure, the OSC is still working.
This configuration is done at equipment point of view and can be sent transponder by transponder or for
a set of transponders.
The ALS is implemented in WDM terminal and OADM sites in order to have a safety mechanism indepen-
dent from the host systems. During ALS, the optional OSC is still working.
In case of fiber break, a mechanism is proposed in order to shutdown the transponders in the previous
site, before the fiber break.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
In case of regenerators (back–to–back terminals) and OADM, the way of working is the same. The ALS
procedure is done in the section when the fiber failure occurred. The WDM receiver shutdowns the WDM
transmitter in the opposite direction when it detects a Loss Of Signal (LOS) (MCC1, MCC2, OCC10) or
a Loss Of Clock (LOC) (MCC2, OCC10).
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 325 / 390
390
5.2.2.8.1 ALS in non–amplified networks
In point–to–point configuration, ALS is performed in four steps (see Figure 214. ):

(1) ILOS detection at Rx WDM access of an MCC/OCC10 board of the terminal B

and LOC detection at WDM Tx access B (if in pass–through configuration).
(2) ShutDown (SD) command sent to the Tx WDM access of all the terminal B MCC/OCC10 boards of the
opposite transmission direction.
(3) Shutting Down all the Tx WDM access of the terminal B (step (2)), causes an ILOS detection at Rx WDM
access and a LOC detection at WDM Tx access of the MCC/OCC10 boards of the terminal A (if in pass–
through configuration).
(4) ShutDown (SD) command sent to the Tx WDM access of all the MCC/OCC10 boards of the terminal
A.
TX RX
T T
WDM D WDM
R M M R
SD U ILOS
A (4) X U LOC A
X
N (1) N
S S
P P
O O
N (3) N
D (2)
D LOC M M D
ILOS U U SD
E RX X X TX E
R WDM WDM R
terminal A terminal B
(16 or 32 ch.) (16 or 32 ch.)
SD stands for ShutDown
ILOS stands for Input Loss Of Signal
LOC stands for Los Of Clock
Figure 214. ALS mechanism on WDM line in point–to–point configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 326 / 390
390
For a circuit with regeneration/pass–through, ALS is performed in eight steps as described in the following
(see Figure 215. ):
(1) ILOS detection at RX WDM access of an MCC/OCC10 board of the terminal B

and LOC detection at WDM Tx access.

(2) ShutDown (SD) command sent to the Tx WDM access of all the MCC/OCC10 boards of the same trans-
mission direction and ShutDown (SD) command sent to the Tx WDM access of the opposite transmission
direction.
(3) ILOS detection at Rx WDM access of all MCC/OCC10 boards of the 16 ch. terminal
or LOC detection at Tx B&W.
(4) Shutting Down on a Tx WDM access and Tx B&W access of the 16 ch. terminal.

pass–trough channels
(2)SD
RX TX RX TX
B&W WDM D WDM WDM
M M M
(4) SD U U (1) ILOS LOC U
X X X
D D
M M
(4) SD (3) ILOS M U
U (2) SD U
X TX RX X
TX RX X
B&W WDM WDM WDM
16 channels terminal pass–trough channels (terminal B))
Figure 215. ALS in OADM configuration, channel in pass–through or in add/drop
The ALS mode for pass–through MCCs/OCC10s must be disabled to insure reliable automatic
restart. Note also that ILOS is propagated through the pass–through MCCs/OCC10s even if the
ALS mode is disable.
ALS and LOS propagation are 2 inpedendant procedures.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 327 / 390
390
The ALS procedure in a ring with OSNC–P, is the same of the previous case (circuit with regeneration/
pass–through) and the SD on the end node generates a (5) protection switch (see Figure 216. ).

TX RX RX TX
D WDM B&W B&W WDM
M M
U (4) SD U
X X
D
M M
U (4) SD (3) ILOS U
X RX TX TX RX X
WDM B&W B&W WDM
protection
(5) request
M
U
U
D
X
X
(1) ILOS
(2) SD
WDM
WDM
RX
TX
LOC
ILOS
WDM
WDM
RX
TX SD
M
U
D
X
M
U
X
TX RX RX TX
D WDM B&W B&W WDM
M M
U SD U
X X
D
M M
U SD ILOS U
X RX TX TX RX X
WDM B&W B&W WDM

ILOS stands for Input Loss Of Signal protection
LOC stands for Los Of Clock (5) request
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 216. ALS procedure in a ring with Optical SNCP, in case of fiber failure in the ring
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 328 / 390
390
5.2.2.8.2 ALS in amplified networks
See Figure 217. , Figure 218. and Figure 219.

ALS for transponders is supported in amplified networks. On the contrary, APSD is not supported for ampli-
fiers.
However, in the particular case of point–to–point amplified transmission without OADM repeater, ALS pro-
cedure is enough to provide optical safety thanks to LOS propagation.
Amplifiers must be in APSD disable state.

TX ILOS1 ILOS2 RX
WDM D WDM
M SD1 SD2 M
SD U 1 2
U LOC
X X ILOS
D
LOC M M
ILOS U 2 1 U SD
SD2 SD1 X
RX X TX
WDM ILOS2 ILOS1 WDM
Figure 217. ALS procedure in a point–to–point amplified transmission without OADM repeater

TX ILOS1 ILOS2 ILOS1 ILOS2 RX

WDM D WDM
M SD1 SD2 SD1 SD2 M
SD U 1 2 1 2 LOC
U
X X ILOS
D
LOC M M
ILOS U 2 1 2 1 U SD
SD2 SD1 SD2 SD1 X
RX X TX
WDM ILOS2 ILOS1 ILOS2 ILOS1 WDM
Figure 218. ALS mechanism with cascaded pre–amplifier and booster

TX ILOS2 ILOS1 RX
WDM D WDM
M SD2 SD1 M
SD U 2 1
U LOC
X X ILOS
D
LOC M M
ILOS U 1 2 U SD
RX X SD1 SD2 X TX
WDM ILOS1 ILOS2 WDM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 219. ALS mechanism with single pre–amplifier and booster
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 329 / 390
390
5.2.2.8.3 ALS restart concept
After an ALS occurs, one restart mode is available: Automatic restart. The time values and the restart way
of working in the various restart schemes are described in Figure 220. The restart way of working is de-

fined at equipment point of view.

As the ALS is done at MCC/OCC10 unit level, each transponder board will restart independently.
When OAC are used, the restart procedure is done by the amplifier board.
During the switch on and the switch off time, the channel wavelength remains between λ ITU ± 500 pm.
Start
Section in
operation
ALS_WDM enable
Yes Receive signal

from far end?
No
No Loss of received signal

for more than 500 ms ?
Yes
Automatic Power Shut Down
Automatic restart
Delay time
18020 s
Tx on for (200.5) s
Figure 220. Restart algorithm
The figures of the ALS timing are compliant with the ITU–T Rec.G.664. The standard recommends a pulse
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
length of 2s except in the case of amplified network where the pulse length can be greater (§ 6.3 of the
standard).
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 330 / 390
390
5.3 Boards interfaces characteristics
5.3.1 Tributaries optical characteristics

5.3.1.1 Multirate Channel Card (MCC1, MCC2, MCC3, MCC_RGN) characteristics
Optical interfaces specification, User side (MCC_RGN doesn’t have B&W interfaces)
Common optical interfaces specification, user side
Bit rate, client side with MCC2 and MCC3 using, all the bit rates are 3R
with MCC1 using, (*) indicates the 3R bit rates
100 Mbps : FDDI
125 Mbps : Fast Ethernet, FDDI
132.815 Mbps : FC (12-M6–LE–I)
155.520 Mbps : STM–1/OC–3 (*)
200 Mbps : ESCON
265.620 Mbps : FC (25-M6–LL–I)
270 Mbps : Digital Video
466.560 Mbps : OC–9
531.250 Mbps : FC (50-M5–SL–I)
622.080 Mbps : STM–4/OC–12 (*)
933.120 Mbps : OC–18
1062.5 Mbps : FICON (*), Fiber Channel (*)
1244.160 Mbps : OC–24
1866.120 Mbps : OC–36
2125.00 Mbps : 2FC (*)
2488.320 Mbps : STM–16/OC–48 (*)
2500 Mbps : INFINIBAND
Wavelength range 1260 1360 nm
1470 1610 nm for CWDM
User interface type S–16.1
Connector type MU horizontal for MCC1, MCC2
LC (on SFP module) for MCC3
User Rx : optical interfaces specification MCC1 MCC2 MCC3
Fiber type Multi–mode (MMF) 62.5 / 125 um
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–10 –18 dBm –18 dBm see para.
Overload @ BER = 10–10 0 dBm 0 dBm 5.3.1.3 on
Maximum optical path penalty 1 dB 1 dB page 335
Maximum receiver reflectance –27 dB –27 dB
User Tx : optical interfaces specification MCC1 MCC2 MCC3
Fiber type Single–mode (SMF)
Maximum –20 dB width 1 nm 1 nm
Minimum side mode suppression ratio 30 dB 30 dB
see para.
Optical Output power min : –5 dBm min : –4.5 dBm
5.3.1.3 on
max : 0 dBm max : 0 dBm
page 335
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Minimum Extinction Ratio 8.2 dB 8.2 dB

Shutdown time < 5 ms < 5 ms
Re–activation time < 30 ms < 30 ms
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 331 / 390
390
Optical interfaces specification, WDM Side
Common optical interfaces specification, WDM side

User interface type L–16.2
Wavelength specification ITU–T G.692, 100 GHz channel spacing
Wavelength tunability tunable over 2 wavelengths
Transmitter wavelength range 1528 1565 nm
Connector type MU horizontal
Center frequency 19x.y THz; for details refer to Table 43. on page 320
and para. 5.3.2.1 on page 344, para. 5.3.2.2 on page
346, para. 5.3.2.3 on page 347
Bit rate, WDM side transparent (output bit rate equals input bit rate)
WDM Rx : optical interfaces specification MCC1 MCC2/MCC3/MCC_RGN
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–10 (OSNR = 19 dB) –28 dBm –28 dBm
Overload @ BER = 10–10 –8 dBm –8 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty (over 1800 ps/nm) 2 dB
Maximum optical path penalty (up to 3200 ps/nm) 2 dB
Maximum receiver reflectance –27 dB –27 dB
WDM Tx : optical interfaces specification MCC1 MCC2/MCC3/MCC_RGN
Dispersion accommodation 1800 ps/nm 3200 ps/nm
Maximum –20 dB width with modulation 1 nm 1 nm
Minimum side mode suppression ratio 30 dB 30 dB
Optical Output power typ : 6.5 dBm typ : 6.5 dBm

min : 6 dBm min : 6 dBm
max : 7 dBm max : 9 dBm
Optical power at board output w/ minimum VOA – typ : 5.7 dBm

– min : 5.2 dBm
– max : 8.2 dBm
Minimum Extinction Ratio 8.2 dB 8.2 dB
Maximum EOL Center Frequency Deviation 12.3 GHz 12.3 GHz
N.B. the values are given for EOL characteristics

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 332 / 390
390
5.3.1.2 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card (OCC10) characteristics
Optical interfaces specification, User side

Common optical interfaces specification, user side
Bit rate, client side 9953.28 Mbps : STM–64/OC–192/10 GBE WAN

10.709 Gbps :(STM–64/OC–192/10GBEWAN)+FEC
10.3125 Gbps : 10 GBE LAN
11.096 Gbps : 10 GBE LAN + FEC
User interface type VSR2000–2R1 standard (similar to I–64.1)
User Rx : optical interfaces specification
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–12 including PP –13 dBm
Overload @ BER = 10–12 0 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty 1 dB
Maximum receiver reflectance –27 dB
User Tx : optical interfaces specification
Optical Output power min : –6 dBm

max : –1 dBm
Transmission length 20 Km
Minimum Extinction Ratio 6 dB
Shutdown time < 5 ms
Re–activation time < 30 ms

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 333 / 390
390
Optical interfaces specification, WDM Side
Common optical interfaces specification, WDM side

WDM interface type L–64.2
Wavelength specification ITU–T G.692, 100 GHz channel spacing.

The board is tunable over 1 wavelength
Transmitter wavelength range 1528 1565 nm
Center frequency 19x.y THz; for details refer to Table 43. on page 320
Bit rate, WDM side 10709 Mbps
WDM Rx : optical interfaces specification (board input)
DTV (Decision Threshold voltage) is used to deal with transmission degraded by chromatic dispersion and
optical noise. In R. 2.2 there are two configurable operating points.
The VOA placed before the Rx is automatically controlled in order to maintain its otput power constant.
The following specification are given for a Tx + Rx couple.
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–12 after FEC correction in- –13 dBm

cluding PP and OSNR = 19 dB
VOA dynamic range 20 dB
Maximum optical path penalty (over –500 up to 2 dB

1600 ps/nm)
WDM Tx : optical interfaces specification (board output)
In order to provide a wide range chromatic dispersion tolerance, two operating points corresponding to high
chromatic dispersion and to low chromatic dispersion.
NDC configuration NDC0 NDC1
Max EOL center frequency deviation 100 pm
Dispersion (NDC not configurable in R.2.0)

• OSNR = 19 dB 0 +1300 ps/nm –500 +800 ps/nm
• OSNR = 21 dB 0 +1600 ps/nm
Maximum –20 dB width 0.3 nm
Optical Output power (VOA at min) –4 +1.5 dBm –2.5 +3 dBm
VOA dynamic range (configurable) 20 dB, step 1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. All the figures are EOL
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 334 / 390
390
5.3.1.3 SPF modules optical characteristics
SFP module type APD CWDM (Silver) PIN CWDM (Bronze)

Addressed wavelength (nm) 1470, 1490, 1510, 1530, 1550, 1570, 1590, 1610
Min. launched power (dBm) 0 0

Max launched power (dBm) 5 5
Allowed bitrates 125 Mbps to 2.7 Gbps 125 Mbps to 2.7 Gbps
Min. extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 8.2
Max. –20dB bandwidth (nm) 1 1
Minimum SMSR (dB) 30 30
Max chromatic disp. (ps/nm) 1600 1000
Minimum sensitivity (dBm) –28 –18
Minimum overload (dBm) –9 –3
Max optic. path penalty (dB) 2 1
Max receiver reflect. (dB) –27 –27
Optical connector (Tx/Rx) LC LC
Fiber type SMF SMF
SFP module type S–4.1 Gbe–Sx Gbe–Lx FC–S FC–L I–16.1 S–16.1 MS–16.1
Addressed wavelength (nm) 1310 850 1310 850 1310 1310 1310 1310
Min. launched power (dBm) –15 –9.5 –11 –10 –12 –15 –5 –5
Max launched power (dBm) –8 –4 –3 –1 –3 –8 0 0

Allowed bit rates (Mbps) 622 1250 1250 1062.5 1062.5 2488 2488 100 to
2700
Min. extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 8.2 9 9 9 8.2 8.2 8.2
Minimum sensitivity (dBm) –28 –7 –19 –16 –25 –18 –18 –18
Minimum overload (dBm) –8 –3 –3 0 –3 –3 –3 –3
Max receiver reflect. (dB) –27 –27 –27 –27 –27 –27 –27 –27
Optical connector (Tx/Rx) LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC
Fiber type SMF MMF SMF/MMF MMF SMF SMF SMF SMF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 335 / 390
390
5.3.1.4 4 x ANY, 4 x ANY_S, 4xANY_P TDM Concentrators characteristics
Drawers Rx : 1310 nm optical interfaces specification

Drawer Rx : common 1310 nm optical interfaces specification
Fiber type Multi–mode 62.5 / 125 µm (MMF)
Optical connector type LC
Drawer Rx : Low Frequency 1310 nm cartridge specification (Rx)
Data rate 125 Mbps (100ppm) : Fast Ethernet, FDDI

200 Mbps (100ppm) : ESCON
270 Mbps (100ppm) : Digital Video
Operating wavelength 1270 1380 nm
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–10 -28 dBm
Overload @ BER = 10–10 -8 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty NA dB
Maximum receiver reflectance 12.5 dB
Drawer Rx : STM–1, STM–4 1310 nm cartridge specification (Rx)
Data rate 155.520 Mbps (20ppm) : STM–1

622.080 Mbps (20ppm) : STM–4
Maximum receiver reflectance –
Drawer Rx : High Frequency 1310 nm cartridge specification (Rx)
Data rate 1025 Gbps (100ppm) : Gigabit Ethernet

1062.5 Gbps (100ppm) : FICON, Fiber Channel
Maximum receiver reflectance 12 dB

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 336 / 390
390
Drawers Tx : 1310 nm optical interfaces specification
Drawer Tx : common 1310 nm optical interfaces specification
Single–mode 9 / 125 µm (SMF)
Fiber type
Laser type Class 1 Laser Safety

Drawer Tx : Low Frequency 1310 nm cartridge specification
Central wavelength 1270 1356 nm
Maximum RMS width 2.5 nm
Minimum side mode suppression ratio NA dB
max : –8 dBm
Drawer Tx : STM–1, STM–4 1310 nm cartridge specification
Data rate 155.520 Mbps (20ppm) : STM–1
622.080 Mbps (20ppm) : STM–4
Maximum RMS width 2.5 nm
max : –8 dBm
Drawer Tx : High Frequency 1310 nm cartridge specification
Maximum RMS width 4 nm
max : –3 dBm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 337 / 390
390
Drawers Rx : 850 nm optical interfaces specification
Drawer Rx : common 850 nm optical interfaces specification

Multi–mode 62.5 / 125 µm (MMF)

Fiber type
Drawer Rx : Low Frequency 850 nm cartridge specification

Drawer Rx : High Frequency 850 nm cartridge specification


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 338 / 390
390
Drawers Tx : 850 nm optical interfaces specification
Drawer Tx : common 850 nm optical interfaces specification
Multi–mode 62.5 / 125 µm (MMF)

Fiber type
Laser type Class 1 Laser Safety
Drawer Tx : Low Frequency 850 nm cartridge specification

Optical Output power min : –9.5 dBm

max : –1.5 dBm
Shutdown time < 0.5 ms
Drawer Tx : High Frequency 850 nm cartridge specification

Optical Output power min : –9.5 dBm

max : –1.5 dBm
Shutdown time < 0.5 ms

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 339 / 390
390
2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification, agregate side (4 x ANY)
Agregate Rx : 2.5 Gbps optical interface specification

User interface type I–16.1
Operating wavelength range 1266 1360 nm
Data rate 2488.320 Mbps 4.6 ppm
Input power –18 –3 dBm
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–10 –18 dBm
Agregate side Tx : 2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification
User interface type I–16.1
Fiber type Single–mode 9 / 125 µm (SMF)
Optical Output power –10 –3 dBm
Shutdown time <5 ms
Re–activation time <30 ms

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 340 / 390
390
2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification, agregate side (4 x ANY_S)
Agregate Rx : 2.5 Gbps optical interface specification
Input power –18 0 dBm
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–10 –18 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty 1 dB
Agregate Tx : 2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification
Fiber type Single–mode 9 / 125 µm (SMF)
Optical Output power –5 0 dBm
Shutdown time <5 ms
Re–activation time <30 ms

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 341 / 390
390
2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification, agregate side (4 x ANY_P)
Refer to para. 5.3.1.3 on page 335.

STM–1/4/16, Gigabit Ethernet, Fiber Channel and CWDM interfaces are used
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 342 / 390
390
5.3.1.5 Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC) optical characteristics
MVAC optical interfaces specification

Fiber type Single mode (SMF)
Optical connector type MU horizontal
Insertion losses (IL) 3 dB
Attenuation dynamic range including IL 3 20 dB ; step = 0.5 dB

(on each VOA input)
Attenuation accuracy 0.5 dB
Response time < 5 ms
Output measurement –50 +17 dBm
Optical ports levels
Optical input power (on both In1 & In2 inputs) –32 +17 dBm
Optical output power (on both Out1 & Out2 outputs) –52 +17 dBm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 343 / 390
390
5.3.2 Multiplexer units (OMDX) optical characteristics
5.3.2.1 L1 band Mux/Demux with expansion + supervision (OMDX8100_M_L1_XS) and with ex-
pansion (OMDX8100_M_L1_X)

OMDX8100_M_L1_XS optical characteristics
MUX side specification OMDX8100_M_L1_XS OMDX8100_M_L1_X
Input power:
– single channels – 32 +17 dBm – 32 +17 dBm
– extra–input – 32 +17 dBm – 32 +17 dBm
– expansion input – 32 +17 dBm – 32 +17 dBm
– supervision input – 1 +1 dBm –
Insertion loss (max.)
– single channels 5.35 dB 4.95 dB
– extra–input 3.1 dB 2.7 dB
– expansion 1.7 dB 1.3 dB
– supervision 15 dB –
Isolation (adjacent channels) – min 15 dB 15 dB
Output power – 32 +17 dBm – 32 +17 dBm
Monitoring Output Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power le-

vel measurement
DEMUX side specification OMDX8100_M_L1_XS OMDX8100_M_L1_X
Input power – 32 +17 dBm – 32 +17 dBm
Monitoring Input Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power le-

vel measurement
– single channels 5.55 dB 4.95 dB
– extra–output 3.3 dB 2.7 dB
– expansion 1.9 dB 1.3 dB
– supervision 2.5 dB 2.5 dB

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 344 / 390
390
Output power
– 32 +17 dBm – 32 +17 dBm

– single channels
– extra–output – 32 +17 dBm – 32 +17 dBm
– expansion output – 32 +17 dBm – 32 +17 dBm
– supervision output – 53 –14 dBm –
Isolation (adjacent channels) – min 22 dB 22 dB
Isolation (non adjacent channels), min 30 dB 35 dB
General characteristics OMDX8100_M_L1_XS OMDX8100_M_L1_X
L1 band channels 30; 31; 32; 33; 35; 36; 37; 38
L1 band channels central wavelenght 1553.33 nm (ch 30); 1552.52 nm (ch 31);
1551.72 nm (ch 32); 1550.92 nm (ch 33);
1549.32 nm (ch 35); 1548.51 nm (ch 36);
1547.72 nm (ch 37);1546.92 nm (ch 38)
channel bandwidth at –0.5 dB 0.11 nm 0.25 nm
channel bandwidth at –3 dB 0.15 nm 0.3 nm
end–to–end IL (max) 11.3 dB 10.8 dB
Isolation (LB vs SB) – min 15 dB 15 dB
PMD 0.15 ps 0.15 ps
PDL 0.25 dB 0.25 dB
connector type MU horizontal MU horizontal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 345 / 390
390
5.3.2.2 L2 and S1 band Mux/Demux
OMDX8100_M_L2 and OMDX8100_M_S1 optical characteristics

MUX side specification
Input power:
– single channels – 32 +17 dBm
– extra–input – 32 +17 dBm
– single channels 3.75 dB
– extra–input 1.5 dB
Output power – 32 +17 dBm
DEMUX side specification
Input power – 32 +17 dBm
– extra–output 1.5 dB
Output power
– extra–output – 32 +17 dBm
General characteristics
L2 band channels and central wavelenght 1561.42 nm (ch 20); 1560.61 nm (ch 21);
1559.79 nm (ch 22); 1558.98 nm (ch 23);
1557.36 nm (ch 25); 1556.55 nm (ch 26);
1555.75 nm (ch 27);1554.94 nm (ch 28)
S1 band channels and central wavelenght 1535.82 nm (ch 52); 1535.04 nm (ch 53);
1534.25 nm (ch 54); 1533.47 nm (ch 55);
1531.90 nm (ch 57); 1531.12 nm (ch 58);
1530.33 nm (ch 59);1529.55 nm (ch 60)
channel bandwidth at –0.5 dB 0.11 nm
channel bandwidth at –3 dB 0.15 nm
end–to–end IL (global) (max) 14.7 dB
rejection of dropped channels extra–port (min) 12 dB
PMD 0.15 ps
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
PDL 0.25 dB
connector type MU horizontal
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 346 / 390
390
5.3.2.3 S2 band Mux/Demux
OMDX8100_M_S2 optical characteristics

Input power:
Output power
S2 band channels 42; 43; 44; 45; 47; 48; 49; 50
S2 band channels central wavelenght 1543.73 nm (ch 42); 1542.94 nm (ch 43);
1542.14 nm (ch 44); 1541.35 nm (ch 45);
1539.77 nm (ch 47); 1538.98 nm (ch 48);
1538.19 nm (ch 49);1537.40 nm (ch 50)
channel bandwidth at –0.5 dB 0.11 nm
channel bandwidth at –3 dB 0.15 nm
end–to–end IL (w/OMDX8100_M_L1_XS) (max) 13.1 dB
rejection of dropped channels extra–port (min) 12 dB
PMD 0.15 ps
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
PDL 0.25 dB
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 347 / 390
390
5.3.3 Multiplexer units (OADM) optical characteristics
5.3.3.1 8 channels OADM with supervision

OADM8100_M_L1(L2/S1/S2)_S optical characteristics

Input power (SPV + 1530 1560 nm) – 32 +17 dBm
vel measurement
Output power
– supervision output – 53 –14 dBm
Insertion loss
vel measurement
Input power:
– supervision input – 1 +1 dBm
Insertion loss
Isolation
in–band (dropped vs added channels) >24 dB
8 dropped channels isolation
– adjacent channels >22 dB
– non adjacent channels >35 dB
Supervision
Rx side IL 2.3 dB
Tx side IL 2 dB
SPV rejection (Rx side) >28 dB
L1, L2, S1, S2 band channels and central wave- see para. 5.3.2.1 on page 344, para. 5.3.2.2 on page
lenght 346, para. 5.3.2.3 on page 347
PMD 0.15 ps
PDL 0.25 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 348 / 390
390
OADM4100_M_chxx–yy_S optical characteristics



vel measurement
Output power
Insertion loss
– extra–output 2 dB
vel measurement
Input power:
Insertion loss
Isolation
in–band (dropped vs added channels) >24 dB
4 dropped channels isolation
– adjacent channels >22 dB
– non adjacent channels >35 dB

Supervision
Rx side IL 2.3 dB
Tx side IL 2 dB
SPV rejection (Rx side) >28 dB
Channels range per board 2023; 2528; 3033; 3538; 4245; 4750;
5255; 5760
Central wavelenght per channel see para. 5.3.2.1 on page 344, para. 5.3.2.2 on page
346, para. 5.3.2.3 on page 347
PMD 0.15 ps
PDL 0.25 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 349 / 390
390
OADM2100_M_chxx–yy_S optical characteristics

Input power:
Insertion loss (max.):

Rejection of added channels 13.5 dB
Isolation (adjacent channels) 22 dB

vel measurement

vel measurement

Output power
Rejection of dropped channels 13.5 dB
Channels range per board 30–31; 32–33; 35–36; 37–38; 47–48
Central wavelenght per channel see para. 5.3.2.1 on page 344 and 5.3.2.3 on page 347
Channel passband at –0.5 dB 0.25 nm
Channel passband at –3 dB 0.3 nm
End–to–end IL (max) 9.4 dB
PMD 0.15 ps
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
PDL 0.25 dB
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 350 / 390
390
5.3.3.4 1 channel OADM with supervision
OADM1100_M_xx_S optical characteristics


Input power:
– single channel – 32 +17 dBm

Rejection of added channels 13.5 dB
Monitoring Output – 49 0 dBm; typically 18 dB below the associated op-

tical power level measurement

vel measurement

Output power
Rejection of dropped channels 13.5 dB
Channels range per board 30; 31; 32; 33; 35; 36; 37; 38; 47; 48
Central wavelenght per channel see para. 5.3.2.1 on page 344 and 5.3.2.3 on page 347
Channel passband at –0.5 dB 0.25 nm
Channel passband at –3 dB 0.3 nm
End–to–end IL (max) 8 dB
PMD 0.15 ps
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
PDL 0.25 dB
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 351 / 390
390
5.3.4 Mux/Demux 1310–1550 + supervision unit optical characteristics
SPV_F_1310_1550 optical characteristics


Input power:
– SPV channel – 1 +1 dBm
– 1310 nm input – 20 0 dBm
– 1550 nm input – 32 +17 dBm
– SPV channel 14.6 dB
– 1310 nm channel 2 dB
– 1550 nm channel 2 dB
Isolation (1310 nm vs 1550 nm) min 30 dB

vel measurement

vel measurement

– 1310 nm channel 2.2 dB
– 1550 nm channel 2.2 dB
Output power
– SPV channel – 53 –14 dBm
– 1310 nm input – 20 0 dBm
– 1550 nm input – 32 +17 dBm
Isolation (1310 nm vs 1550 nm) min 30 dB
Channel passband at 1550 nm 1528 1560 nm
End–to–end IL (max) at 1310 nm 4.2 dB
End–to–end IL (max) at 1550 nm 4.2 dB
PMD 0.15 ps
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
PDL 0.25 dB
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 352 / 390
390
5.3.5 SPV_F_C unit optical characteristics
SPV_F_C optical characteristics

Input power:
– SPV channel – 1 +1 dBm
– extra input – 32 +17 dBm
– extra input 1.2 dB

vel measurement

vel measurement
Output power
– SPV channel – 50 –14 dBm
End–to–end IL (max) 2.6 dB
PMD 0.15 ps
PDL 0.25 dB

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 353 / 390
390
5.3.6 Optical Amplifier Card (OAC) optical characteristics
Optical Amplifier Card optical interfaces specification

Parameter Symbol Min Typ Max Unit

Wavelength range λs 1529.1 1561.8 nm
(32 channels) OAC1 and OAC2 optical characteristics
1st stage output power (EOL) OOPV1 12 dBm
2nd stage output power OOPV2 17 dBm
1st stage spectral gain excursion (1) ∆G 4 4.5 dB
2nd stage spectral gain excursion (1) ∆G1 2 2.2 dB
Noise figure (2) NF 6.8 dB
(1): With an input signal power of –5 dBm and an output power of +17 dBm.
(2): With an input signal power of –11 to –5 dBm and an output power of +17 dBm.
(32 channels) OAC1_L and OAC2_L optical characteristics
1st stage output power (EOL) OOPV1 12 dBm
2nd stage output power OOPV2 17 dBm
1st stage spectral gain excursion (1) ∆G 4 5 dB
2nd stage spectral gain excursion (1) ∆G1 2 2.2 dB
Noise figure (2) NF 6 dB
(1): With an input signal power of –11 dBm and an output power of +17 dBm.
(2): With an input signal power of –17 to –11 dBm and an output power of +17 dBm.
Optical ports specification

Fiber type single mode (SMF)
Optical connector type MU/PC ; MU/APC for extra pump
I/O Function OAC1, OAC2 level OAC1_L, OAC2_L level
VOA attenuation range 1 15 dB 1 15 dB
I VOA input –24.5 +6.5 dBm –32 +17 dBm
O VOA output –26 +5 dBm –47 +17 dBm
I 1st stage input –26 +5 dBm –47 +17 dBm
O 1st stage output –3 +12 dBm –3 +12 dBm
I 2nd stage input –18 +9 dBm –32 +17 dBm
O 2nd stage output +2 +17 dBm +2 +17 dBm
I SPV extraction
O SPV insertion
O 1st stage input monitor Typically 20dB below the associated level measurement
O 1st stage output monitor Typically 20dB below the associated level measurement
O 2nd stage input monitor Typically 20dB below the associated level measurement
O 2nd stage output monitor Typically 20dB below the associated level measurement
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 354 / 390
390
5.3.7 SPV–M + OW and SPVM_H optical characteristics
SPVM2 and SPVM_H optical characteristics

SPV Receiver specification
Sensitivity @ BER = 10–9 –50 dBm to –47 dBm
Overload @ BER = 10–9 –6 dbm
Maximum receiver reflectance –28 dbm
N.B. The 1510 nm receiver has a specified sensibility of –50 dBm. If the incident power is lower than
that value, the OSC BER is higher, but the supervision LAP–D protocol corrects the errors so
that the supervision is correctly transmitted down to a power value of –53 dBm
SPV Transmitter specification
Type of source DFB
Wavelength 151010 nm

max : +1 dBm

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 355 / 390
390
5.3.8 OSMC optical characteristics
OSMC optical characteristics

OSMC specification
Fiber type Single mode (SMF)
Optical connector type MU horizontal
Selectable input ports (switch) 8
Wavelength range 1529.55 to 1561.42 nm
OCM channel power dynamic range –51 to –3 dBm
Total input power –52 to +17 dBm
OCM power channel power accuracy 1 dB
OCM power repeatability 0.25 dB
OCM absolute wavelength accuracy 100 pm
OCM acquisition time 1s
OSMC optical ports
Port_p input ; p = [1 8] –52 to +17 dBm

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 356 / 390
390
5.3.9 Optical Protection Cards (OPC) optical characteristics
SM/MM OPC BOARDS WIT/WITHOUT CONNECTORS SPECIFICATION

TX side SM OPC with MM OPC with MM OPC with SM OPC with

jumpers jumpers connectors connectors
Connector type MU MU MU MU
Fiber type SMF SMF SMF SMF
Max. insertion loss 4.4 dB 4.4 dB 4.4 dB 4.4 dB
Optical level at TX–IN Ch. 1&2 –15 +8 dBm –15 +8 dBm –15 +8 dBm –15 +8 dBm
RX side SM OPC with MM OPC with MM OPC with SM OPC with

jumpers jumpers connectors connectors
Connector type MU MU MU MU
Fiber type SMF MMF SMF MMF
Max. insertion loss 4.4 dB 6 dB 4.4 dB 6 dB
Optical level at RX–IN –24 0 dBm –24 0 dBm –24 0 dBm –24 0 dBm
TX side MM OPC 850

with connect.
Connector type MU
Fiber type MMF
Max. insertion loss 5 dB
Optical level at TX–IN Ch. 1&2 –15 +8 dBm
RX side MM OPC 850

with connect.
Connector type MU
Fiber type MMF
Max. insertion loss 5 dB
Optical level at RX–IN –28 0 dBm

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 357 / 390
390
5.4 Alarm characteristics
Units Alarms:

Each port card or access card of the equipment is provided with a bicolor (green/red) or three–color (green/

yellow/red) HardWare Failure LED on the front coverplate.
This LED indicates:
– when red, internal failure

– when green, in service unit
– when yellow, board in firmware download state (only for MCC, OCC10, 4xANY, SPVM).
Centralized Equipment Alarms:
All the alarms detected on the units are collected by the ESC unit which will deliver centralized optical
indications (by means of LEDs on its front coverplate). Specifically:
• Red LED “URG“: detection of an URGENT (MAJOR OR CRITICAL) alarm
• Red LED ”NRG”: detection of a NOT URGENT (MINOR) alarm
• Yellow LED ”ABN”: detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: active loopbacks,
forcing the unit into service, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS
• Yellow LED ”IND”: detection of an INDICATIVE (WARNING) alarm
• Yellow LED ”ATD”: alarm condition ATTENDED
Refer to para. 2.5, page 112, where the front view of each unit and the LED locations are illustrated.
N.B. On the Craft Terminal (C.T.) and on the Operation System (O.S). application the URGENT
(URG), NOT URGENT (NURG) and INDICATIVE alarm are named in a different way; the rela-
tion between this two terminology is explained in Table 44. on page 358.
Table 44. Relation between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity ter-
minology used for the ESC leds and ETSI market rack (TRU).
Alarm severity terminology on C.T. and O.S. Alarm severity terminology used for ESC leds
and for TRU in the rack
CRITICAL or MAJOR URG, T*URG, T*RURG,
MINOR NURG, T*NURG, T*RNURG
WARNING INDICATIVE
INDETERMINATE (not used) ––

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 358 / 390
390
Rack Alarms:
Some equipment alarms are carried to a connector and used to light–up alarm rack–lamps. Rack alarms
are physically available on the RAI board connectors.
Rack lamps are different in ETSI and ANSI worlds. The RAI card is made to interface with both standards.
The available alarms are the following:
PDU Front Panel LED Markings (ANSI):
• CRI: critical alarm from one of the shelves in the rack

• MAJ: major alarm from one of the shelves in the rack
• MIN: minor alarm from one of the shelves in the rack
• RACK: alarm storing from one of the shelves in the rack
TRU Front Panel LED Markings (ETSI):
• URG: Urgent: major alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
• NURG: Non urgent: minor alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
• ATTD: Attended: aknowledged URG or NURG alarm
• SIG PRES: signal presence (power on)
HouseKeeping Alarms/Commands:
A set of housekeeping contacts are available, located on the 25 poles connector of the housekeeping
board.
Alarm Attending:
The detected units alarm condition can be stored through the ACO (Alarms Cut Off) push–button on the
ESC unit (Attended).
This operation will turn OFF the general red LED “URG” and will light up the “ATD” yellow LED on the
ESC unit (Attended); the attended command is also sent to the rack lamps (if present) through the RAI
board.
Trouble–shooting:
This equipment has been designed to dialog with a Personal Computer (PC) for service, activation and
trouble–shooting purpose.
Trouble–shooting procedure for the equipment and details of the alarms for each card and relevant indica-
tions are described in the Operator’s Handbook.
Connection with the PC is achieved through the 9 poles connector (F interface) on the ESC board.
The unit can be connected to an Operation System associated to the Transmission Management Network
in order to execute operations similar to those carried out by the PC.
Characteristics of the cited rack alarms and Housekeeping contacts interface (EM type) are inserted in
Chapter 5.1 on page 315.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 359 / 390
390
5.5 Power supply characteristics
Input Voltage range (from station batteries) – 40,5 V – 48 V – 57,0 V
– 50,0 V – 60 V – 72,0 V

DC/DC Power supply units’ output voltages + 3.6 V 3%

– 5.5 V 3%
+ 5.5 V 3%
+ 2.5 V 3%
Input current Compact shelf = 4 A max
1696MS shelf = 15 A max
Estimated max 1696MS power consumption <400W – a fully equipped shelf with 16 transponders
Estimated max 1696MS_C power consumption <150W – 4 channels line terminal (1 shelf)
Power supply interface according to ETS 300132–2
5.5.1 Maximum power consumption of the boards and units
Unit Maximum power consumption [W]

OMDX8100_M_xx, OADM1/2/4/8 0.5
ESC 9.3
MCC1/ MCC2 16.8
MCC3 13.9
OCC10 22.6
4xANY(_S) without drawers 20
4x ANY(_S) with 4 drawers 32
Drawer 3 (each)
OAC1 and OAC1_L 23.5
OAC2 and OAC2_L 18.5
SPV_F_C_1310_1550, SPV_F_C 0.5
SPVM, SPVM2 12
SPVM_H 11
MVAC 2
OSMC 9.7
OPC 0,5
LAN 2.4
PSC 0.4 + Psec (*)
PSC2 0.4 + Psec (*) + (Ibatx0.4x2)
PSC3 0.4 + Psec (*) + (Ibatx0.4)
HK 2.5
RAI 2
UIC 2.6
FAN 20
FAN_C 9.6
(*) For each PSC board, Psec = 1/2(Pshelf 5V + Pshelf 3.3V)(1–0.85).

Pshelf 5V is the power consumption of the 5V feed,
Pshelf 3.3V is the power consumption of the 3.3V.
Abnormal service range
The 1696MSPAN equipment operating at –48 V does not suffer any damage when subjected to the follow-
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ing voltage range : 0 V to –40,5 V and –57 V to –60 V.

When the equipment operates at –60 V the voltage range becomes: 0 V to –50 V and –72 V to –75 V.
Protection to the station power supply is provided by 16A circuit breakers at the top of the rack.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 360 / 390
390
5.6 Mechanical characteristics
Rack mechanical compatibility ETSI ETS/E3, NEBS2000, Optinex compatible

1696MS subrack size 534 W x 270 D x 443 H mm

1696MS_C subrack size 446 W x 270 D x 132 H mm

Board size 213 D x 265 H mm
1696MS Subrack weight 8.5 Kg
Cooling Fans located at the bottom of the shelf
Rack cabling Vertical between rack and subrack front access
Electrical Connectors IEC 603/DIN 41612
IEC 807 (Sub–D)
IEC 169–1 (coax. 1.0/2.3)
BNC 50 Ω
BNC 75 Ω
RJ45
RJ11
Back–to–back installation Yes
5.6.1 Maximum weight of the boards and units
Unit Weight [Kg]

OMDX8100_M_xx 1.1
OADM4, OADM8 1.1
OADM1, OADM2 0.9
ESC 0.85
MCC/ MCC2 0.9
OCC10 0.93
4xANY(_S) without drawers 1.25
4x ANY(_S) with 4 drawers 1.65
Drawer 0.1 (each)
OAC 1.14
SPV_F_C_1310_1550 0.9
SPV_F_C 0.21
SPVM, SPVM2 0.79
MVAC 0.9
OSMC 1.1
OPC 0.18
LAN 0.13
PSC, PSC2, PSC3 0.28
HK 0.13
RAI 0.12
UIC 0.12
FAN 2.1 (Fan module +filter)
FAN_C 0.330
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 361 / 390
390
5.7 Environmental characteristics
The 1696MSPAN is designed to be compliant to both ETSI and ANSI standards.

The technical data of this chapter are referred to ITU–T Recommendations, ETSI Standards or Telcordia

(former Bellcore) standard.
5.7.1 EMC/EMI
5.7.1.1 ETSI compliancy
The electromagnetic compatibility requirements for the system are specified in the ETSI EN 300 386
(2000).
The following features are applicable :
– environmental class 1,
– normal priority of service.
Immunity
The following table specifies the valid tests and their compliance criteria for immunity. All the items make
reference to the chapters of the ETSI EN 300 386 (2000).
Table 45. Valid tests and compliance criteria for immunity
Phenomenon Coupling Test Test level Compliance

(port) method criterion
Electrostatic chapter 6.2 4 kV (contact) / 4 kV (air) NP

discharge 6 kV (contact) / 8 kV (air) LFS
Electrical fast DC power chapter 6.3 500 V NP

transients
signal chapter 6.3 500 V NP
1 kV LFS
Radiated chapter 6.6 3 V/m NP

electromagnetic 10 V/m LFS
field
Continuous DC power chapter 6.7.2 3V NP

conducted
signals signal chapter 6.5 3V NP
NP: Normal performance within specified limits
LFS: Loss of function (self recovery)

• no corruption of data management
• temporary loss of function following application of test
• self recovery to normal performance occurs at the cessation of the test.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 362 / 390
390
Emission
The following table specifies the requirements for the RF emissions of the equipment. All the items make
reference to the chapters of the ETSI EN 300 386 (2000).
Table 46. Requirements for RF emission
Phenomenon Coupling (port) Test method Maximum level
Conducted emissions DC power chapter 7.2.3 chapter 7.2.3
signal chapter 7.2.1 hazard level A
Radiated emissions chapter 7.3 hazard level A
The designation ”hazard level A” is defined in the EN 55 022 document.
The electromagnetic compatibility requirements for the system are specified in the GR–1089. The recom-
mendation related to immunity and the radiated emission are located on section 3–1 & 3–2.
5.7.1.2 ANSI compliancy
The electromagnetic compatibility requirements for the system are specified in the GR – 1089 (see note).
The recommendation related to immunity and the radiated emission are located section 3–1 & 3–2.
N.B. GR – 1089 – CORE

Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety – Generic Criteria for Network Telecommu-
nication equipment
issue 2, December 1997
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 363 / 390
390
5.7.2 Environmental constraints
5.7.2.1 ETSI compliancy

The technical data of this chapter are, where it is possible, referred to ITU–T Recommendations or ETSI

Standards.
The system is designed for indoor operation with controlled air temperature. The complete environmental
conditions, including climatic, atmospheric and mechanical conditions are specified in the ETS 300 019.
The following environmental hazard levels of this standard is applied.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 364 / 390
390
5.7.2.1.1 Storage
The equipment meets the following requirements Vs. Storage:

ETS 300 019–1–2 : 1992, hazard level 1.2

hazard level 1.2 : weatherproofed, not temperature controlled storage location.

This hazard level applies to weatherproofed storage having neither temperature nor humidity control. The
location may have openings directly to the open air, i.e., it may be only partly weatherproofed. The
climatogram is shown in Figure 221. on page 366.
This hazard level applies to storage locations :
– where equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and temporarily to heat radiation: They may also
be exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts, e.g. through doors, windows or
other openings. They may be subjected to condensed water, dripping water and to icing. They may
also be subjected to limited wind–driven precipitation including snow;
– where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
– with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered
over the whole area, and/or with heavy traffic;
– in areas with sources of sand or dust, including urban areas;
– with vibration of low significance and insignificant shock.
The conditions of this hazard level may occur in :

– unattended buildings ;
– some entrances of buildings ;
– some garages and shacks.
Table 47. Main climatic conditions
Environmental parameter Unit Value
Low air temperature °C –25
High air temperature °C 55
Low relative humidity % 10
High relative humidity % 100
Low absolute humidity g/m3 0,5
High absolute humidity g/m3 29
Rain intensity mm/min no
Rate of change of temperature °C/min 0,5
Low air pressure kPa 70
High air pressure kPa 106
Solar radiation W/m2 1120

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Movement of the surrounding air m/s 30
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 365 / 390
390
Condition of condensation – yes

Condition of precipitation – yes, wind–driven
precipitation
Condition of icing and frosting – yes
Climatogram 2 (ETS 300

019–1–1)
60
50
40
30 20
ABSOLUTE AIR HUMIDITY g/m3

AIR TEMPERATURE 0C
20
10
–10
–20
0.5
–30
–40
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %
Figure 221. Climatogram for hazard level 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 366 / 390
390
5.7.2.1.2 Transportation
The equipment meets the following requirements Vs. transportation :

ETS 300 019–1–1 : 1992, hazard level 2.2 (Careful transportation).

This hazard level applies to transportation where special care has been taken e.g. with respect to low tem-
perature and handling.
hazard level 2.2 covers the condition of hazard level 2.1. In addition hazard level 2.2 includes transporta-
tion in all types of lorries and trailers in areas with well–developed road system.
It also includes transportation by ship and by train specially designed, shock–reducing buffers. Manual
loading and unloading of to 20 Kg is included.
High air temperature, air in unventilated enclosures °C 70
High air temperature, air in ventilated enclosures or outdoor air °C 40
Relative humidity % 95
Absolute humidity g/m3 60
Rain intensity mm/min 6
Heat radiation W/m2 600

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 367 / 390
390
5.7.2.1.3 Climatic for operating conditions
The Equipment meets the requirements of ETSI Stand. without use of fans.

The functionality of the Equipment, Vs. Temperature, is in compliance with :

ETS 300 019–1–3 :1992 , hazard level 3.2.
hazard level 3.2: Partly temperature–controlled locations.
This hazard level applies to locations :
– where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and heat radiation. They may also be
exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings, e.g. through open win-
dows. They may be subjected to condensed water and to water from sources other than rain and
icing. They are not subjected to precipitation;
– where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
– with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered
over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;
– In close proximity to sources of sand or dust;
– with vibration of low significance, e.g. for products fastened to light supporting structures subjected
to negligible vibrations.
The conditions of this hazard level may be found in:
– entrances and staircases of buildings;
– garages;
– cellars;
– certain workshops;
– buildings in factories and industrial process plants;
– unattended equipment stations;
– certain telecommunication buildings;
– ordinary storage rooms for frost resistant products and farm buildings...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 368 / 390
390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
AIR TEMPERATURE 0C
01
–5
0
–40
–30
–20
–10
10
20
30
40
45
50
60
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %

80
90
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
100
1
20
ABSOLUTE AIR HUMIDITY g/m3

Figure 222. Climatogram for hazard level 3.2: partly temperature controlled locations
369 / 390

High air temperature °C 45
Low relative humidity % 5
High relative humidity % 95
Low absolute humidity g/m3 1
High absolute humidity g/m3 29
Rate of change of temperature °C/min 0,5
High air pressure kPa 106
Heat radiation W/m2 600
Condition of wind–driven rain, snow,... – no
Condition of icing – yes
Climatogram 2 (ETS 300

019–1–3)
5.7.2.2 ANSI compliancy
The environmental constraints requirements for the system are also compliant with the GR – 63 (see note).
N.B. GR – 63 – CORE
Network Equipment – Building System (NEBS) Requirements : Physical Protection
issue 1, October 1995
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 370 / 390
390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
MAINTENANCE
371 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
372 / 390
6 MAINTENANCE
ATTENTION EMC NORMS

WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
4.1.3 ON PAGE 32
6.1 Maintenance introduction
6.1.1 General safety rules
SAFETY RULES
Carefully observe the front–panel warning labels prior to working on optical con-
nections while the equipment is in–service.
Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed
to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream
(rack or station distribution frame)
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by

–48 V dc.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-im-

pedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye
damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the
rules pointed out in para.3.2.4.2 on page 27.
6.1.2 General rules
• Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,
ESD connector protections, etc)
• In order to reduce the risk of damage the electrostatic sensitive devices, is mandatory to use
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
the elasticized band (around the wrist) and the coiled cord joined connect with the ground rack
during the touching of the equipment
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 373 / 390
390
6.1.3 Maintenance aspects: definitions
Maintenance consists of a set of operations which maintain or bring back the assembly to optimum
operating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum operational availability.

Maintenance is classified as:
• ROUTINE (PREVENTIVE)
Routine (preventive) maintenance consists in carrying out a number of periodic operations to

minimize the risk of a failure on a link.
These operations can be scheduled or initiated by the equipment supervision system.
• CORRECTIVE
Corrective maintenance consists in carrying out a minimum number of operations to repair a

fault as rapidly as possible.
These operations are initiated by the equipment supervision system and limited to replacement
of boards.
Definition of the technical level of the maintenance agent:
It is mandatory for the technicians in charge of the equipment maintenance to be familiar with the
measurement techniques used on equipment fitted with optical connectors.
6.1.4 Instruments And Accessories
There is a local terminal (PC) which permits to display all the alarms and manages the Equipment.
The relative processing is described in the operator’s handbook.
Where TMN is implemented, an Operation System displays alarms and manages all the connected Equip-
ments of the network. Refer to the relevant handbooks.
The need of special tools and accessories to perform possible routine and corrective maintenance proce-
dures is described inside the procedures themselves.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 374 / 390
390
6.2 Preventive maintenance
The ALCATEL1696MSPAN or 1696MS–C equipment requires no systematic preventive maintenance.

Only a routine maintenance is performed on the fans Equipment.
6.2.1 Routine Maintenance every six months
It is suggested to carry out the following operations every six months:
• no–dust filter cleaning (ETSI rack) / substitution (ANSI rack)
6.2.1.1 No–dust filter cleaning / substitution
NO–DUST FILTER CLEANING / SUBSTITUTION
WARNING: BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE NO–DUST FILTER, CHECK

THAT THE PROTECTIVE ADHESIVE FILM HAS BEEN REMOVED.
SAFETY RULES

–48 V dc.

SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by rotat-

ing fans.
Every six months is has to be performed the following operations
• ETSI rack: cleaning the no–dust filter, either on FAN and FAN_C units
• ANSI rack: substitute the no–dust filter, either on FAN and FAN_C units
Note: the period of one year is only indicative; according to the environmental conditions could be neces-
sary to reduce this period.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 375 / 390
390
See Figure 223. on page 376. Only on FAN_C no–dust filter, it is necessary to pull out the FAN_C unit
following the procedure below described:
• unscrew the two screws (1) ensuring the FAN_C to the compact shelf

• insert the extractor in (2) and pull out to extract the FAN_C from the shelf
• unscrew the screw (3) ensuring the no–dust filter to the FAN_C and extract the no–dust filter
(4).
To re–insert the FAN_C into the shelf
• insert the no–dust filter (4) to the FAN_C
• screw the screw (3) to ensure the no–dust filter into the FAN_C
• properly insert the FAN_C into the shelf
• screw the two screws (1) to ensure the FAN_C to the compact shelf
1 3 EXT FAN_C (for 1696MS_C)

PMU
FAN 4 no–dust filter

FIL-
TER
Figure 223. FAN_C: no–dast filter extraction

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 376 / 390
390
6.2.2 Routine Maintenance every year
It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly:

• power cables check

6.2.2.1 Power cables check
SAFETY RULES

–48 V dc.

It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly:
– Check that the power cable is perfectly safety grounded.
– Make sure that the subrack has been tightly fastened to the rack with screws, to guarantee grounding
(the rack is connected to the station ground).
6.2.3 Routine Maintenance every five years
It is suggested the replacement of each FANS unit (FAN and FAN_C) after five years of working.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 377 / 390
390
6.3 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting)
Since the Troubleshooting procedure is carried out with the use of the Craft Terminal , please refer ,for
details, to the Maintenance Section of the Operator’s Handbook.

FIXING THE UNITS (AND MODULES) INTO THE SUBRACK

The screw tightening torque for fixing the units (and modules, if any and if fixed by screws) into
the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
The following paragraph can be used as an help during corrective actions.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 378 / 390
390
6.3.1 Fault location: alarm & status indication
This chapter guides you to localize the defaults occurring on the NE. Starting from an alarm indication,
it helps you to find the cause of the default and decide what has to be done to correct it.
Fault location can be performed by following simple rules. First, transmission domain alarms have to be
checked to locate the degraded NE. Then, when the faulty NE is identified, equipment domain alarms are
checked to locate degraded board or the faulty optical connection.
To give the operator the possibility to localize the faults, a few alarms are available:
– in a terminal:
• on each transponder MCC (no OCh–overhead):
– Loss of power at Rx side (WDM or user side)
– Loss Of Clock at Tx side (given by the CDR, WDM or user side)
– Laser degradation (WDM or user side)
• LOS detection at equipment output (OLOS)
• LOS detection at equipment input (ILOS)
ILOS LOC LDG
RX TX
B&W WDM
M
U
X SPV OLOS
LB
SB
TX RX M
B&W WDM U
X
LDG LOC ILOS
D
M
U
X LB
SB
D
M
U
X
SPV ILOS
Figure 224. position of the alarms in a terminal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 379 / 390
390
– in an OADM:
• on each transponder MCC (no OCh–overhead):
– Loss of power at Rx side (WDM or user side)
– Loss Of Clock at Tx side (given by the CDR, WDM or user side)

– Laser degradation (WDM or user side)

– LBER at user Rx (based on B1 calculation – only for SDH/SONET signals)
• LOS detection at equipment output (OLOS)
• LOS detection at equipment input (ILOS)
pass–through channels
SPV & ILOS ILOS LOC LDG ILOS LOC LDG

SPV OLOS
RX TX RX TX
D WDM B&W B&W WDM
M M
U U
X X
D
M M
U U
X X
TX RX TX RX
WDM B&W B&W WDM
OLOS SPV SPV & ILOS
LDG LOC ILOS LDG LOC ILOS
pass–through channels
Figure 225. position of the alarms in an OADM
Alarms on transponders are described in the corresponding chapter (4.1).

Alarms on terminals input/output and on OADM output are described with OMDX and OADM units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 380 / 390
390
6.4 Set of spare parts
6.4.1 Suggested Spare Parts

The overall number of spares depends on Customer requirements, and should be based on the average
amount of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF but also during MTTR;
the latter depending on the amount of spare parts available.
The set of spare parts is inclusive of a minimum number of spares for each type of replaceable plug–in
unit (see unit list in paragraph 2.2.3 on page 75).
6.4.2 General rules on spare parts management
Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating equipment
It is suggested to periodically check those spare units have not been utilized for over a year.
If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, make sure that the spare parts
are placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and damp.
Moreover, they should also be well grounded to avoid electrostatic discharges.
If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site,
make sure that the following is observed:
– the spare parts must be wrapped in anti–static and padded envelopes;
– the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might damage them (e.g.
, gas);
– if during transport the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept, make
sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal
shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up.
When replacing a unit/sub–unit, make sure that the spare unit/sub–unit is set exactly as the
replaced one. For the presettings procedures see section HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMEN-
TATION.
6.4.3 Particular rules on spare parts management
Whenever some units with flash-memories are common to different kinds of equipment or to different ver-
sions of the same type of equipment, it is possible to maintain one spare part only: this allows spare part
stock saving, even though software downloading will be necessary when the software loaded into the unit
(program part or data part) is different from that necessary in the equipment where the spare unit must
be used.
At the end of the commissioning phase or after an equipment data change, it is suggested to save the
equipment data, e.g. on floppy disk, and store this floppy disk in the spare part stock pointing out the equip-
ment it refers to.
6.5 Repair Form
To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Figure 226. on
page 382.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The repair form must be filled–in with as much data as possible and returned to Alcatel together with the
faulty unit.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 381 / 390
390
ALCATE L
REPAIR FORM
Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to Alcatel

CUSTOMER NAME ORDER NUMBER/CONTRACT NUMBER
SITE BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY
SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT PRODUCT RELEASE EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
STATION/RACK SUBRACK SLOT

TO BE FILLED IN BY THE SENDER
MNEMONIC ALCATEL PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER FAULTY UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION
FAULT PHASE REASON FOR REPAIR PRESUMED CAUSE
INSTALLATION / CLEAR FAULT DROP IN PERFORMANCE INTERNAL

TURN ON
LIGHTNING
OPERATION INTERMITTENT FAULT UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT
EXTERNAL AIR COND.
MAINTENANCE TEMPERATURE FAULT OTHER
DATE NAME OF SENDER

FAULT STILL PRESENT
AFTER REPAIR
COMMENTS
PROCESSING FAULTS DETECTED

TO BE FILLED IN BY THE REPAIR OPERATOR
NO FAULTS FOUND UPGRADE SOLDERING / COMPONENT ADJUSTMENT

WIRING
A I C F–L P
STANDARD REPAIRING NOT REPAIRABLE MECHANICAL PRINTED DIRT

(REJECTED) CIRCUIT BOARD
B–D M V1 V1 V2
SUBSTITUTED
QUALITY ALERT CORROSION OTHER
I S–X V3
NOTE : LETTERS ARE FOR FACTORY USE
COMMENTS
DATE REPAIRING NUMBER REPAIRING CENTRE NAME OF REPAIR OPERATOR

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 226. Repair form
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 382 / 390
390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION
383 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
390
3AL 95278 AA AA
384 / 390
UNIT DOCUMENTATION LIST
This section contains the documents sheets to refer to for unit/sub–unit hardware setting options.
The list of the enclosed documents is given in Table 51. on page 388, according to the ANV part number.
TABLE EXPLANATION:
– UNIT IDENTIFICATION P/Ns AND CHANGE STATUS
Each unit or sub-unit is distinguished by:
• a dual Part No.:
– Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx xx)
– ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xxxx) (NOTE)
NOTE The last two ANV-P/N letters (in the following stated as ’suffix’) stand for a ”feasible
alternative”, they might differentiate two units even though still functionally
compatible. For this reason the indicated ANV P/N does not include the last two
letters.
For example : the units having P/Ns ”3AL–34065–AAAA” and ”3AL–34065–AABA”
are functionally compatible and, as regards to hardware settings, the MSxxx
document (described hereafter) 3AL–34065–AAAA-MSxxx is applicable for both.
• and by a pair of design & production series (change status):
– CS, associated to the Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)
– ICS, associated to ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx)
The following table shows an example of correspondence between ”FACTORY P/N + CS” and
”ANV P/N + ICS”
Table 50. Example of correspondence between CS and ’suffix + ICS’
N.B. The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!
FACTORY CODE ANV CODE
P/N CS P/N ICS
487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AA AA 01
487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AA AB 01
487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AA AC 01
In this example you can see that the production series is identified only by the CS as far as the
Factory code is concerned, and by the ’suffix + ICS’ if the ANV code is referred to.
Some of the possible positions of the label indicating the unit’s P/Ns and CS–ICS are illustrated
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
in para.4.4 on page 34.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 385 / 390
390
– CROSS–REFERENCE
• Id. Unit alphabetical notation. It indicates the unit containing one or more subunits.

• App. It reports the unit notation (Id) to which the sub–unit belongs.

The hardware settings can be executed after having checked all the sub–units belonging to a unit,
by considering the above cited cross–reference, and by using the presetting documents indicated
in the table and presented in the following point.
– ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
For each type of unit or sub-unit having setting options that can be customized, the document
”ANV P/N”–MSxxx
is annexed to this handbook (in the case of Documentation on CD-ROM the MSxxx documents may
be given in a CD-ROM different from that containing this Technical Handbook).
The MSxxx documents are enclosed in numerical order. The Edition of the enclosed MSxxx
document is the highest available on the date on which the Technical Handbook is assembled.
Use of the document MSxxx:
• MSxxx means ”document for hardware presetting options” (the MSxxx document’s Part No.
is as that of the unit or sub-unit and its MS acronym defines type).
The xxx part of MSxxx is relevant to ANV internal identification codes.
• As the Customer may have to manage many units of the same type (same P/N) but with different
CS–ICS, the document MSxxx describes with possible different chapters the different setting
options, according to all the possible CSs–ICSs. For this purpose, a table at the beginning of
document (PREFACE) indicates the chapter to be used according to the CS or the
corresponding ’suffix + ICS’, taking into account that:
– a change of the production series does not necessarily imply a change in the setting
options;
– a change of the ANV P/N suffix does not imply a new MSxxx document;
– the CS, SUFFIX and ICS must be meant as:
• from specified CS, SUFFIX or ICS (included)
• to next CS, SUFFIX or ICS (excluded) if listed
– the sequence of CSs is increasing from alphanumeric to numeric (e.g. CS=A0 is lower
than CS=01).
Each chapter contains:
– one or more tables defining the relationship between the functions achievable and the
setting options to make;
– the unit layout drawing which shows the exact location of all the setting options.
N.B. IDENTIFIES PIN 1 OF COMPONENT
The setting options described in the documents MSxxx must be used according to
3AL377470001 (962.000.022 F) MSxxx document, inserted in Table 51. on page 388, which
shows the ’ON’ (closed) position of micro–switches.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Those setting options that on the table are indicated by the caption For factory use only should
never be modified.
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 386 / 390
390
EXAMPLE
N.B. The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!
Taking into account the same unit of Table 50. on page 385:
P/N CS P/N ICS
487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AAAA 01
487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AAAB 01
487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AAAC 01
and supposing that the setting options valid for CS=01 are equal to those for CS=02, but change
for CS=03, the table at the beginning of the document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ will be:
FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CODICE DI FABBRICA CODICE ANV
CHAPTER
CAPITOLO FROM CS FROM SUFFIX FROM ICS
DA CS DA SUFFISSO DA ICS
1 01 ––AA 01
2 03 ––AC 01
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:
P/N CS P/N ICS
487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AAAA 01
487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AAAB 01
you will use Chapter 1 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:
P/N CS P/N ICS
487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AAAC 01

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
487.156.612 04 3AL 34422 AAAD 01
you will use Chapter 2 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 387 / 390
390
Table 51. Hardware presetting documentation
The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the handbook is

the highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of enclosed documents is

not specified in this table.
Only the boards that need hardware settings are listed in this table
ANV P/N Document

Id NAME App for hardware
(Factory P/N) presetting
3AL 86615 AA––

1 OMDX_8100_M_L1_XS –
(474 156 215)
3AL 86615 AJ––

2 OMDX_8100_M_L1_X –
(474 156 065)
3AL 86615 AB––

3 OMDX_8100_M_L2 –
(474 156 216)
3AL 86615 AC––

4 OMDX_8100_M_S1 –
(474 156 217)
3AL 86615 AD––

5 OMDX_8100_M_S2 –
(474 156 218)
3AL 86637 AA––

6 OADM_8100_M_L1_S –
(474 156 008)
3AL 86637 AB––

7 OADM_8100_M_L2_S –
(474 156 009)
3AL 86637 AC––

8 OADM_8100_M_S1_S –
(474 156 010)
3AL 86637 AD––

9 OADM_8100_M_S2_S –
(474 156 011)
3AL 86637 BC––

10 OADM_4100_M_ch20–23_S –
(474 156 013)
3AL 86637 BD––

11 OADM_4100_M_ch25–28_S –
(474 156 014)
3AL 86637 BA––

12 OADM_4100_M_ch30–33_S –
(474 156 003)
3AL 86637 BB––

13 OADM_4100_M_ch35–38_S –
(474 156 012)
3AL 86637 BG––

14 OADM_4100_M_ch42–45_S –
(474 156 017)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 86637 BH––

15 OADM_4100_M_ch47–50_S –
(474 156 018)
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 388 / 390
390
ANV P/N Document
3AL 86637 BE––

16 OADM_4100_M_ch52–55_S –
(474 156 015)
3AL 86637 BF––

17 OADM_4100_M_ch57–60_S –
(474 156 016)
3AL 86777AJ––
18 OADM1_100_M–ch30_S –
(474 156 079)
3AL 86777AK––
19 OADM1_100_M–ch31_S –
(474 156 080)
3AL 86777AL––
20 OADM1_100_M–ch32_S –
(474 156 081)
3AL 86777AM––
21 OADM1_100_M–ch33_S –
(474 156 082)
3AL 86777AN––
22 OADM1_100_M–ch35_S –
(474 156 083)
3AL 86777AP––
23 OADM1_100_M–ch36_S –
(474 156 084)
3AL 86777AQ––
24 OADM1_100_M–ch37_S –
(474 156 085)
3AL 86777AR––
25 OADM1_100_M–ch38_S –
(474 156 086)
3AL 86777BE––
26 OADM1_100_M–ch47_S –
(474 156 091)
3AL 86777BF––
27 OADM1_100_M–ch48_S –
(474 156 092)
3AL 86778AB––
28 OADM2_100_M–ch30_31_S –
(474 156 135)
3AL 86778AC––
29 OADM2_100_M–ch32_33_S –
(474 156 136)
3AL 86778AD––
30 OADM2_100_M–ch35_36_S –
(474 156 137)
3AL 86778AE––
31 OADM2_100_M–ch37_38_S –
(474 156 138)
3AL 86778AF––
32 OADM2_100_M–ch47_48_S –
(474 156 139)
3AL86779AA––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
33 SPV_F_1310_1550 –
(474156140)
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 389 / 390
390
ANV P/N Document

3AL 86661 AA––

34 ESC –
(411 101 428)
3AL 86606 AA––

35 SPVM –
(411 101 255)
3AL 86606 AB––

36 SPVM2 –
(411 102 193)
3AL 86606 AC––

37 SPVM_H –
(411 102 534)
3AL 86653 AA––

38 LANC –
(474 156 024)
Table continues with MSZZQ document list
ANV P/N Document

3AL 86638 AA–– 3AL 86638 AAAA

METRO OAMDX CONTROL BOARD 1 to 33
(487 156 039) MSZZQ
3AL 86662 AA–– 3AL 79747 AAAA

EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER 34
(483 100 286) MSZZQ
3AL 86612 AA–– 3AL 86612 AAAA

PBA–CONTROL SPV–M 35, 36, 37
(483 100 262) MSZZQ
3AL 86617 AA–– 3AL 86617 AAAA

PBA–CONTROL LANC 38
(487 156 957) MSZZQ
END OF DOCUMENT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3AL 95278 AA AA 390 / 390
390
LABELS AND ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
TARGHETTE E INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 3AL 95278 AAAA ED 01
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)
– No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 392+4=396
– DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du –ks): 33.127 kBytes
INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

– STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING
– COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:

HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:
No pagine numerate
(facciate) numbered
No pages da from a to
TARGHETTE - LABELS
frontespizio
2
front
3AL 95278 AAAA ED 01
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
manuale
390 1/390 390/390
manual
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Vedere lista da pagina: No documenti MSZZQ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ALLEGATI DI UNITÀ (MSZZQ) See list from page: No documents MSZZQ
UNIT PRESETTING DOCUMENTS (MSZZQ)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ 390
TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES: 392

4
TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS: 196
WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY
• The documents MSZZQ cited in section ’HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION’ are

stored in eMATRIX.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format.

• Source file: ALICE 6.10
ED 01 RELEASED
3AL 95278 AAAA TQZZA Y 1/ 4
4
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE
THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

Site
VIMERCATE FCG
Originators 1696MSPAN REL.2.2

C. GIANNI
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Domain : OND
Division : WDM
Rubric : 1696 MS
Type : 1696MSPAN REL.2.2 TECHNICAL HDBK
Distribution Codes Internal : External :
Approvals
Name F. BRUYERE D. LESTERLIN

App.
Name A. MICHAUD
App.
INFORMAZIONI EDITORIALI
– ORIGINALE SU FILE: ALICE 6.10

• sistemazione ’toc’ e ’figlist’
I SEGUENTI DATI sono RIPORTATI IN AUTOMATICO SU ETICHETTE e FRONTALE
3AL 95278 AAAA

ED 01
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2

1696MSPAN Rel.2.2
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
VOL. 1/1
ED 01 RELEASED
4
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1

1696MSPAN Rel.2.2
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
3AL 95278 AAAA ED 01 VOL.1/1

1696MSPAN Rel.2.2 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
3AL 95278 AAAA ED 01 VOL.1/1

1696MSPAN Rel.2.2
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
3AL 95278 AAAA ED 01 VOL.1/1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01 RELEASED
4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
RELEASED
4
3AL 95278 AAAA TQZZA
Y
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO – END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT
4/ 4

Alcatel - 1696 Technical v22 PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Alcatel - 1696 Technical v22 PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Technical Handbook

3AL 95278 AAAA Ed.01

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

4 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

01 041015 D. LESTERLIN C. GIANNI

3AL 95278 AA AA 1 / 390

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

2.5.2 Multiplexers front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

3AL 95278 AA AA 2 / 390

3.1.3 Wavelength Division Multiplexing sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

3.1.4 Optical Fiber Amplification sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

4 UNITS DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

4.6.1 Single and Multi Mode Optical Protection Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

3AL 95278 AA AA 3 / 390

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

UNIT DOCUMENTATION LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

3AL 95278 AA AA 4 / 390

Figure 1. Subrack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Figure 2. Subrack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Figure 44. OCC10 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

3AL 95278 AA AA 5 / 390

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Figure 96. O–SNCP principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

3AL 95278 AA AA 6 / 390

Figure 104. 4 channels OADM board used as a terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Figure 105. 4 channels terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Figure 146. Block diagram of the MCC1 boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

3AL 95278 AA AA 7 / 390

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Figure 200. I–Link_S block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

3AL 95278 AA AA 8 / 390

Figure 208. PMU cabling scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Figure 209. PMU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

3AL 95278 AA AA 9 / 390

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

3AL 95278 AA AA 10 / 390

1.1 General information

1.2 Handbook applicability

This handbook applies to the following product-releases:

PRODUCT ANV P/N FACTORY P/N

PRODUCT RELEASE VERSION (N.B.) ANV P/N FACTORY P/N

N.B. See NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS in para.6.4.1

3AL 95278 AA AA 13 / 390

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Table 1. Handbooks related to the product’s hardware

Provides information regarding maintenance using the craft terminal

3AL 95278 AA AA 14 / 390

Part No. HDBK

ELB Rel.2.X Operator’s Handbook 3AL 88877 AAAA

3AL 95278 AA AA 15 / 390

See para.6.5 on page 53

REF CD–ROM TITLE ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1320CT 3.X CD–ROM–DOC EN 3AL 79552 AAAA 417.100.032